DIGITAL CAMERA
User's Manual
En
Package Contents
Confirm that the package contains the following items:
BS-1 accessory shoe cover
DK-23 rubber eyecup
BF-1B body cap
D7100 camera
EN-EL15 rechargeable
Li-ion battery (with terminal
cover)
MH-25 battery charger (AC
wall adapter supplied only in
countries or regions where required.
Shape of power cable depends on
country of sale.)
UC-E6 USB cable
Warranty
ViewNX 2 CD
User’s Manual (this manual)
Purchasers of the lens kit option should confirm that the package also includes a lens.
menus and messages in English and Japanese only; other languages are not
supported. We apologize for any inconvenience this may cause.
Digitutor
“Digitutor”, a series of “watch and learn” manuals in movie form, is available from the following
website: http://www.nikondigitutor.com/index_eng.html
A For Your Safety
Before using the camera for the first time, read the safety instructions in “For Your Safety”
Q&A Index
Find what you’re looking for using this “question and answer” index.
0
Taking Photographs
Shooting Modes and Framing Options
i
Is there a quick and easy way to take snapshots (i mode)?
How do I quickly adjust settings for different scenes?
Can I use special effects during shooting?
Can I adjust shutter speed to freeze or blur motion (mode S)?
Can I adjust aperture to blur backgrounds or bring them into focus
(mode A)?
How do I make long (“time”) exposures (mode M)?
Can I frame photos in the monitor (C live view photography)?
Can I shoot movies (1 movie live view)?
Release Modes
i
Can I take photos one at a time or in quick succession?
How do I take pictures with the self-timer?
How do I take pictures with an optional ML-L3 remote control?
Can I reduce shutter noise in quiet surroundings (quiet shutter-release)?
Focus
i
Can I choose how the camera focuses?
Can I choose the focus point?
Exposure
i
Can I make photos brighter or darker?
How do I preserve details in shadows and highlights?
Using the Flash
i
Can I set the flash to fire automatically when needed?
How do I keep the flash from firing?
How do I avoid “red-eye”?
Image Quality and Size
i
How do I take pictures for printing at large sizes?
How can I get more pictures on the memory card?
0
Viewing Photographs
Playback
i
How do I view photographs on the camera?
How do I view more information about a photo?
Can I view photos in an automatic slide show?
Can I view photos on a TV?
Can I protect photos from accidental deletion?
Deletion
i
How do I delete unwanted photos?
ii
0
Retouching Photographs
How do I create retouched copies of photos?
How do I remove “red-eye”?
How do I make JPEG copies of RAW (NEF) photos?
Can I overlay two NEF (RAW) photos to make a single image?
Can I create a copy of a photo that looks like a painting?
Can I trim movie footage on the camera or save movie stills?
0
Menus and Settings
How do I use the menus?
How do I display menus in another language?
How do I use the command dials?
How do I keep the displays from turning off?
How do I focus the viewfinder?
Can I display a framing grid in the viewfinder or the monitor?
How do I tell if the camera is level?
How do I set the camera clock?
How do I format memory cards?
How do I restore default settings?
How do I get help for a menu or message?
0
Connections
How do I copy photos to a computer?
How do I print photos?
Can I print the date of recording on my photos?
0
Maintenance and Optional Accessories
What memory cards can I use?
What lenses can I use?
What optional flash units (Speedlights) can I use?
What other accessories are available for my camera?
What software is available for my camera?
What do I do with the supplied eyepiece cap?
How do I clean the camera?
Where should I take my camera for servicing and repairs?
iii
Quick Start Guide
Follow these steps for a quick start with the D7100.
1 Attach the camera strap.
Attach the strap securely to the camera eyelets.
Mounting mark
(camera)
Keeping marks (indicated by white dot) aligned, position
lens on camera, then rotate until lens clicks into place.
Mounting mark (lens)
iv
Menu Options
Delete
Selected
Select date
All
Reset shooting
menu
Yes
No
Storage folder
Select folder by number
Select folder from list
File naming
Playback folder D7100
(default)
All
File naming
Current
Select/set
Role played by
card in Slot 2
Overflow
Backup
(default)
Hide image
Select date
Deselect all?
Playback display Basic photo info
RAW Slot 1 - JPEG Slot 2
NEF (RAW) + JPEG fine
NEF (RAW) + JPEG normal
NEF (RAW) + JPEG basic
NEF (RAW)
Image quality
options
Focus point
Additional photo info
None (image only)
Highlights
JPEG fine
JPEG normal
JPEG basic
Large
(default)
RGB histogram
Shooting data
Overview
Image size
(default)
Medium
Small
Copy image(s)
Select source
Select image(s)
Image area
DX (24×16)
1.3× (18×12)
Size priority
Optimal quality
Type
NEF (RAW) bit depth
Auto
Incandescent
Fluorescent
Direct sunlight
Flash
(default)
(default)
Select destination folder
Copy image(s)?
On
JPEG
compression
Image review
After delete
Off
(default)
NEF (RAW)
recording
Show next
Show previous
Continue as before
On
(default)
White balance
(default)
Rotate tall
Slide show
(default)
Off
Start
Image type
Frame interval
Cloudy
Shade
DPOF print order Select/set
Choose color temp.
Preset manual
Deselect all?
Items marked with a
icon can be saved to the memory card using the Save/load settings > Save
cameras by inserting the memory card into the camera and selecting Save/load settings > Load
settings.
vi
Set Picture
Control
Standard
Neutral
(default)
Interval timer
shooting
Choose start time
Now
Vivid
Monochrome
Portrait
Start time
Interval
Select no. of times×no. of
shots
Landscape
Start
Manage Picture Save/edit
Rename 1
Delete 1
Load/save
sRGB
Control
Movie settings
Frame size/frame rate
Movie quality
Microphone
Destination
Color space
(default)
Adobe RGB
Auto
Extra high
High
1 Not available if no custom Picture Controls are
present.
2 Defaults to Off (modes P, S, A, M, %, g, i, u, 1,
Active
D-Lighting 2
2, and 3) or Auto (other modes).
Normal
Low
A CUSTOM SETTING MENU
Off
HDR (high
dynamic range)
HDR mode
HDR strength
Reset custom
settings
Yes
No
Auto distortion On
a Autofocus
control
Off
On
Off
High
Normal
Low
Off
(default)
(default)
(default)
a1 AF-C priority Release
selection
a2 AF-S priority Release
(default)
(default)
(default)
Long exposure
NR
Focus
High ISO NR
selection
Focus
5 (Long)
4
3 (Normal)
2
a3 Focus
tracking with
lock-on
ISO sensitivity
settings
ISO sensitivity
1 (Short)
Off
a4 AF point
illumination
Auto
On
Off
(default)
Auto ISO sensitivity control
a5 Focus point Wrap
wrap-around
No wrap
51 points
11 points
On
(default)
(default)
Remote control Delayed remote
mode (ML-L3)
a6 Number of
focus points
Quick-response remote
Remote mirror-up
a7 Built-in AF-
assist
(default)
Off
(default)
Off
Multiple
exposure
Multiple exposure mode
Number of shots
Auto gain
illuminator
vii
b Metering/exposure
d Shooting/display
b1 ISOsensitivity 1/3 step
(default)
(default)
d1 Beep
Volume
Pitch
On
Off
Show ISO sensitivity
Show ISO/Easy ISO
Show frame count (default)
On
Off
6 fps
5 fps
4 fps
3 fps
2 fps
1 fps
1–100
step value
1/2 step
b2 EV steps for 1/3 step
d2 Viewfinder
grid display
exposure
cntrl
1/2 step
(default)
d3 ISO display
and
b3 Easy exposure On (Auto reset)
compensation
On
Off
φ
adjustment
(default)
(default)
d4 Screen tips
(default)
b4 Center-
6 mm
8 mm
φ 10 mm
φ 13 mm
Average
Yes
weighted
area
φ
d5 CL mode
shooting
speed
(default)
b5 Fine-tune
optimal
No
(default)
exposure
d6 Max.
continuous
release
c Timers/AE lock
c1 Shutter-
release
On
Off
d7 File number On
(default)
(default)
(default)
(default)
(default)
button AE-L
sequence
Off
Reset
c2 Standby
timer
4 s
6 s
d8 Information Auto
10 s
30 s
1 min
display
Manual
On
Off
d9 LCD
illumination
5 min
d10 Exposure
delay mode
3 s
2 s
1 s
Off
10 min
30 min
No limit
Self-timer delay
Number of shots
(default)
(default)
c3 Self-timer
d11 Flash warning On
Off
Interval between shots
Playback
Menus
d12 MB-D15
battery type
LR6 (AA alkaline)
HR6 (AA Ni-MH)
FR6 (AA lithium)
(default)
c4 Monitor off
delay
Information display
Image review
Live view
d13 Battery order Use MB-D15 batteries first
(default)
Use camera battery first
c5 Remote on
duration
1 min
5 min
10 min
15 min
(default)
(ML-L3)
viii
e Bracketing/flash
f Controls
e1 Flash sync
speed
1/320 s (Auto FP)
1/250 s (Auto FP)
1/250 s
1/200 s
1/160 s
1/125 s
1/100 s
1/80 s
1/60 s
f1 OK button
Shooting mode
Playback mode
Live view
(default)
(default)
f2 Assign Fn
button
Press
Press + command dials
Press
Press + command dials
f3 Assign
preview
button
f4 Assign AE-L/ Press
AF-L button
Press + command dials
Reverse rotation
Change main/sub
Aperture setting
Menus and playback
Yes
e2 Flash shutter 1/60 s
f5 Customize
command
dials
speed
1/30 s
1/15 s
1/8 s
1/4 s
1/2 s
1 s
2 s
4 s
8 s
15 s
30 s
f6 Release
button to use
dial
f7 Slot empty
release lock
No
(default)
Release locked
Enable release
(default)
f8 Reverse
indicators
(default)
(default)
f9 Assign
MB-D15
AE/AF lock
AE lock only
AE lock (Hold)
AF lock only
AF-ON
e3 Flash cntrl for TTL
(default)
built-in flash
Manual
4 button
Repeating flash
Commander mode
TTL
Manual
Entire frame
Background only
e3 Optional
(default)
(default)
FV lock
Same as Fn button
flash *
e4 Exposure
comp. for
flash
e5 Modeling
flash
g Movie
g1 Assign Fn
button
View photo shooting info
AE/AF lock
AE lock only
AE lock (Hold)
AF lock only
AF-ON
On
Off
(default)
(default)
e6 Auto
bracketing
set
AE & flash
AE only
Flash only
WB bracketing
ADL bracketing
None
(default)
g2 Assign
preview
button
View photo shooting info
AE/AF lock
AE lock only
AE lock (Hold)
AF lock only
AF-ON
e7 Bracketing
order
MTR > under > over (default)
Under > MTR > over
*
Displayed only when optional SB-400 flash unit is
attached.
None
(default)
ix
g Movie
Non-CPU lens
data
Lens number
g3 Assign AE-L/ View photo shooting info
Focal length (mm)
Maximum aperture
AF fine-tune (On/Off)
Saved value
AF-L button
AE/AF lock
AE lock only
AE lock (Hold)
AF lock only
AF-ON
(default)
AF fine-tune
Default
List saved values
Output resolution
Device control
Standby timer
None
HDMI
GPS
g4 Assign
Take photos
Record movies
(default)
shutter
button
Position
Use GPS to set camera clock
Format memory Slot 1
Wireless mobile Enable
(default)
adapter
Disable
card
Slot 2
Network
Choose hardware
(available with
optional UT-1)
Save user
settings
Save to U1
Save to U2
Reset U1
Reset U2
–5 – +5
Network settings
Options
Eye-Fi upload 2
Slot 1
Slot 2
Reset user
settings
Monitor
Firmware version –
brightness
Clean image
sensor
1 Not available at battery levels of J or below.
2 Available only with compatible Eye-Fi memory
cards.
Clean now
Clean at startup/shutdown
Start
Lock mirror up
for cleaning 1
Image Dust Off Start
ref photo
Clean sensor and then start
Flicker reduction Auto
(default)
50 Hz
60 Hz
Time zone and
date
Time zone
Date and time
Date format
Daylight saving time
Language
Auto image
rotation
See page 340.
On
Off
–
(default)
Battery info
Image comment Attach comment
Input comment
Copyright
Attach copyright information
information
Artist
Copyright
Save settings
Load settings
–
Save/load
settings
Virtual horizon
x
D-Lighting
–
–
Add items
Playback menu
Shooting menu
Custom setting menu
Setup menu
Retouch menu
–
Red-eye
correction
Trim
–
Monochrome
Black-and-white
Sepia
*
Remove items
Rank items
Choose tab
Cyanotype
Skylight
–
Filter effects
MY MENU
Warm filter
Red intensifier
Green intensifier
Blue intensifier
Cross screen
Soft
RECENT SETTINGS
* Items can also be deleted by highlighting them
in MY MENU and pressing the O (Q) button
twice.
Color balance
Image overlay 1
–
–
NEF (RAW)
processing
–
Resize
Select image
Choose destination
Choose size
Quick retouch
Straighten
–
–
Distortion
control
Auto
Manual
Fisheye
Color outline
Color sketch
Perspective
control
–
–
–
–
Miniature effect
Selective color
Edit movie
–
–
Choose start/end point
Save selected frame
–
Side-by-side
comparison 2
1 Available only when G button is pressed and
N tab selected in menus.
2 Only available when P button is pressed to
display retouch menu during full-frame playback.
xi
Table of Contents
The Control Panel......................................................................................................................8
The P button ............................................................................................................................ 18
Charge the Battery................................................................................................................. 22
xii
Basic Playback...........................................................................................................................39
k Portrait...............................................................................................................................41
l Landscape........................................................................................................................41
p Child...................................................................................................................................42
m Sports.................................................................................................................................42
n Close Up............................................................................................................................42
o Night Portrait ..................................................................................................................42
r Night Landscape............................................................................................................43
s Party/Indoor....................................................................................................................43
t Beach/Snow ....................................................................................................................43
u Sunset................................................................................................................................43
v Dusk/Dawn......................................................................................................................44
w Pet Portrait.......................................................................................................................44
x Candlelight........................................................................................................................44
y Blossom.............................................................................................................................44
z Autumn Colors ...............................................................................................................45
0 Food....................................................................................................................................45
P: Programmed Auto .............................................................................................................48
S: Shutter-Priority Auto .........................................................................................................49
A: Aperture-Priority Auto......................................................................................................50
M: Manual...................................................................................................................................51
Long Time-Exposures (M Mode Only) ........................................................................52
xiii
Image Size................................................................................................................................. 68
AF-Area Mode.......................................................................................................................... 73
Manual Focus............................................................................................................................78
Autoexposure Lock.................................................................................................................84
Modifying Picture Controls...............................................................................................107
Preserving Detail in Highlights and Shadows............................................................ 113
xiv
Flash Mode............................................................................................................................. 120
WR-1 Wireless Remote Controllers................................................................................ 130
Focusing in Live View......................................................................................................... 155
Using the P Button .............................................................................................................. 157
Using the P Button .............................................................................................................. 164
xv
% Night Vision...................................................................................................................178
g Color Sketch ................................................................................................................178
i Miniature Effect .........................................................................................................178
u Selective Color.............................................................................................................179
1 Silhouette ......................................................................................................................179
2 High Key .........................................................................................................................179
3 Low Key ..........................................................................................................................179
Calendar Playback................................................................................................................ 194
Using ViewNX 2..................................................................................................................... 203
Connecting the Printer.......................................................................................................208
xvi
D The Playback Menu: ManagingImages ........................................................................... 217
Playback Display Options............................................................................................. 219
C The Shooting Menu: ShootingOptions ............................................................................ 224
Storage Folder.................................................................................................................. 225
A Custom Settings: Fine-TuningCameraSettings................................................................... 229
a1: AF-C Priority Selection............................................................................................ 231
b2: EV Steps for Exposure Cntrl.................................................................................. 234
b5: Fine-tune Optimal Exposure................................................................................ 236
c: Timers/AE Lock................................................................................................................. 236
xvii
d4: Screen Tips..................................................................................................................239
d5: CL Mode Shooting Speed......................................................................................239
d12: MB-D15 Battery Type............................................................................................242
f5: Customize Command Dials....................................................................................257
f9: Assign MB-D15 4 Button........................................................................................259
g3: Assign AE-L/AF-L Button........................................................................................260
g4: Assign Shutter Button.............................................................................................260
xviii
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup.......................................................................................... 261
Save/Load Settings......................................................................................................... 268
N The Retouch Menu: CreatingRetouchedCopies................................................................. 273
D-Lighting.......................................................................................................................... 276
Red-Eye Correction......................................................................................................... 276
Filter Effects....................................................................................................................... 278
Color Balance.................................................................................................................... 279
Resize................................................................................................................................... 283
O My Menu/m Recent Settings...................................................................................... 291
xix
Other Accessories................................................................................................................. 308
Storage.....................................................................................................................................312
“Clean Now”.......................................................................................................................313
“Clean at Startup/Shutdown”......................................................................................314
Exposure Program (Mode P)............................................................................................. 327
Shooting (P, S, A, M) ...........................................................................................................330
Playback...................................................................................................................................330
Specifications......................................................................................................................... 336
xx
For Your Safety
To prevent damage to your Nikon product or injury to yourself or to others, read the following
safety precautions in their entirety before using this equipment. Keep these safety instructions
where all those who use the product will read them.
The consequences that could result from failure to observe the precautions listed in this
section are indicated by the following symbol:
This icon marks warnings. To prevent possible injury, read all warnings before using this
Nikon product.
A
❚❚WARNINGS
Keep the sun out of the frame
Keep out of reach of children
A
A
A
Keep the sun well out of the frame when
shooting backlit subjects. Sunlight
focused into the camera when the sun is
in or close to the frame could cause a fire.
Failure to observe this precaution could
result in injury. In addition, note that small
parts constitute a choking hazard. Should a
child swallow any part of this equipment,
consult a physician immediately.
Do not look at the sun through the viewfinder
Viewing the sun or other strong light
source through the viewfinder could
cause permanent visual impairment.
A
A
Do not disassemble
Touching the product’s internal parts
could result in injury. In the event of
malfunction, the product should be
repaired only by a qualified technician.
Should the product break open as the
result of a fall or other accident, remove
the battery and/or AC adapter and then
take the product to a Nikon-authorized
service center for inspection.
Using the viewfinder diopter adjustment control
When operating the viewfinder diopter
adjustment control with your eye to the
viewfinder, care should be taken not to
put your finger in your eye accidentally.
Turn off immediately in the event of malfunction
Should you notice smoke or an unusual
smell coming from the equipment or AC
adapter (available separately), unplug
the AC adapter and remove the battery
immediately, taking care to avoid burns.
Continued operation could result in
injury. After removing the battery, take
the equipment to a Nikon-authorized
service center for inspection.
A
Do not remain in contact with the camera,
battery, or charger for extended periods while
the devices are on or in use
Parts of the device become hot. Leaving
the device in direct contact with the skin
for extended periods may result in low-
temperature burns.
A
Do not aim a flash at the operator of a motor
vehicle
Failure to observe this precaution could
result in accidents.
A
A
Do not use in the presence of flammable gas
Do not use electronic equipment in the
presence of flammable gas, as this could
result in explosion or fire.
A
A
Avoid contact with liquid crystal
Should the monitor break, care should be
taken to avoid injury due to broken glass
and to prevent the liquid crystal from the
monitor touching the skin or entering
the eyes or mouth.
Do not place the strap around the neck of an
infant or child
Placing the camera strap around the neck
of an infant or child could result in
strangulation.
xxi
Observe caution when using the flash
Observe proper precautions when handling the
charger
• Keep dry. Failure to observe this
precaution could result in fire or electric
shock.
A
A
• Using the camera with the flash in close
contact with the skin or other objects
could cause burns.
• Using the flash close to the subject’s
eyes could cause temporary visual
impairment. Particular care should be
observed when photographing infants,
when the flash should be no less than
one meter (39 in.) from the subject.
• Dust on or near the metal parts of the
plug should be removed with a dry
cloth. Continued use could result in fire.
• Do not handle the power cable or go
near thecharger during thunderstorms.
Failure to observe this precaution could
result in electric shock.
• Do not damage, modify, or forcibly tug
or bend the power cable. Do not place
it under heavy objects or expose it to
heat or flame. Should the insulation be
damaged and the wires become
exposed, take the power cable to a
Nikon-authorized service
representative for inspection. Failure to
observe this precaution could result in
fire or electric shock.
• Do not handle the plug or charger with
wet hands. Failure to observe this
precaution could result in electric
shock.
Observe proper precautions when handling
batteries
A
Batteries may leak or explode if
improperly handled. Observe the
following precautions when handling
batteries for use in this product:
• Use only batteries approved for use in
this equipment.
• Do not short or disassemble the battery.
• Be sure the product is off before
replacing the battery. If you are using
an AC adapter, be sure it is unplugged.
• Do not attempt to insert the battery
upside down or backwards.
• Do not expose the battery to flame or to
excessive heat.
• Do not immerse in or expose to water.
• Do not use with travel converters or
adapters designed to convert from one
voltage to another or with DC-to-AC
inverters. Failure to observe this
precaution could damage the product
or cause overheating or fire.
•
Replace the terminal cover when
transporting the battery. Do not
transport or store the battery with metal
objects such as necklaces or hairpins.
• Batteries are prone to leakage when
fully discharged. To avoid damage to
the product, be sure to remove the
battery when no charge remains.
• When the battery is not in use, attach
the terminal cover and store in a cool,
dry place.
• The battery may be hot immediately
after use or when the product has been
used on battery power for an extended
period. Before removing the battery
turn the camera off and allow the
battery to cool.
Use appropriate cables
A
A
When connecting cables to the input and
output jacks, use only the cables
provided or sold by Nikon for the
purpose to maintain compliance with
product regulations.
CD-ROMs
CD-ROMs containing software or
manuals should not be played back on
audio CD equipment. Playing CD-ROMs
on an audio CD player could cause
hearing loss or damage the equipment.
• Discontinue use immediately should
you notice any changes in the battery,
such as discoloration or deformation.
xxii
Notices
• No part of the manuals included with this
product may be reproduced, transmitted,
transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or
translated into any language in any form,
by any means, without Nikon’s prior
written permission.
• Nikon will not be held liable for any
damages resulting from the use of this
product.
• While every effort has been made to
ensure that the information in these
manuals is accurate and complete, we
would appreciate it were you to bring any
errors or omissions to the attention of the
Nikon representative in your area (address
provided separately).
• Nikon reserves the right to change the
specifications of the hardware and
software described in these manuals at
any time and without prior notice.
Notices for Customers in Canada
CAUTION
ATTENTION
This Class B digital apparatus complies with
Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est
conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
Notices for Customers in Europe
CAUTION
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED
BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS.
This symbol indicates that
electrical and electronic
equipment is to be collected
separately.
This symbol on the battery
indicates that the battery is to be
collected separately.
The following apply only to users in
European countries:
• All batteries, whether marked with this
symbol or not, are designated for separate
collection at an appropriate collection
point. Do not dispose of as household
waste.
The following apply only to users in
European countries:
• This product is designated for separate
collection at an appropriate collection
point. Do not dispose of as household
waste.
• Separate collection and recycling helps
conserve natural resources and prevent
negative consequences for human health
and the environment that might result
from incorrect disposal.
• For more information, contact the retailer
or the local authorities in charge of waste
management.
• For more information, contact the retailer
or the local authorities in charge of waste
management.
xxiii
Notices for Customers in the U.S.A.
Power Cable
At voltages over AC 125 V (U.S.A. only): The power cable must be rated for the voltage in use, be at
least AWG no. 18 gauge, and have SVG insulation or better with a NEMA 6P-15 plug rated for
AC 250 V 15 A.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Radio Frequency Interference Statement
This equipment has been tested and found
to comply with the limits for a Class B digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules.
These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instructions,
may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in
a particular installation. If this equipment
does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be
determined by turning the equipment off
and on, the user is encouraged to try to
correct the interference by one or more of
the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.
CAUTIONS
Modifications
The FCC requires the user be notified that any
changes or modifications made to this device
that are not expressly approved by Nikon
Corporation may void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
Interface Cables
Use the interface cables sold or provided by
Nikon for your equipment. Using other
interface cables may exceed the limits of
Class B Part 15 of the FCC rules.
Notice for Customers in the State of California
WARNING: Handling the cord on this product
may expose you to lead, a chemical known to
the State of California to cause birth defects
or other reproductive harm. Wash hands
after handling.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a
circuit different from that to which the
receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced
radio/television technician for help.
Nikon Inc., 1300 Walt Whitman Road,
Melville, New York 11747-3064, U.S.A.
Tel.: 631-547-4200
xxiv
Notice Concerning Prohibition of Copying or Reproduction
Note that simply being in possession of material that has been digitally copied or reproduced
by means of a scanner, digital camera, or other device may be punishable by law.
• Items prohibited by law from being copied or
reproduced
• Cautions on certain copies and reproductions
The government has issued cautions on
copies or reproductions of securities issued
by private companies (shares, bills, checks,
gift certificates, etc.), commuter passes, or
coupon tickets, except when a minimum of
necessary copies are to be provided for
business use by a company. Also, do not
copy or reproduce passports issued by the
government, licenses issued by public
agencies and private groups, ID cards, and
tickets, such as passes and meal coupons.
Do not copy or reproduce paper money,
coins, securities, government bonds, or
local government bonds, even if such
copies or reproductions are stamped
“Sample.”
The copying or reproduction of paper
money, coins, or securities which are
circulated in a foreign country is prohibited.
Unless the prior permission of the
government has been obtained, the
copying or reproduction of unused postage
stamps or post cards issued by the
government is prohibited.
• Comply with copyright notices
The copying or reproduction of
copyrighted creative works such as books,
music, paintings, woodcuts, prints, maps,
drawings, movies, and photographs is
governed by national and international
copyright laws. Do not use this product for
the purpose of making illegal copies or to
infringe copyright laws.
The copying or reproduction of stamps
issued by the government and of certified
documents stipulated by law is prohibited.
Disposing of Data Storage Devices
Please note that deleting images or formatting memory cards or other data storage devices
does not completely erase the original image data. Deleted files can sometimes be recovered
from discarded storage devices using commercially available software, potentially resulting in
the malicious use of personal image data. Ensuring the privacy of such data is the user’s
responsibility.
Before discarding a data storage device or transferring ownership to another person, erase all
data using commercial deletion software, or format the device and then completely refill it
with images containing no private information (for example, pictures of empty sky). Be sure to
injury when physically destroying data storage devices.
AVC Patent Portfolio License
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON-
COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC
VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND
NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC
VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE
OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE http://www.mpegla.com
xxv
Use Only Nikon Brand Electronic Accessories
Nikon cameras are designed to the highest standards and include complex electronic circuitry.
Only Nikon brand electronic accessories (including chargers, batteries, AC adapters, and flash
accessories) certified by Nikon specifically for use with this Nikon digital camera are
engineered and proven to operate within the operational and safety requirements of this
electronic circuitry.
The use of non-Nikon electronic accessories could damage the camera and may
void your Nikon warranty. The use of third-party rechargeable Li-ion batteries not
bearing the Nikon holographic seal shown at right could interfere with normal
operation of the camera or result in the batteries overheating, igniting, rupturing, or leaking.
For more information about Nikon brand accessories, contact a local authorized Nikon dealer.
A Before Taking Important Pictures
Before taking pictures on important occasions (such as at weddings or before taking the
camera on a trip), take a test shot to ensure that the camera is functioning normally. Nikon
will not be held liable for damages or lost profits that may result from product malfunction.
A Life-Long Learning
As part of Nikon’s “Life-Long Learning” commitment to ongoing product support and
education, continually-updated information is available on-line at the following sites:
•
•
•
For users in the U.S.A.: http://www.nikonusa.com/
For users in Europe and Africa: http://www.europe-nikon.com/support/
For users in Asia, Oceania, and the Middle East: http://www.nikon-asia.com/
Visit these sites to keep up-to-date with the latest product information, tips, answers to
frequently-asked questions (FAQs), and general advice on digital imaging and photography.
Additional information may be available from the Nikon representative in your area. See the
following URL for contact information: http://imaging.nikon.com/
xxvi
Introduction
X
Overview
Thank you for your purchase of a Nikon single-lens reflex (SLR) digital camera. To get
the most from your camera, please be sure to read all instructions thoroughly and
keep them where they will be read by all who use the product.
X
❚❚Symbols and Conventions
To make it easier to find the information you need, the following symbols and
conventions are used:
This icon marks cautions; information that should be read before use to
prevent damage to the camera.
D
A
0
This icon marks notes; information that should be read before using the
camera.
This icon marks references to other pages in this manual.
Menu items, options, and messages displayed in the camera monitor are shown in bold.
A Camera Settings
The explanations in this manual assume that default settings are used.
A Help
Use the camera’s on-board help feature for help on menu items and other topics. See page
19 for details.
D Use Only Nikon Brand Accessories
Only Nikon brand accessories certified by Nikon specifically for use with your Nikon digital
camera are engineered and proven to operate within its operational and safety
requirements. THE USE OF NON-NIKON ACCESSORIES COULD DAMAGE YOUR CAMERA AND MAY VOID YOUR
NIKON WARRANTY.
D Servicing the Camera and Accessories
The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing. Nikon recommends that the
camera be inspected by the original retailer or a Nikon-authorized service representative
once every one to two years, and that it be serviced once every three to five years (note that
fees apply to these services). Frequent inspection and servicing are particularly
recommended if the camera is used professionally. Any accessories regularly used with the
camera, such as lenses or optional flash units, should be included when the camera is
inspected or serviced.
1
Getting to Know the Camera
Take a few moments to familiarize yourself with camera controls and displays. You
may find it helpful to bookmark this section and refer to it as you read through the
rest of the manual.
The Camera Body
8
9
1
X
2
3
10
11
12
4
4
5
13
14
6
7
15
4 Eyelet for camera strap
10 E button
12 Z/Q button
Metering .............................................................. 83
Formatting memory cards .............................. 32
Two-button reset .............................................131
A
The Power Switch
Rotate the power switch as shown to turn
the camera on.
Rotate the power switch as shown to turn
the camera off.
2
The Camera Body (Continued)
1
5
6
X
7
8
9
14
15
16
17
18
10
11
2
3
4
12
13
5 M/Y button
Flash mode........................................................119
Flash compensation........................................124
7 D button
8 Cover for USB and external microphone
connectors ................................................165, 310
10 Cover for accessory terminal and headphone
15 USB connector
Connecting to a computer............................ 203
Connecting to a printer ................................. 208
A LCD Illuminators
Rotating the power switch toward
D
activates the
Power switch
standby timer and control panel backlight (LCD
illuminator), allowing the display to be read in the dark.
After the power switch is released and returns to the ON
position, the illuminators will remain lit for six seconds
while the standby timer is active or until the shutter is
released or the power switch is rotated toward
D
again.
3
The Camera Body (Continued)
9
1
2
10
11
3
X
4
5
6
12
8
7
13
Self-timer lamp....................................................... 59
Red-eye reduction lamp ....................................121
7 Contact cover for optional MB-D15 battery pack
9 CPU contacts
11 AF coupling
4
12 Tripod socket
D The Microphone and Speaker
Do not place the microphone or speaker in close proximity to magnetic devices. Failure to
observe this precaution could affect the data recorded on the magnetic devices.
4
The Camera Body (Continued)
2
1
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
3
X
4
5
6
7
8
19
20
21
22
23
9
10
3 O/Q button
Delete .......................................................... 40, 197
Formatting memory cards .............................. 32
4 K button
Changing settings in the information display
.............................................................................12
Changing settings during live view/movie
recording............................................... 157, 164
Retouching pictures ....................................... 275
12 A button
Playback...................................................... 39, 185
5 Monitor
21 Live view selector
Viewing settings ................................................ 10
Viewing pictures ................................................ 39
Full-frame playback ........................................185
6 G button
Menu............................................................ 19, 217
7 L/U button
Help....................................................................... 19
Protect................................................................196
White balance........................................89, 91, 94
8 X/T button
Movie live view ................................................ 161
22 Speaker
Playback zoom in.............................................195
Image quality/size.......................................66, 68
9 W/S button
23 R (info) button
Playback zoom out/thumbnails..........193, 194
ISO sensitivity ..................................................... 79
Auto ISO sensitivity control............................. 82
Hiding and displaying indicators during live
5
The Mode Dial
The camera offers the modes
listed below. To choose a
mode, press the mode dial lock
release and rotate the mode
dial.
Mode dial
X
Mode dial lock release
Use special effects during shooting.
P, S, A, and M Modes
Select these modes for full control over camera settings.
•
•
•
•
Auto Modes
Select these modes for simple, point-and-shoot
photography.
The camera automatically optimizes settings to suit the
selected scene. Match your selection to the scene being
photographed.
Store and recall customized shooting settings.
A Non-CPU Lenses
a non-CPU lens is attached disables the shutter release.
6
The Release Mode Dial
To choose a release mode, press the
release mode dial lock release and turn
the release mode dial to the desired
Release mode dial lock release
X
Release mode dial
Mode
Description
One photograph is taken each time the shutter-
release button is pressed.
Single frame
S
The camera takes photographs at a slow rate
while the shutter-release button is pressed.
Continuous low speed
CL
The camera takes photographs at a fast rate while
the shutter-release button is pressed.
Continuous high speed
CH
As for single-frame, except that camera noise is
reduced.
Quiet shutter-release
J
Self-timer
Take pictures with the self-timer.
E
Mirror up
Raise the mirror before taking photographs.
MUP
7
The Control Panel
1
2
3
10
11
White balance fine-tuning indicator ................ 92
Number of shots in ADL bracketing
Auto ISO sensitivity indicator ............................. 82
4
5
6
7
12
13
14
15
X
8
9
Exposure compensation value ........................... 86
White balance fine-tuning................................... 92
Number of shots in exposure and flash
bracketing sequence .......................................133
Number of shots in WB bracketing
sequence ............................................................137
Number of intervals for interval timer
photography......................................................146
Focal length (non-CPU lenses) .........................151
16
22
23
24
25
26
27
27 “K” (appears when memory remains for over
1000 exposures) ................................................. 35
Number of shots remaining before memory
17
18
19
20
21
28
AF-area mode indicator........................................ 74
3D-tracking indicator............................................ 73
Preset white balance recording indicator........ 96
Note: Display shown with all indicators lit for illustrative purposes.
8
The Viewfinder
1
2
3
4
5
6 7
8
11 12
13
14
1516 17
232221
18 19
X
10
9
2726
25
24
20
1 Monochrome indicator (displayed in %mode or
when the Monochrome Picture Control or a
Picture Control based on Monochrome is
18 “K” (appears when memory remains for over
1000 exposures) ..................................................35
Number of shots remaining before memory
selected) .............................................................105
AF-area mode ......................................................... 73
6 Framing grid (displayed when On is selected for
Autofocus mode .................................................... 71
Aperture (number of stops) ....................... 47, 298
WB bracketing indicator ....................................137
ADL bracketing indicator...................................139
buffer fills ..............................................37, 58, 348
Active D-Lighting amount ................................ 114
AF-area mode..........................................................73
Preset white balance recording indicator ........96
Exposure compensation value............................86
Flash compensation value ................................ 124
Exposure compensation display.........................86
Note: Display shown with all indicators lit for illustrative purposes.
D No Battery
When the battery is totally exhausted or no battery is inserted, the display in the viewfinder
will dim. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. The viewfinder display will
return to normal when a fully-charged battery is inserted.
D The Control Panel and Viewfinder Displays
The brightness of the control panel and viewfinder displays varies with temperature, and the
response times of the displays may drop at low temperatures. This is normal and does not
indicate a malfunction.
9
The Information Display
Press the R button to display shutter speed, aperture, the
number of exposures remaining, AF-area mode, and other
shooting information in the monitor.
R button
X
Continuous shooting speed....................... 58, 239
Exposure compensation display........................ 86
Bracketing progress indicator
13 “K” (appears when memory remains for over
1000 exposures) ................................................. 35
White balance fine-tuning indicator ................ 92
Role played by card in Slot 2............................... 69
Focus points indicator .......................................... 75
AF-area mode indicator ....................................... 74
3D-tracking indicator ........................................... 73
Number of shots in exposure and flash
bracketing sequence .......................................133
Number of shots in WB bracketing
sequence ............................................................137
Focal length (non-CPU lenses) .........................149
Number of shots in ADL bracketing
sequence ............................................................139
Maximum aperture (non-CPU lenses) ............151
Note: Display shown with all indicators lit for illustrative purposes.
10
X
25
26 27 28 29 30
31
ADL bracketing indicator................................... 139
Multiple exposure indicator.............................. 143
32
33
34
35
36
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
Flash compensation value.................................124
Exposure compensation value ........................... 86
A Turning the Monitor Off
To clear shooting information from the monitor, press the R button or press the shutter-
release button halfway. The monitor will turn off automatically if no operations are
performed for about 10 seconds.
A See Also
For information on choosing how long the monitor stays on, see Custom Setting c4
11
❚❚Changing Settings in the Information Display
To change settings for the items listed below, press the
P button. Highlight items using the multi selector and press J
to view options for the highlighted item.
P button
X
5
6
7
A Tool Tips
A tool tip giving the name of the selected item appears in the
information display. Tool tips can be turned off using Custom
12
The Command Dials
The main- and sub-command dials are used alone or in combination with other
controls to adjust a variety of settings.
M/Y button
Flash mode
Flash compensation
D button
Bracketing
X
AF-mode button
Autofocus mode
AF-area mode
Sub-command dial
Mode dial
E button
Exposure compensation
Z/Q button
Metering
Main command dial
L/U button
White balance
X/T button
Image quality/size
W/S button
ISO sensitivity
Auto ISO sensitivity control
13
❚❚Scene and Special Effect Modes
h mode Main command dial
Monitor
Monitor
Choose a special effect mode
X
q mode Main command dial
❚❚Image Quality and Size
+
X (T) button Main command dial
Control panel
Control panel
+
X (T) button Sub-command dial
❚❚Autofocus
Choose an autofocus mode
+
AF-mode button Main command dial
Control panel
Control panel
Choose an AF-area mode
+
AF-mode button Sub-command dial
14
❚❚ISO Sensitivity
+
W (S) button Main command dial
Control panel
Control panel
Set auto ISO sensitivity control
X
+
W (S) button Sub-command dial
❚❚Exposure
Choose a combination of
aperture and shutter speed
Mode P
Main command dial
Control panel
Control panel
Control panel
Control panel
Choose a shutter speed (mode S
Mode S or M Main command dial
Choose an aperture (mode A or
Mode A or M Sub-command dial
Choose a metering option
+
Z (Q) button Main command dial
15
Set exposure compensation
+
E button
Main command dial
Control panel
Control panel
Control panel
Activate or cancel bracketing/
select number of shots in
bracketing sequence (mode P, S,
X
+
D button Main command dial
Select bracketing increment
+
D button Sub-command dial
❚❚White Balance
Choose a white balance option
+
L (U) button Main command dial
Control panel
Control panel
choose a white balance preset
+
L (U) button Sub-command dial
16
The P button
Use the P button for quick access to a variety of functions during
viewfinder and live view photography, movie recording, and
playback.
P button
X
❚❚Viewfinder Photography
Press P to view links to frequently-used shooting options at the
❚❚Live View Photography/Movie Recording
Press P to display a list of the settings available during live view
❚❚Playback
Pressing P during photo or movie playback displays retouch
18
Camera Menus
Most shooting, playback, and setup options can be accessed
from the camera menus. To view the menus, press the G
button.
G button
X
Tabs
Choose from the following menus:
• O/m: My Menu or Recent settings (defaults to
Slider shows position in current menu.
Current settings are shown by icons.
Menu options
Options in current menu.
d
If a d icon is displayed at the bottom left corner of the
monitor, help can be displayed by pressing the L (U)
button. A description of the currently selected option or
menu will be displayed while the button is pressed. Press
1 or 3 to scroll through the display.
L (U) button
19
Using Camera Menus
The multi selector and J button are used to navigate the camera menus.
Move cursor up
J button: select highlighted item
Select highlighted item or
Cancel and return to
previous menu
display sub-menu
X
Move cursor down
Follow the steps below to navigate the menus.
1 Display the menus.
Press the G button to display the menus.
G button
2 Highlight the icon for the current menu.
Press 4 to highlight the icon for the current
menu.
3 Select a menu.
Press 1 or 3 to select the desired menu.
4 Position the cursor in the selected menu.
Press 2 to position the cursor in the selected
menu.
20
5 Highlight a menu item.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight a menu item.
6 Display options.
X
Press 2 to display options for the selected menu
item.
7 Highlight an option.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight an option.
8 Select the highlighted item.
Press J to select the highlighted item. To exit without
making a selection, press the G button.
Note the following:
• Menu items that are displayed in gray are not currently available.
• While pressing 2 generally has the same effect as pressing J, there are some
cases in which selection can only be made by pressing J.
• To exit the menus and return to shooting mode, press the shutter-release button
21
First Steps
Charge the Battery
The camera is powered by an EN-EL15 rechargeable Li-ion battery (supplied). To
maximize shooting time, charge the battery in the supplied MH-25 battery charger
before use. About 2 hours and 35 minutes are required to fully recharge the battery
when no charge remains.
X
1 Connect the AC power cable.
Connect the power cable. The AC adapter plug should be
in the position shown at right; do not rotate.
2 Remove the terminal cover.
Remove the terminal cover from the battery.
3 Insert the battery.
Place the battery in the battery bay as shown in the
illustration on the charger.
Battery Charging
charging complete
4 Plug the charger in.
The CHARGE lamp will flash slowly while the battery
charges.
D Charging the Battery
Charge the battery indoors at ambient temperatures between
5 °C–35 °C (41 °F–95 °F). The battery will not charge if its
temperature is below 0 °C (32 °F) or above 60 °C (140 °F).
5 Remove the battery when charging is complete.
Charging is complete when the CHARGE lamp stops flashing. Unplug the charger
and remove the battery.
22
A The AC Wall Adapter
Depending on the country or region of purchase, an AC wall
adapter may also be supplied with the charger. To use the adapter,
insert it into the charger AC inlet (q). Slide the AC wall adapter
latch in the direction shown (w) and rotate the adapter 90° to fix it
in the position shown (e). Reverse these steps to remove the
adapter.
X
AC wall adapter
latch
90°
23
Insert the Battery
Before inserting the battery, rotate the power switch to OFF.
D Inserting and Removing Batteries
Always turn the camera off before inserting or removing batteries.
1 Open the battery-chamber cover.
X
Unlatch (q) and open (w) the battery-chamber cover.
2 Insert the battery.
Insert the battery in the orientation shown (q), using the
battery to keep the orange battery latch pressed to one
side. The latch locks the battery in place when the battery
is fully inserted (w).
Battery latch
3 Close the battery-chamber cover.
A Removing the Battery
Turn the camera off and open the battery-chamber cover. Press the
battery latch in the direction shown by the arrow to release the
battery and then remove the battery by hand.
24
D The Battery and Charger
not use the battery at ambient temperatures below 0 °C/32 °F or above 40 °C/104 °F; failure
to observe this precaution could damage the battery or impair its performance. Capacity
may be reduced and charging times may increase at battery temperatures from 0 °C/32 °F to
15 °C/59 °F and from 45 °C/113 °F to 60 °C/140 °F.
If the CHARGE lamp flashes quickly (about eight times a second) during charging, confirm that
the temperature is in the correct range and then unplug the charger and remove and
reinsert the battery. If the problem persists, cease use immediately and take battery and
charger to your retailer or a Nikon-authorized service representative.
X
Do not short the charger terminals; failure to observe this precaution could result in
overheating and damage to the charger. Do not move the charger or touch the battery
during charging. Failure to observe this precaution could in very rare instances result in the
charger showing that charging is complete when the battery is only partially charged.
Remove and reinsert the battery to begin charging again. Battery capacity may temporarily
drop if the battery is charged at low temperatures or used at a temperature below the
temperature at which it was charged. If the battery is charged at a temperature below 5 °C
decrease.
The battery may be hot immediately after use. Wait for the battery to cool before recharging.
The supplied power cable and AC wall adapter are for use with the MH-25 only. Use the
charger with compatible batteries only. Unplug when not in use.
A marked drop in the time a fully charged battery retains its charge when used at room
temperature indicates that it requires replacement. Purchase a new EN-EL15 battery.
A EN-EL15 Rechargeable Li-ion Batteries
The supplied EN-EL15 shares information with compatible devices, enabling the camera to
details battery charge, battery life, and the number of pictures taken since the battery was
25
Attach a Lens
The lens generally used in this manual for illustrative purposes is an AF-S DX NIKKOR
18-105mm f/3.5-5.6G ED VR.
Lens mounting mark
Focal length scale
Focal length mark
Lens hood
X
Lens cap
Rear lens cap
Vibration reduction ON/OFF switch
Zoom ring
Care should be taken to prevent dust from entering the camera when the lens is
removed.
1 Turn the camera off.
2 Remove the rear lens cap
and the camera body cap.
26
3 Attach the lens.
X
Mounting mark
(camera)
Mounting mark (lens)
Keeping marks (indicated by white dot) aligned, position
lens on camera, then rotate until lens clicks into place.
If the lens is equipped with an A-M or M/A-M mode
switch, select A (autofocus) or M/A (autofocus with
manual override).
A Detaching the Lens
Be sure the camera is off when removing or exchanging lenses. To
remove the lens, press and hold the lens release button (q) while
turning the lens clockwise (w). After removing the lens, replace the
lens caps and camera body cap.
D CPU Lenses with Aperture Rings
lock aperture at the minimum setting (highest f-number).
27
Basic Setup
A language-selection dialog will be displayed the first time the camera is turned on.
Choose a language and set the time and date. Photographs can not be taken until
you have set the time and date.
1 Turn the camera on.
A language-selection dialog will be displayed.
X
2 Choose a language and set the camera
Move cursor up
clock.
J button: select
Use the multi selector and J button to
select a language and set the camera clock.
highlighted item
Select highlighted
item or display
sub-menu
Move cursor down
q
w
e
Select language
Select time zone
Select date format
r
t
Note: The language and
date/time can be changed
at any time using the
Language and Time zone
and date options in the
Select daylight saving
time option
Set time and date
(note that the camera
uses a 24-hour clock)
28
A The Clock Battery
The camera clock is powered by an independent, rechargeable power source, which is
charged as necessary when the main battery is installed or the camera is powered by an
power the clock for about three months. If the camera displays a warning at startup stating
that the clock is not set and a
icon flashes in the information display, the clock battery
B
is exhausted and the clock has been reset. Set the clock to the correct time and date.
A The Camera Clock
X
The camera clock is less accurate than most watches and household clocks. Check the clock
regularly against more accurate time pieces and reset as necessary. The camera clock can
29
Insert a Memory Card
The camera stores pictures on Secure Digital (SD) memory cards (available separately;
orientation shown below, slide it in until it clicks into place. The memory card access
lamp will light for a few seconds. Note that the camera has two memory card slots
(Slot 1 and Slot 2); if you will be using only one memory card, insert it in Slot 1.
Front
X
GB
8
Slot 1 Slot 2
Format memory cards before first use or after they have been used in other devices
Inserting memory cards upside down or backwards could damage the camera or the
card. Check to be sure the card is in the correct orientation. The card slot cover will
not close if the card is not correctly inserted.
A Removing Memory Cards
After confirming that the memory card access lamp is off, turn the
camera off, open the memory card slot cover, and press the card in to
GB
8
eject it (q). The card can then be removed by hand (w).
A No Memory Card
If the camera is turned off with a charged EN-EL15 battery and no
memory card inserted, S will be displayed in the control panel
and viewfinder.
30
D Memory Cards
• Memory cards may be hot after use. Observe due caution when removing memory cards
from the camera.
• Turn the power off before inserting or removing memory cards. Do not remove memory
cards from the camera, turn the camera off, or remove or disconnect the power source
during formatting or while data are being recorded, deleted, or copied to a computer.
Failure to observe these precautions could result in loss of data or in damage to the
camera or card.
• Do not touch the card terminals with your fingers or metal objects.
• Do not bend, drop, or subject to strong physical shocks.
• Do not apply force to the card casing. Failure to observe this precaution could damage
the card.
X
• Do not expose to water, heat, high levels of humidity, or direct sunlight.
• Do not format memory cards in a computer.
A Using Two Memory Cards
Slot 1 is for the main card; the card in slot 2 plays a backup or
secondary role. If the default setting of Overflow is selected for Role
inserted, the card in slot 2 will only be used when the card in slot 1 is
full.
Slot 1
Slot 2
The control panel shows the slot or slots that currently hold a
memory card (the example at right shows the icons displayed when a
card is inserted in each slot). If the memory card is full or locked or an
Control panel
Information display
A The Write Protect Switch
SD memory cards are equipped with a write protect switch
to prevent accidental loss of data. When this switch is in the
“lock” position, the memory card can not be formatted and
photos can not be deleted or recorded (a warning will be
displayed in the monitor if you attempt to release the
shutter). To unlock the memory card, slide the switch to the
“write” position.
G B
8
Write-protect switch
31
Format the Memory Card
Memory cards must be formatted before first use or after being used or formatted in
other devices.
D Formatting Memory Cards
Formatting memory cards permanently deletes any data they may contain. Be sure to copy any
X
1 Turn the camera on.
2 Press the O (Q) and Z (Q) buttons.
Hold the O (Q) and Z (Q) buttons down
simultaneously until a flashing C (format)
appears in the shutter-speed displays in the
control panel and viewfinder. If two memory
be selected; you can choose the card in Slot 2
by rotating the main command dial. To exit
without formatting the memory card, wait until
C stops flashing (about six seconds) or press
any button other than the O (Q) and Z (Q)
buttons.
O (Q) button Z (Q) button
3 Press the O (Q) and Z (Q) buttons again.
Press the O (Q) and Z (Q) buttons together a second time while C is
flashing to format the memory card. Do not remove the memory card or remove
or disconnect the power source during formatting.
When formatting is complete, the control panel and viewfinder will show the
number of photographs that can be recorded at current settings.
A See Also
option in the setup menu.
32
Adjust Viewfinder Focus
The camera is equipped with diopter adjustment to accommodate individual
differences in vision. Check that the display in the viewfinder is in focus before
framing pictures in the viewfinder.
1 Turn the camera on.
Remove the lens cap and turn the camera on.
X
2 Focus the viewfinder.
Rotate the diopter adjustment control until
the AF area brackets are in sharp focus. When
operating the diopter adjustment control with
your eye to the viewfinder, be careful not to
put your fingers or fingernails in your eye.
AF area brackets
A Adjusting Viewfinder Focus
If you are unable to focus the viewfinder as described above, select single-servo autofocus
high-contrast subject in the center focus point and press the shutter-release button halfway
to focus the camera. With the camera in focus, use the diopter adjustment control to bring
the subject into clear focus in the viewfinder. If necessary, viewfinder focus can be further
33
X
34
Basic Photography and Playback
s
Battery Level and Card Capacity
Before shooting, check the battery level and number of exposures remaining.
1 Turn the camera on.
s
Remove the lens cap and turn the camera on.
The control panel will turn on and the display in
the viewfinder will light.
2 Check the battery level.
Check the battery level in the control panel or viewfinder.
Control panel Viewfinder
Description
L
—
—
Battery fully charged.
K
J
—
Battery partially discharged.
I
—
d
H
Low battery. Charge battery or ready spare battery.
Shutter release disabled. Charge or exchange battery.
H
(flashes)
d
(flashes)
3 Check the number of exposures remaining.
The control panel and viewfinder show the number of
photographs that can be taken at current settings (values
over 1000 are rounded down to the nearest hundred; e.g.,
values between 1000 and 1099 are shown as 1.0 K). If two
memory cards are inserted, the displays show the space
remaining reaches A, the number will flash, n or j will flash in the
shutter-speed displays, and the icon for the affected card will flash. Insert
A Image Sensor Cleaning
The camera vibrates the image sensor to remove dust when the camera is turned on or off
35
“Point-and-Shoot” Photography
(i and j Modes)
This section describes how to take photographs in i and j modes, an
automatic “point-and-shoot” mode in which the majority of settings
are controlled by the camera in response to shooting conditions.
1 Select i or j Mode.
s
To shoot where use of a flash is prohibited,
photograph infants, or capture natural lighting
under low light, select auto (flash off) mode by
rotating the mode dial to j. Otherwise, rotate
the dial to i (auto).
Mode dial
2 Ready the camera.
When framing photographs in the
viewfinder, hold the handgrip in your
right hand and cradle the camera
body or lens with your left. Keep
your elbows propped lightly against
your torso for support and place one
foot half a pace ahead of the other to keep your upper
body stable. When framing photographs in portrait (tall)
orientation, hold the camera as shown in the bottom of
the three illustrations at right.
In j mode, shutter speeds slow when lighting is poor; use
of a tripod is recommended.
A Using a Zoom Lens
Use the zoom ring to zoom in on the subject so that it fills a
larger area of the frame, or zoom out to increase the area
visible in the final photograph (select longer focal lengths on
the lens focal length scale to zoom in, shorter focal lengths
to zoom out).
Zoom in
Zoom ring
Zoom out
36
3 Frame the photograph.
Frame a photograph in the viewfinder with the
main subject in the AF area brackets.
AF area brackets
4 Press the shutter-release button halfway.
Press the shutter-release button halfway to focus. The
active focus point will be displayed. If the subject is poorly
lit, the flash may pop up and the AF-assist illuminator may
light.
s
5 Check the indicators in the viewfinder.
When the focus operation is complete, the in-
focus indicator (I) will appear in the viewfinder.
Focus point
In-focus
indicator
I
Description
Subject in focus.
2 4 Focus point is between camera and subject.
2 4 Focus point is behind subject.
2 4 Camera unable to focus using autofocus.
(flashes) See page 72.
In-focus
indicator
Buffer
capacity
While the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, the number of exposures
viewfinder.
6 Shoot.
Smoothly press the shutter-release button the
rest of the way down to release the shutter and
record the photograph. The memory card access
lamp next to the memory card slot cover will
light while the photograph is being recorded to
the memory card. Do not eject the memory card
or remove or disconnect the power source until the
lamp has gone out and recording is complete.
Memory card access
lamp
37
A The Shutter-Release Button
The camera has a two-stage shutter-release button. The camera focuses when the shutter-
release button is pressed halfway. To take the photograph, press the shutter-release button
the rest of the way down.
Focus: press halfway
Shoot: press all the way down
A The Standby Timer
The viewfinder and the control panel shutter speed and aperture displays will turn off if no
operations are performed for about 6 seconds, reducing the drain on the battery. Press the
shutter-release button halfway to reactivate the display. The length of time before the
standby timer expires automatically can be selected using Custom Setting c2 (Standby
s
Exposure meters on
Exposure meters off
Exposure meters on
Control panel
A Camera Off Display
If the camera is turned off with a battery and memory card inserted,
the memory card icon and number of exposures remaining will be
displayed (some memory cards may in rare cases only display this
information when the camera is on).
A The Built-in Flash
If additional lighting is required for correct exposure in i mode, the
built-in flash will pop up automatically when the shutter-release
button is pressed halfway. If the flash is raised, photographs can only
be taken when the flash-ready indicator (M) is displayed. If the flash-
ready indicator is not displayed, the flash is charging; remove your
finger briefly from the shutter-release button and try again.
To save power when the flash is not in use, press it gently downward
until the latch clicks into place.
38
Basic Playback
1 Press the K button.
A photograph will be displayed in the
monitor. The memory card containing the
picture currently displayed is shown by an
icon.
K button
s
2 View additional pictures.
Additional pictures can be displayed by
pressing 4 or 2. To view additional
information on the current photograph,
NIKON D7100
1
/
12
.
1
125 F5
0,
6
100
85mm
0
_
.
100
10
D
/
7100
D
S
C
:
0001 JP
G
M
AL
600N0Ox4R000
:
15
/
2012 10 02 28
To end playback and return to shooting
mode, press the shutter-release button
halfway.
A Image Review
automatically displayed in the monitor for a few seconds after shooting.
A See Also
39
Deleting Unwanted Photographs
To delete the photograph currently displayed in the monitor, press the O (Q) button.
Note that photographs can not be recovered once deleted.
1 Display the photograph.
Display the photograph you wish to delete
as described on the preceding page. The
location of the current image is shown by an
icon at the bottom left corner of the display.
s
2 Delete the photograph.
Press the O (Q) button. A confirmation
dialog will be displayed; press the O (Q)
button again to delete the image and return
to playback. To exit without deleting the
picture, press K.
O (Q) button
A Delete
playback menu.
40
Creative Photography (Scene Modes)
The camera offers a choice of “scene” modes. Choosing a scene mode
automatically optimizes settings to suit the selected scene, making
creative photography as simple as selecting a mode, framing a picture,
and shooting as described on pages 36–38.
❚❚hMode
To view the currently selected scene, rotate the mode dial to h and press the R
button. To choose another scene, rotate the main command dial.
s
Mode dial
Main command dial
Monitor
kPortrait
lLandscape
Use for portraits with soft, natural-
looking skin tones. If the subject is far
Use for vivid landscape shots in daylight.
The built-in flash and AF-assist
from the background or a telephoto lens illuminator turn off; use of a tripod is
is used, background details will be
softened to lend the composition a
sense of depth.
recommended to prevent blur when
lighting is poor.
41
pChild
mSports
s
Use for snapshots of children. Clothing
and background details are vividly
rendered, while skin tones remain soft
and natural.
Fast shutter speeds freeze motion for
dynamic sports shots in which the main
subject stands out clearly. The built-in
flash and AF-assist illuminator turn off.
To take a sequence of shots, select
nClose Up
oNight Portrait
Use for close-up shots of flowers, insects, Use for a natural balance between the
and other small objects (a macro lens can main subject and the background in
be used to focus at very close ranges).
Use of a tripod is recommended to
prevent blur.
portraits taken under low light. Use of a
tripod is recommended to prevent blur
when lighting is poor.
42
rNight Landscape
sParty/Indoor
s
Reduce noise and unnatural colors when Capture the effects of indoor
photographing night landscapes,
background lighting. Use for parties and
including street lighting and neon signs. other indoor scenes.
The built-in flash and AF-assist
illuminator turn off; use of a tripod is
recommended to prevent blur.
tBeach/Snow
uSunset
Capture the brightness of sunlight
expanses of water, snow, or sand. The
built-in flash and AF-assist illuminator
turn off.
Preserves the deep hues seen in sunsets
and sunrises. The built-in flash and AF-
assist illuminator turn off; use of a tripod
is recommended to prevent blur when
lighting is poor.
43
vDusk/Dawn
wPet Portrait
s
Preserves the colors seen in the weak
Use for portraits of active pets. The AF-
natural light before dawn or after sunset. assist illuminator turns off.
The built-in flash and AF-assist
illuminator turn off; use of a tripod is
recommended to prevent blur when
lighting is poor.
xCandlelight
yBlossom
For photographs taken by candlelight.
Use for fields of flowers, orchards in
The built-in flash turns off; use of a tripod bloom, and other landscapes featuring
is recommended to prevent blur when
lighting is poor.
expanses of blossoms. The built-in flash
turns off; use of a tripod is
recommended to prevent blur when
lighting is poor.
44
s
46
P, S, A, and M Modes
#
P, S, A, and M modes offer different degrees of control over shutter
speed and aperture.
Mode
Description
Recommended for snapshots and in other situations in which there is little time to
adjust camera settings.
#
P
results. Use to freeze or blur motion.
best results. Use to blur background or bring both foreground and background into
focus.
S
A
Bulb (A) or Time (%) for long time-exposures.
M
A Lens Types
minimum aperture (highest f-number). Type G lenses are not equipped with an aperture
ring.
Non-CPU lenses can only be used in modes A (aperture-priority auto) and M (manual), when
aperture can only be adjusted using the lens aperture ring. Selecting any other mode
disables the shutter release.
Use the lens aperture ring to adjust aperture. If the maximum
aperture of the lens has been specified using the Non-CPU lens
the current f-number will be displayed in the viewfinder and
control panel, rounded to the nearest full stop. Otherwise the
aperture displays will show only the number of stops (F, with
maximum aperture displayed as FA) and the f-number must be
read from the lens aperture ring.
47
P: Programmed Auto
In this mode, the camera automatically adjusts shutter speed and
aperture according to a built-in program to ensure optimal exposure
in most situations. This mode is recommended for snapshots and
other situations in which you want to leave the camera in charge of
shutter speed and aperture.
#
A Flexible Program
In mode P, different combinations of shutter speed
and aperture can be selected by rotating the main
command dial while the exposure meters are on
(“flexible program”). Rotate the dial to the right for
large apertures (low f-numbers) that blur background
details or fast shutter speeds that “freeze” motion.
Rotate the dial to the left for small apertures (high
Main command dial
f-numbers) that increase depth of field or slow shutter speeds that blur motion. All
combinations produce the same exposure. While flexible program is in effect, a U indicator
appears in the control panel. To restore default shutter speed and aperture settings, rotate
the main command dial until the indicator is no longer displayed, choose another mode, or
turn the camera off.
A The Shutter Speed and Aperture Displays
The shutter speed and aperture displays can be activated by pressing the shutter-release
A See Also
48
S: Shutter-Priority Auto
In shutter-priority auto, you choose the shutter speed while the
camera automatically selects the aperture that will produce the
optimal exposure. Use slow shutter speeds to suggest motion by
blurring moving subjects, fast shutter speeds to “freeze” motion.
Fast shutter speed (1/1600 s)
Slow shutter speed (1/6 s)
#
To choose a shutter speed, rotate the main
command dial while the exposure meters are on.
Shutter speed can be set to “v” or to values
between 30 s and 1/8000 s.
Main command dial
A See Also
appear in the shutter-speed displays.
49
A: Aperture-Priority Auto
In aperture-priority auto, you choose the aperture while the camera
automatically selects the shutter speed that will produce the optimal
exposure. Large apertures (low f-numbers) increase flash range
of the main subject. Small apertures (high f-numbers) increase depth
of field, bringing out details in the background and foreground. Short
field depths are generally used in portraits to blur background details, long field
depths in landscape photographs to bring the foreground and background into focus.
#
Large aperture (f/5.6)
Small aperture (f/22)
Sub-command dial
To choose an aperture between the minimum and
maximum values for the lens, rotate the sub-
command dial while the exposure meters are on.
A Depth-of-Field Preview
To preview the effects of aperture, press and hold the
depth-of-field preview button. The lens will be
stopped down to the current aperture value, allowing
depth of field to be previewed in the viewfinder.
Depth-of-field preview button
A Custom Setting e5—Modeling Flash
This setting controls whether the built-in flash and optional flash units such as the SB-910,
50
M: Manual
In manual mode, you control both shutter speed and aperture. While
the exposure meters are on, rotate the main command dial to choose
a shutter speed, and the sub-command dial to set aperture. Shutter
speed can be set to “v” or to values between 30 s and 1/8000 s, or
the shutter can be held open indefinitely for a long time-exposure
between the minimum and maximum values for the lens. Use the exposure
indicators to check exposure.
Shutter speed
Aperture
#
Main command dial
Sub-command dial
A AF Micro NIKKOR Lenses
Provided that an external exposure meter is used, the exposure ratio need only be taken into
account when the lens aperture ring is used to set aperture.
A The Exposure Indicator
If a shutter speed other than Bulb (A) or Time (%) is selected, the exposure indicator in
the viewfinder shows whether the photograph would be under- or over-exposed at current
settings. Depending on the option chosen for Custom Setting b2 (EV steps for exposure
1/2 EV (the illustrations below show the display in the viewfinder when 1/3 step is selected
for Custom Setting b2). If the limits of the exposure metering or live view exposure control
system are exceeded, the indicator will flash.
Underexposed by 1/3 EV
Optimal exposure
Overexposed by over 2 EV
A See Also
For information reversing the exposure indicators so that negative values are displayed on
51
❚❚Long Time-Exposures (M Mode Only)
Select the following shutter speeds for long time-
exposures of moving lights, the stars, night scenery, or
fireworks.
•
Bulb (A): The shutter remains open while the
shutter-release button is held down. To prevent
blur, use a tripod or an optional wireless remote
Time (%): Start the exposure by using the shutter-
release button on the camera or on an optional
remote control, remote cord, or wireless remote
controller. The shutter remains open for thirty
minutes or until the button is pressed a second
time.
Length of exposure: 35 s
Aperture: f/25
•
#
1 Ready the camera.
Mount the camera on a tripod or place it on a stable, level surface. To prevent
light entering via the viewfinder interfering with exposure, remove the rubber
To prevent loss of power before the exposure is complete, use a fully charged
EN-EL15 battery or an optional EH-5b AC adapter and EP-5B power connector.
Note that noise (bright spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels, or fog) may be
present in long exposures; before shooting, choose On for Long exposure NR
select a remote control mode (Delayed remote, Quick-response remote, or
Remote mirror-up) using the Remote control mode (ML-L3) option in the
Mode dial
2 Rotate the mode dial to M.
52
3 Choose a shutter speed.
While the exposure meters are on, rotate the
main command dial to choose a shutter
speed of Bulb (A) or Time (%).
Main
command dial
Bulb
Time
#
4 Open the shutter.
Bulb: After focusing, press the shutter-release button on the camera or optional
WR-1, WR-T10, or MC-DC2 all the way down. Keep the shutter-release button
pressed until the exposure is complete.
Time: Press the shutter-release button on the camera or optional remote control,
remote cord, or wireless remote controller all the way down. If the exposure is
started by pressing the shutter-release button on the optional ML-L3 remote
control, pictures are taken in “Time” (%) mode even when “Bulb” (A) is
selected for shutter speed.
5 Close the shutter.
Bulb: Take your finger off the shutter-release button.
Time: Repeat the operation performed in Step 4. Shooting ends automatically
after thirty minutes.
53
#
54
User Settings: U1 and U2 Modes
$
Assign frequently-used settings to the U1 and U2 positions on the mode dial.
Saving User Settings
1 Select a mode.
Mode dial
Rotate the mode dial to the desired mode.
$
2 Adjust settings.
Make the desired adjustments to flexible program (mode P), shutter speed
(modes S and M), aperture (modes A and M), exposure and flash compensation,
flash mode, focus point, metering, autofocus and AF-area modes, bracketing,
that the camera will not store the options selected for Storage folder, File
naming, Image area, Manage Picture Control, Remote control mode
(ML-L3), Multiple exposure, or Interval timer shooting).
3 Select Save user settings.
Press the G button to display the menus.
Highlight Save user settings in the setup
menu and press 2.
G button
4 Select Save to U1 or Save to U2.
Highlight Save to U1 or Save to U2 and
press 2.
55
5 Save user settings.
Highlight Save settings and press J to
assign the settings selected in Steps 1 and 2
to the mode dial position selected in Step 4.
Recalling User Settings
Simply rotate the mode dial to U1 to recall the
settings assigned to Save to U1, or to U2 to recall
the settings assigned to Save to U2.
Mode dial
$
Resetting User Settings
To reset settings for U1 or U2 to default values:
1 Select Reset user settings.
Press the G button to display the menus.
Highlight Reset user settings in the setup
menu and press 2.
G button
2 Select Reset U1 or Reset U2.
Highlight Reset U1 or Reset U2 and press 2.
3 Reset user settings.
Highlight Reset and press J.
56
Release Mode
k
Choosing a Release Mode
To choose a release mode, press the release mode dial lock
release and turn the release mode dial to the desired setting.
Mode
Description
Single frame: Camera takes one photograph each time shutter-release button is pressed.
S
k
Continuous low speed: While shutter-release button is held down, camera takes
photographs at frame rate selected for Custom Setting d5 (CL mode shooting speed,
is raised.
Continuous high speed: While shutter-release button is held down, camera records
Quiet shutter-release: As for single frame, except that mirror does not click back into place
while shutter-release button is fully pressed, allowing user to control timing of click
made by mirror, which is also quieter than in single frame mode. In addition, beep
CL
CH
J
E
Mirror up: Choose this mode to minimize camera shake in telephoto or close-up
photography or in other situations in which the slightest camera movement can result
in blurred photographs.
MUP
57
Frame Advance Rate
The frame rate for continuous shooting (low and high speed) varies with the option
frame rates for a fully-charged EN-EL15 battery, continuous-servo AF, manual or
shutter-priority auto exposure, a shutter speed of 1/250 s or faster, and the remaining
settings at default values.
Approximate frame advance rate
Image area
DX (24×16)
1.3× (18×12)
Image quality
CL
CH
JPEG/12-bit NEF (RAW)
14-bit NEF (RAW)
JPEG/12-bit NEF (RAW)
14-bit NEF (RAW)
1–6 fps
1–5 fps
6 fps
5 fps
7 fps
6 fps
1–6 fps
Frame rate drops at slow shutter speeds or very small apertures (high f-numbers),
when vibration reduction (available with VR lenses) or auto ISO sensitivity control is
k
A The Memory Buffer
The camera is equipped with a memory buffer for temporary
storage, allowing shooting to continue while photographs are
being saved to the memory card. Up to 100 photographs can
be taken in succession; note, however, that the frame rate will
drop when the buffer is full (t00). The approximate number
of images that can be stored in the buffer at current settings is
shown in the exposure-count displays in the viewfinder and
control panel while the shutter-release button is pressed. The illustration at right shows the
display when space remains in the buffer for about 17 pictures.
While photographs are being recorded to the memory card, the access lamp next to the
memory card slot will light. Depending on shooting conditions and memory card
performance, recording may take from a few seconds to a few minutes. Do not remove the
memory card or remove or disconnect the power source until the access lamp has gone out. If
the camera is switched off while data remain in the buffer, the power will not turn off until all
images in the buffer have been recorded. If the battery is exhausted while images remain in
the buffer, the shutter release will be disabled and the images transferred to the memory
card.
A See Also
For information on choosing the maximum number of photographs that can be taken in a
the number of pictures that can be taken in a single burst, see page 348.
58
Self-Timer Mode
The self-timer can be used to reduce camera shake or for self-portraits. Before
shooting, mount the camera on a tripod or place the camera on a stable, level
surface.
1 Select self-timer mode.
Press the release mode dial lock release and turn
the release mode dial to E.
Release mode dial
2 Frame the photograph and focus.
can only be taken if the in-focus (I) indicator
appears in the viewfinder.
k
3 Start the timer.
Press the shutter-release button all the way
down to start the timer. The self-timer lamp will
start to flash. Two seconds before the
photograph is taken, the self-timer lamp will
stop flashing. The shutter will be released about
ten seconds after the timer starts.
To turn the self-timer off before a photograph is taken, turn the release mode dial to
another setting.
D Using the Built-in Flash
Before taking a photograph with the flash in P, S, A, M, or 0 modes, press the M (Y) button to
Shooting will be interrupted if the flash is raised after the self-timer has started. Note that
only one photograph will be taken when the flash fires, regardless of the number of
59
A Cover the Viewfinder
When taking photos without your eye to the
viewfinder, remove the DK-23 rubber eyecup
(q) and insert the supplied DK-5 eyepiece cap
as shown (w). This prevents light entering via
the viewfinder interfering with exposure. Hold
the camera firmly when removing the rubber
eyecup.
DK-23 rubber eyecup
DK-5 eyepiece cap
A See Also
For information on choosing the duration of the self-timer, the number of shots taken, and
k
60
Mirror up Mode
Choose this mode to minimize blurring caused by camera movement when the
mirror is raised. Use of a tripod is recommended.
1 Select mirror up mode.
Press the release mode dial lock release and
rotate the release mode dial to MUP.
Release mode dial
2 Raise the mirror.
Frame the picture, focus, and then press the
shutter-release button the rest of the way down
to raise the mirror.
k
D Mirror Up
While the mirror is raised, photos can not be framed in the viewfinder and autofocus
and metering will not be performed.
3 Take a picture.
Press the shutter-release button all the way
down again to take a picture. To prevent
blurring caused by camera movement, press the
shutter-release button smoothly, or use an optional remote cord or wireless
A Mirror up Mode
A picture will be taken automatically if no operations are performed for about 30 s after the
mirror is raised.
A See Also
For information on using the optional ML-L3 remote control for mirror-up photography, see
page 127.
61
k
62
Image Recording Options
d
Image Area
Choose an image area from DX (24×16) and 1.3× (18×12).
Option
Description
a DX (24×16)
Pictures are recorded using a 23.5 × 15.6 mm image area (DX format).
Pictures are recorded using a 18.8 × 12.5 mm image area, producing a
camera can also record more images per second during continuous
c 1.3× (18×12)
Viewfinder display
d
Photo with DX image
area (24×16)
Photo with image
area of 1.3× (18×12)
63
Image area can be set using the Image area option in the shooting menu or by
❚❚The Image Area Menu
1 Select Image area in the shooting
menu.
Press G to display the menus. Highlight
and press 2.
G button
2 Adjust settings.
Choose an option and press J.
d
A The Viewfinder Display
The viewfinder display for the 1.3× DX crop is shown at right. A c
icon is displayed in the viewfinder when the 1.3× DX crop is selected.
1.3× DX crop
A Image Area
The selected option is shown in the information display.
64
❚❚Camera Controls
1 Assign image area selection to a camera control.
Select Choose image area as the “press + command dials” option for a camera
depth-of-field preview button (Custom Setting f3, Assign preview button,
2 Use the selected control to choose an image area.
The image area can be selected by pressing the
selected button and rotating the main or sub-
command dial until the desired crop is
d
Fn button Main command
dial
The option currently selected for image area can
be viewed by pressing the button to display the
image area in the control panel, viewfinder, or
information display. DX format is displayed as
“24 – 16” and the 1.3× DX crop as “18 – 12”.
A Image Size
A See Also
65
Image Quality and Size
Together, image quality and size determine how much space each photograph
occupies on the memory card. Larger, higher quality images can be printed at larger
sizes but also require more memory, meaning that fewer such images can be stored
Image Quality
Choose a file format and compression ratio (image quality).
Option
File type
Description
Raw data from the image sensor are saved directly to the memory card.
NEF Settings such as white balance and contrast can be adjusted after
shooting.
NEF (RAW)
Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1 : 4 (fine
JPEG fine
quality). *
Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1 : 8 (normal
JPEG normal JPEG
JPEG basic
quality). *
d
Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1 : 16 (basic
quality). *
NEF (RAW) +
JPEG fine
Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW) image and one fine-quality
JPEG image.
NEF (RAW) + NEF/ Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW) image and one normal-
JPEG normal JPEG quality JPEG image.
NEF (RAW) +
JPEG basic
Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW) image and one basic-quality
JPEG image.
* Size priority selected for JPEG compression.
Image quality can be set by pressing the X (T) button and rotating the main
command dial until the desired setting is displayed in the control panel.
X (T) button
Main command dial
Control panel
A The Shooting Menu
Image quality can also be adjusted using the Image quality option
66
The following options can be accessed from the shooting menu. Press the G
button to display the menus, highlight the desired option and press 2.
❚❚JPEG Compression
Choose the type of compression for JPEG images.
Option
Description
Size priority
Images are compressed to produce relatively uniform file size.
O
P
Optimal quality Optimal image quality. File size varies with scene recorded.
❚❚NEF (RAW) Recording > Type
Choose the type of compression for NEF (RAW) images.
Option
Description
Lossless
compressed
NEF images are compressed using a reversible algorithm, reducing
file size by about 20–40% with no effect on image quality.
NEF images are compressed using a non-reversible algorithm,
reducing file size by about 35–55% with almost no effect on image
quality.
N
O Compressed
d
❚❚NEF (RAW) Recording > NEF (RAW) Bit Depth
Choose a bit depth for NEF (RAW) images.
Option
Description
q 12-bit
NEF (RAW) images are recorded at a bit-depth of 12 bits.
NEF (RAW) images are recorded at a bit depth of 14 bits, producing
files larger than those with a bit depth of 12 bits but increasing the
color data recorded.
r 14-bit
A NEF (RAW) Images
NEF (RAW) images can be viewed on the camera or using software such as Capture NX 2
that the option selected for image size does not affect the size of NEF (RAW) images; when
viewed on a computer, NEF (RAW) images have the dimensions given for large (#-size)
A NEF+JPEG
When photographs taken at settings of NEF (RAW) + JPEG are viewed on the camera with
only one memory card inserted, only the JPEG image will be displayed. If both copies are
recorded to the same memory card, both copies will be erased when the photo is deleted. If
the JPEG copy is recorded to a separate memory card using the Role played by card in
Slot 2 > RAW Slot 1—JPEG Slot 2 option, deleting the JPEG copy will not delete the NEF
(RAW) image.
67
Image Size
Image size is measured in pixels. Choose from # Large, $ Medium, or % Small
Image area
Option
Large
Medium
Small
Large
Medium
Small
Size (pixels)
6000 × 4000
4496 × 3000
2992 × 2000
4800 × 3200
3600 × 2400
2400 × 1600
Print size (cm/in.) *
50.8 × 33.9/20.0 × 13.3
38.1 × 25.4/15.0 × 10.0
25.3 × 16.9/10.0 × 6.7
40.6 × 27.1/16.0 × 10.7
30.5 × 20.3/12.0 × 8.0
20.3 × 13.5/ 8.0 × 5.3
DX (24×16)
1.3× (18×12)
* Approximate size when printed at 300 dpi. Print size in inches equals image size in pixels
divided by printer resolution in dots per inch (dpi; 1 inch=approximately 2.54 cm).
Image size can be set by pressing the X (T) button and rotating the sub-
command dial until the desired setting is displayed in the control panel.
d
X (T) button
Sub command dial
Control panel
A The Shooting Menu
Image size can also be adjusted using the Image size option in the
68
Using Two Memory Cards
When two memory cards are inserted in the camera, you can use the Role played by
card in Slot 2 item in the shooting menu to choose the role played by the card in Slot
2. Choose from Overflow (the card in Slot 2 is used only when the card in Slot 1 is
full), Backup (each picture is recorded twice, once to the card in Slot 1 and again to
the card in Slot 2), and RAW Slot 1—JPEG Slot 2 (as for Backup, except that the NEF/
RAW copies of photos recorded at settings of NEF/RAW + JPEG are recorded only to
the card in Slot 1 and the JPEG copies only to the card in Slot 2).
d
A “Backup” and “RAW Slot 1—JPEG Slot 2”
The camera shows the number of exposures remaining on the card with the least amount of
memory. Shutter release will be disabled when either card is full.
A Recording Movies
When two memory cards are inserted in the camera, the slot used to record movies can be
69
d
70
Focus
N
This section describes the focus options available when photographs are framed in
Autofocus
To use autofocus, rotate the focus-mode selector to AF.
Focus-mode selector
N
Autofocus Mode
Choose from the following autofocus modes:
Mode
AF-A
Description
Auto-servo AF: Camera automatically selects single-servo autofocus if subject is stationary,
continuous-servo autofocus if subject is moving.
Single-servo AF: For stationary subjects. Focus locks when shutter-release button is pressed
AF-S halfway. At default settings, shutter can only be released when in-focus indicator (I) is
Continuous-servo AF: For moving subjects. Camera focuses continuously while shutter-
release button is pressed halfway; if subject moves, camera will engage predictive focus
AF-C tracking to predict final distance to subject and adjust focus as necessary. At default
settings, shutter can be released whether or not subject is in focus (release priority;
A Predictive Focus Tracking
In AF-C mode or when continuous-servo autofocus is selected in AF-A mode, the camera will
initiate predictive focus tracking if the subject moves toward or away from the camera while
the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. This allows the camera to track focus while
attempting to predict where the subject will be when the shutter is released.
71
Autofocus mode can be selected by pressing the AF-
mode button and rotating the main command dial
until the desired setting is displayed in the viewfinder
or control panel.
AF-mode button Main command
dial
AF-A
AF-S
AF-C
A Getting Good Results with Autofocus
Autofocus does not perform well under the conditions listed below. The shutter release may
be disabled if the camera is unable to focus under these conditions, or the in-focus indicator
(I) may be displayed and the camera may sound a beep, allowing the shutter to be released
photograph.
N
There is little or no contrast
between the subject and the
background.
The focus point contains
areas of sharply contrasting
brightness.
Example: Subject is the same
Example: Subject is half in
color as the background.
the shade.
The focus point contains
objects at different distances
from the camera.
Background objects appear
larger than the subject.
Example: A building is in the
frame behind the subject.
Example: Subject is inside a
cage.
The subject contains many
fine details.
The subject is dominated by
regular geometric patterns.
Example: A field of flowers or
other subjects that are
small or lack variation in
brightness.
Example: Blinds or a row of
windows in a skyscraper.
A See Also
For information on using focus priority in continuous-servo AF, see Custom Setting a1 (AF-C
autofocus options available in live view or during movie recording.
72
AF-Area Mode
Choose how the focus point for autofocus is selected.
•
on the subject in the selected focus point only. Use with stationary subjects.
focus modes, the camera will focus based on information from surrounding focus
points if the subject briefly leaves the selected point. The number of focus points
varies with the mode selected:
•
-
9-point dynamic-area AF: Choose when there is time to compose the photograph or
when photographing subjects that are moving predictably (e.g., runners or race
cars on a track).
-
-
21-point dynamic-area AF: Choose when photographing subjects that are moving
unpredictably (e.g., players at a football game).
51-point dynamic-area AF: Choose when photographing subjects that are moving
quickly and can not be easily framed in the viewfinder (e.g., birds).
•
modes, the camera will track subjects that leave the selected focus point and select
new focus points as required. Use to quickly compose pictures with subjects that
are moving erratically from side to side (e.g., tennis players). If the subject leaves
viewfinder, remove your finger from the shutter-release button and recompose
the photograph with the subject in the selected focus point.
N
•
Auto-area AF: The camera automatically detects the subject and
the camera can distinguish human subjects from the
background for improved subject detection. The active focus
points are highlighted briefly after the camera focuses; in AF-C
mode or when continuous-servo autofocus is selected in AF-A
mode, the main focus point remains highlighted after the
other focus points have turned off.
73
AF-area mode can be selected by pressing
the AF-mode button and rotating the sub-
command dial until the desired setting is
displayed in the viewfinder or control panel.
AF-mode button Sub-command dial
Control panel
Viewfinder
N
A 3D-tracking
When the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, the colors in the area surrounding the
focus point are stored in the camera. Consequently 3D-tracking may not produce the
desired results with subjects that are the same color as the background or that occupy a very
small area of the frame.
A AF-Area Mode
AF-area mode is shown in the control panel and viewfinder.
AF-area mode
Control panel Viewfinder
AF-area mode
Control panel Viewfinder
51-point dynamic-area
AF *
Single-point AF
9-point dynamic-area
AF *
3D-tracking
21-point dynamic-area
AF *
Auto-area AF
* Only active focus point is displayed in the viewfinder. Remaining focus points provide information to
assist focus operation.
A Manual Focus
Single-point AF is automatically selected when manual focus is used.
A See Also
For information on adjusting how long the camera waits before refocusing when an object
recording.
74
Focus Point Selection
The camera offers a choice of 51 focus points that can be used to compose
photographs with the main subject positioned almost anywhere in the frame.
1 Rotate the focus selector lock to ●.
This allows the multi selector to be used to select
the focus point.
Focus selector lock
2 Select the focus point.
Use the multi selector to select the focus point in
the viewfinder while the exposure meters are on.
Press J to select the center focus point.
N
The focus selector lock can be rotated to the
locked (L) position following selection to prevent
the selected focus point from changing when
the multi selector is pressed.
A Auto-area AF
The focus point for auto-area AF is selected automatically; manual focus-point selection is
not available.
A See Also
For information on choosing when the focus point is illuminated, see Custom Setting a4 (AF
choosing the number of focus points that can be selected using the multi selector, see
75
Focus Lock
Focus lock can be used to change the composition after focusing, making it possible
to focus on a subject that will not be in a focus point in the final composition. If the
recompose the photograph after focusing on another object at the same distance as
your original subject. Focus lock is most effective when an option other than auto-
1 Focus.
Position the subject in the selected focus point
and press the shutter-release button halfway to
initiate focus. Check that the in-focus indicator
(I) appears in the viewfinder.
2 Lock focus.
AF-A and AF-C focus modes: With the shutter-release button
pressed halfway (q), press the A AE-L/AF-L button (w) to
lock both focus and exposure (an f icon will be displayed
in the viewfinder). Focus and exposure will remain locked
while the A AE-L/AF-L button is pressed, even if you later
remove your finger from the shutter-release button.
Shutter-release
button
N
AF-S focus mode: Focus locks automatically when the in-focus
indicator (I) appears, and remain locked until you remove
your finger from the shutter-release button. Focus can
also be locked by pressing the A AE-L/AF-L button (see
above).
A AE-L/AF-L button
3 Recompose the photograph and shoot.
Focus will remain locked between shots if you
keep the shutter-release button pressed halfway
(AF-S) or keep the A AE-L/AF-L button pressed,
allowing several photographs in succession to
be taken at the same focus setting.
Do not change the distance between the camera and the subject while focus lock is
in effect. If the subject moves, focus again at the new distance.
76
A Locking Focus with the AF-ON Button
If desired, the autofocus can be assigned to a separate button in the Custom Settings menu,
in which case focus will lock when the button is pressed and remain locked until the button
is pressed again. The shutter can be released at any time regardless of the options selected
A See Also
shutter-release button to lock exposure, Custom Setting f4 (Assign AE-L/AF-L button,
N
77
Manual Focus
Manual focus is available for lenses that do not support autofocus (non-AF NIKKOR
•
•
AF-S lenses: Set the lens focus mode switch to M.
Other AF lenses: Set the lens focus mode switch (if
present) and camera focus-mode selector to M.
Focus-mode selector
D AF Lenses That Are Not AF-S Lenses
Except when using an AF-S lens, do not use AF lenses
with the lens focus mode switch set to M and the
camera focus-mode selector set to AF. Failure to
observe this precaution could damage the camera or
lens.
•
Manual focus lenses: Set the camera focus-mode
selector to M.
To focus manually, adjust the lens focus ring until the
image displayed on the clear matte field in the
viewfinder is in focus. Photographs can be taken at
any time, even when the image is not in focus.
N
❚❚The Electronic Rangefinder
The viewfinder focus indicator can be used to confirm
whether the subject in the selected focus point is in
focus (the focus point can be selected from any of the
51 focus points). After positioning the subject in the
selected focus point, press the shutter-release button
halfway and rotate the lens focus ring until the in-
focus indicator may sometimes be displayed when the subject is not in focus; confirm
focus in the viewfinder before shooting.
A Focal Plane Position
To determine the distance between your subject and the
camera, measure from the focal plane mark (E) on the
camera body. The distance between the lens mounting
flange and the focal plane is 46.5 mm (1.83 in.).
46.5mm
Focal plane mark
78
ISO Sensitivity
S
The higher the ISO sensitivity, the less light needed to make an exposure, allowing
higher shutter speeds or smaller apertures. Choosing Auto allows the camera to set
ISO sensitivity automatically in response to lighting conditions. The following
options are available:
Mode
%
ISO sensitivity
Auto
P, S, A, M
100–6400 in steps of 1/3 EV; Hi 0.3 to Hi 2
Other shooting modes Auto; 100–6400 in steps of 1/3 EV; Hi 0.3 to Hi 2
ISO sensitivity can be adjusted by
pressing the W (S) button and
rotating the main command dial until
the desired setting is displayed in the
control panel or viewfinder.
W (S) button Main command dial
S
Control panel
Viewfinder
79
A Viewing ISO Sensitivity in the Information Display
ISO sensitivity is shown in the information display. When Auto is
selected, ISO AUTO and the sensitivity chosen by the camera is
displayed as shown at right.
A Auto
If the mode dial is rotated to P, S, A, or M after Auto is selected for ISO sensitivity in another
mode, the ISO sensitivity last selected in P, S, A, or M mode will be restored.
A Hi 0.3–Hi 2
The settings Hi 0.3 through Hi 2 correspond to ISO sensitivities 0.3–2 EV over ISO 6400 (ISO
8000–25600 equivalent). Pictures taken at these settings are more likely to be subject to
noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines).
A The Shooting Menu
ISO sensitivity can also be adjusted using the ISO sensitivity
S
A See Also
For information on choosing the ISO sensitivity step size, see Custom Setting b1 (ISO
panel or adjusting ISO sensitivity without using the W (S) button, see Custom Setting d3
the shooting menu to reduce noise at high ISO sensitivities, see page 228.
80
(P, S, A, and M Modes Only)
Auto ISO Sensitivity Control
If On is selected for ISO sensitivity settings > Auto ISO sensitivity control in the
shooting menu, ISO sensitivity will automatically be adjusted if optimal exposure can
not be achieved at the value selected by the user (ISO sensitivity is adjusted
appropriately when the flash is used).
1 Select Auto ISO sensitivity control for
ISO sensitivity settings in the shooting
menu.
To display the menus, press the G button.
Select ISO sensitivity settings in the
shooting menu, highlight Auto ISO
G button
sensitivity control and press 2.
2 Select On.
Highlight On and press J (if Off is selected,
ISO sensitivity will remain fixed at the value
selected by the user).
S
3 Adjust settings.
The maximum value for auto ISO sensitivity
can be selected using Maximum sensitivity
(the minimum value for auto ISO sensitivity
is automatically set to ISO 100; note that if
the ISO sensitivity selected by the user is
higher than that chosen for Maximum sensitivity, the value selected by the
user will be used instead). In modes P and A, sensitivity will only be adjusted if
underexposure would result at the shutter speed selected for Minimum
shutter speed (1/4000–1 s, or Auto; in modes S and M, ISO sensitivity will be
adjusted for optimal exposure at the shutter speed selected by the user). If
Auto (available only with CPU lenses; equivalent to 1/30 s when a non-CPU lens
is used) is selected, the camera will choose the minimum shutter speed based
on the focal length of the lens (auto shutter-speed selection can be fine-tuned
by highlighting Auto and pressing 2; for example, even faster values than
those usually selected automatically by the camera can be used with telephoto
lenses to reduce blur). Shutter speeds slower than the minimum value may be
used if optimum exposure can not be achieved at the ISO sensitivity value
selected for Maximum sensitivity. Press J to exit when settings are complete.
81
When On is selected, the viewfinder and
control panel show ISO-AUTO. When
sensitivity is altered from the value
selected by the user, these indicators
flash.
Control panel
Viewfinder
A Turning Auto ISO Sensitivity Control On or Off
You can turn auto ISO sensitivity control on or off by
pressing the W (S) button and rotating the sub-
command dial. ISO-AUTO is displayed when auto ISO
sensitivity control is on.
S
W (S) button Sub-command
dial
A Auto ISO Sensitivity Control
Noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) is more likely at higher sensitivities. Use
speed selected for Minimum shutter speed is slower than sync speed selected for Custom
speed for auto ISO sensitivity control during flash photography. Note that ISO sensitivity
may be raised automatically when auto ISO sensitivity control is used in combination with
slow sync flash modes (available with the built-in flash and the optional flash units listed on
page 304), possibly preventing the camera from selecting slow shutter speeds.
When auto ISO sensitivity control is in effect, the adjusted and
selected values appear in the information display as shown at right.
Selected value
Adjusted value
82
Exposure
Z
(P, S, A, and M Modes Only)
Metering
Choose how the camera sets exposure in P, S, A, and M modes (in other modes, the
camera selects the metering method automatically).
Option
Description
Matrix: Produces natural results in most situations. Camera meters a wide area of the
frame and set exposure according to tone distribution, color, composition, and, with
other CPU lenses, camera uses color matrix metering II, which does not include 3D
distance information). With non-CPU lenses, camera uses color matrix metering if focal
length and maximum aperture are specified using Non-CPU lens data option in setup
a
Center-weighted: Camera meters entire frame but assigns greatest weight to center area
(if CPU lens is attached, size of area can be selected using Custom Setting b4, Center-
meter for portraits; recommended when using filters with an exposure factor (filter
factor) over 1×. *
Spot: Camera meters circle 3.5 mm (0.14 in.) in diameter (approximately 2.5% of frame).
Circle is centered on current focus point, making it possible to meter off-center subjects
(if non-CPU lens is used or if auto-area AF is in effect, camera will meter center focus
point). Ensures that subject will be correctly exposed, even when background is much
brighter or darker. *
Z
b
V
* For improved precision with non-CPU lenses, specify lens focal length and maximum
To choose a metering option,
press the Z (Q) button and
rotate the main command dial
until the desired setting is
displayed in the control panel.
Z (Q) button Main command
Control panel
dial
A See Also
For information on making separate adjustments to optimal exposure for each metering
83
Autoexposure Lock
Use autoexposure lock to recompose photographs after using center-weighted
metering and spot metering to meter exposure. Note that matrix metering will not
produce the desired results.
Shutter-release
1 Lock exposure.
button
Position the subject in the selected focus point
and press the shutter-release button halfway.
With the shutter-release button pressed halfway
and the subject positioned in the focus point,
press the A AE-L/AF-L button to lock exposure (if
you are using autofocus, focus will also lock;
confirm that the in-focus indicator (I) appears
in the viewfinder).
A AE-L/AF-L button
While exposure lock is in effect, an f indicator
will appear in the viewfinder.
V
2 Recompose the photograph.
Keeping the A AE-L/AF-L button pressed,
recompose the photograph and shoot.
84
A Metered Area
In spot metering, exposure will be locked at the value metered in a 3.5-mm (0.14 in.) circle
centered on the selected focus point. In center-weighted metering, exposure will be locked
at the value metered in a 8-mm circle in the center of the viewfinder.
A Adjusting Shutter Speed and Aperture
While exposure lock is in effect, the following settings can be adjusted without altering the
metered value for exposure:
Mode
P
S
Setting
Shutter speed
A
Aperture
The new values can be confirmed in the viewfinder and control panel. Note that metering
can not be changed while exposure lock is in effect.
A See Also
lock when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. For information on changing the
V
85
(P, S, A, M and %Modes Only)
Exposure Compensation
Exposure compensation is used to alter exposure from the value suggested by the
camera, making pictures brighter or darker. It is most effective when used with
(underexposure) and +5 EV (overexposure) in increments of 1/3 EV. In general,
positive values make the subject brighter while negative values make it darker.
–1 EV
No exposure compensation
+1 EV
To choose a value for exposure compensation, press the E
button and rotate the main command dial until the desired
value is displayed in the control panel or viewfinder.
E button
Main command dial
V
0 EV
–0.3 EV
+2.0 EV
(E button pressed)
At values other than 0.0, the 0 at the center of the exposure
indicators will flash (modes P, S, and A only) and a E icon will be
displayed in the control panel and viewfinder after you release
the E button. The current value for exposure compensation
can be confirmed in the exposure indicator by pressing the E
button.
Normal exposure can be restored by setting exposure compensation to 0. Exposure
compensation is not reset when the camera is turned off, but is reset if you select
another mode after choosing %.
86
A Mode M
In mode M, exposure compensation affects only the exposure indicator; shutter speed and
aperture do not change.
A Using a Flash
When a flash is used, exposure compensation affects both flash level and exposure, altering
the brightness of both the main subject and the background. Custom Setting e4 (Exposure
background only.
A See Also
For information on choosing the size of the increments available for exposure
information on making adjustments to exposure compensation without pressing the E
automatically varying exposure, flash level, white balance, or Active D-Lighting, see page
V
87
V
88
(P, S, A, and M Modes Only)
White Balance
r
White balance ensures that colors are unaffected by the color of the light source. In
modes other than P, S, A, and M, white balance is set automatically by the camera.
Auto white balance is recommended for most light sources in P, S, A, and M modes, but
other values can be selected if necessary according to the type of source:
Option
Colortemp. *
Description
v Auto
Normal
White balance is adjusted automatically. For best
results, use type G or D lens. If built-in or optional
flash fires, results are adjusted for flash.
3500–
8000 K
Keep warm lighting colors
Incandescent
J
I
3000 K Use under incandescent lighting.
Use with:
Fluorescent
Sodium-vapor lamps
Warm-white fluorescent
White fluorescent
Cool-white fluorescent
Day white fluorescent
Daylight fluorescent
2700 K • Sodium-vapor lighting (found in sports venues).
3000 K • Warm-white fluorescent lights.
3700 K • White fluorescent lights.
4200 K • Cool-white fluorescent lights.
5000 K • Daylight white fluorescent lights.
6500 K • Daylight fluorescent lights.
• High color temperature light sources (e.g.
mercury-vapor lamps).
High temp. mercury-vapor
7200 K
H
N
Direct sunlight
Flash
Cloudy
5200 K Use with subjects lit by direct sunlight.
5400 K Use with built-in or optional flash.
6000 K Use in daylight under overcast skies.
8000 K Use in daylight with subjects in the shade.
2500– Choose color temperature from list of values
r
G
M
Shade
K
Choose color temp.
Preset manual
Use subject, light source, or existing photograph as
L
—
* All values are approximate and do not reflect fine-tuning (if applicable).
White balance is set by pressing
the L (U) button and rotating
the main command dial until the
desired setting is displayed in the
control panel.
L (U) button Main command
Control panel
dial
89
A The Shooting Menu
White balance can also be adjusted using the White balance
a choice of Normal and Keep warm lighting colors, which
preserves the warm colors produced by incandescent lighting,
while the I Fluorescent option can be used to select the light
source from the bulb types.
A Studio Flash Lighting
Auto white balance may not produce the desired results with large studio flash units. Use
preset white balance or set white balance to Flash and use fine tuning to adjust white
balance.
A Color Temperature
The perceived color of a light source varies with the viewer and other conditions. Color
temperature is an objective measure of the color of a light source, defined with reference to
the temperature to which an object would have to be heated to radiate light in the same
wavelengths. While light sources with a color temperature in the neighborhood of 5000–
5500 K appear white, light sources with a lower color temperature, such as incandescent
light bulbs, appear slightly yellow or red. Light sources with a higher color temperature
appear tinged with blue. The camera white balance options are adapted to the following
color temperatures (all figures are approximate):
• I (sodium-vapor lamps): 2700 K
• J (incandescent)/
I (warm-white fluorescent): 3000 K
• I (white fluorescent): 3700 K
• I (cool-white fluorescent): 4200 K
• I (day white fluorescent): 5000 K
• H (direct sunlight): 5200 K
• N (flash): 5400 K
• G (cloudy): 6000 K
• I (daylight fluorescent): 6500 K
• I (high temp. mercury-vapor): 7200 K
• M (shade): 8000 K
r
A See Also
camera will create several images each time the shutter is released. White balance will be
90
Fine-Tuning White Balance
White balance can be “fine-tuned” to compensate for variations in the color of the
light source or to introduce a deliberate color cast into an image. White balance is
fine-tuned using the White balance option in the shooting menu or by pressing the
L (U) button and rotating the sub-command dial.
❚❚The White Balance Menu
1 Select a white balance option in the
shooting menu.
To display the menus, press the G button.
Select White balance in the shooting menu,
then highlight a white balance option and
press 2. If an option other than Auto,
G button
Fluorescent, Choose color temp., or Preset
manual is selected, proceed to Step 2. If Auto, Fluorescent, or Choose color
temp. is selected, highlight the desired setting and press 2. For information on
fine-tuning preset white balance, see page 101.
2 Fine tune white balance.
Use the multi selector to fine-tune white
balance. White balance can be fine-tuned
on the amber (A)–blue (B) axis and the green
(G)–magenta (M) axis. The horizontal
r
(amber-blue) axis corresponds to color
temperature, with each increment
Coordinates
Adjustment
vertical (green-magenta) axis has the similar effects to the corresponding color
compensation (CC) filters.
Green (G)
Increase green
Blue (B)
Amber (A)
Increase magenta
Magenta (M)
Increase blue
Increase amber
91
3 Press J.
Press J to save settings and return to the
shooting menu. If white balance has been
fine-tuned, an asterisk (“E”) will be displayed
in the control panel.
❚❚The L(U) Button
At settings other than K (Choose color temp.) and
L (Preset manual), the L (U) button can be
used to fine-tune white balance on the amber (A)–
K or L is selected, use the shooting menu as
are available; each increment is equivalent to about 5
the sub-command dial until the desired value is
displayed in the control panel. Rotating the sub-
command dial to the left increases the amount of
amber (A). Rotating the sub-command dial to the
right increases the amount of blue (B). At settings
other than 0, an asterisk (“E”) appears in the control
panel.
L (U) button Sub-command
dial
Control panel
r
92
A White Balance Fine-Tuning
The colors on the fine-tuning axes are relative, not absolute. For example, moving the cursor
to B (blue) when a “warm” setting such as J (incandescent) is selected for white balance will
make photographs slightly “colder” but will not actually make them blue.
A Color Temperature Fine-Tuning
When Choose color temp. is selected, you can view the
color temperature while fine-tuning white balance.
A “Mired”
Any given change in color temperature produces a greater difference in color at low color
temperatures than it would at higher color temperatures. For example, a change of 1000 K
produces a much greater change in color at 3000 K than at 6000 K. Mired, calculated by
multiplying the inverse of the color temperature by 10 6, is a measure of color temperature
that takes such variation into account, and as such is the unit used in color-temperature
compensation filters. E.g.:
• 4000 K–3000 K (a difference of 1000 K)=83 mired
• 7000 K–6000 K (a difference of 1000 K)=24 mired
r
93
Choosing a Color Temperature
When K (Choose color temp.) is selected for white
balance, color temperature can be selected by
pressing the L (U) button and rotating the sub-
command dial. The color temperature is displayed in
the control panel.
L (U) button Sub-command
dial
Control panel
r
D Choose Color Temperature
Note that the desired results will not be obtained with flash or fluorescent lighting. Choose
N (Flash) or I (Fluorescent) for these sources. With other light sources, take a test shot to
determine if the selected value is appropriate.
A The White Balance Menu
Color temperature can also be selected in the white
balance menu. Note that the color temperature with the
L (U) button and the sub-command dial replaces the
value selected in the white balance menu.
94
Preset Manual
Preset manual is used to record and recall custom white balance settings for shooting
under mixed lighting or to compensate for light sources with a strong color cast. The
camera can store up to six values for preset white balance in presets d-1 through d-6.
Two methods are available for setting preset white balance:
Method
Description
Neutral gray or white object is placed under lighting that will be used
Direct measurement
Copy from existing
photograph
❚❚Measuring a Value for White Balance During Viewfinder Photography
1 Light a reference object.
Place a neutral gray or white object under the lighting that will be used in the
final photograph. In studio settings, a standard gray panel can be used as a
reference object. Note that exposure is automatically increased by 1 EV when
measuring white balance; in mode M, adjust exposure so that the exposure
r
2 Set white balance to L (Preset manual).
Press the L (U) button and rotate the main command dial until L is
displayed in the control panel.
L (U) button
Main command dial
Control panel
95
3 Select a preset.
Press the L (U) button and rotate the sub-command dial until the desired
white balance preset (d-1 to d-6) is displayed in the control panel.
L (U) button
Sub-command dial
Control panel
4 Select direct measurement mode.
Release the L (U) button briefly and then press the
button until the L icon in the control panel starts to
flash. A flashing D will also appear in the viewfinder.
The displays will flash for about six seconds.
Control panel
Viewfinder
5 Measure white balance.
Before the indicators stop flashing, frame the reference
object so that it fills the viewfinder and press the
shutter-release button all the way down. The camera
r
will measure a value for white balance and store it in the preset selected in Step
3. No photograph will be recorded; white balance can be measured accurately
even when the camera is not in focus.
A Protected Presets
if you attempt to measure a new value.
96
6 Check the results.
If the camera was able to measure a value for white
balance, C will flash in the control panel for about
six seconds, while the viewfinder will show a flashing
a.
Control panel
Viewfinder
If lighting is too dark or too bright, the camera may be
unable to measure white balance. A flashing b a
will appear in the control panel and viewfinder for
about six seconds. Press the shutter-release button
halfway to return to Step 5 and measure white balance
again.
Control panel
Viewfinder
r
D Direct Measurement Mode
If no operations are performed during viewfinder photography while the displays are
flashing, direct measurement mode will end in the time selected for Custom Setting c2
D Measuring Preset White Balance (Viewfinder Photography)
Preset manual white balance can not be measured while HDR or multiple exposure
A Selecting a Preset
Selecting Preset manual for the White balance option in the
shooting menu displays the dialog shown at right; highlight a preset
and press J. If no value currently exists for the selected preset,
white balance will be set to 5200 K, the same as Direct sunlight.
97
❚❚Measuring White Balance During Live View (Spot White Balance)
In live view, white balance can be measured in a selected area of the frame,
eliminating the need to prepare a reference object or change lenses during
telephoto photography.
1 Press the a button.
The mirror will be raised and the view through the lens will
be displayed in the camera monitor.
a button
2 Set white balance to L (Preset manual).
Press the L (U) button and rotate the main command dial until L is
displayed in the monitor.
L (U) button
Main command dial
Monitor
r
3 Select a preset.
Press the L (U) button and rotate the sub-command dial until the desired
white balance preset (d-1 to d-6) is displayed in the monitor.
L (U) button
Sub-command dial
Monitor
4 Select direct measurement mode.
Release the L (U) button briefly and then press the
button until the L icon in the monitor starts to flash.
A spot white balance target (r) will be displayed at the
selected focus point.
Monitor
98
5 Position the target over a white or grey area.
While D flashes in the display, use the multi selector to
position the r over a white or grey area of the subject.
6 Measure white balance.
Press J or press the shutter-release button all the way
down to measure white balance. The time available to
measure white balance is that selected for Custom Setting
When Preset manual is selected for White balance in the
shooting menu, the position of the target used to
measure preset white balance will be displayed on presets
recorded during live view photography.
r
A Measuring Preset White Balance (Live View Photography)
the live view selector is rotated to 1, preset manual white balance is measured using the J
button in place of the shutter-release button. Preset manual white balance can not set while
99
❚❚Copying White Balance from a Photograph
Follow the steps below to copy a value for white balance from an existing
photograph to a selected preset.
1 Select L (Preset manual) for White
balance in the shooting menu.
Press the G button and select White
balance in the shooting menu. Highlight
Preset manual and press 2.
G button
2 Select a destination.
Highlight the destination preset (d-1 to d-6)
and press W (S).
W (S) button
3 Choose Select image.
Highlight Select image and press 2.
r
4 Highlight a source image.
Highlight the source image.
5 Press J.
Press J to copy the white balance value for the
highlighted photograph to the selected preset. If the
comment will be copied to the comment for the selected
preset.
100
A Choosing a Source Image
To view the image highlighted in Step 4 full frame,
press and hold the X (T) button.
X (T) button
To view images in other locations, hold the D
button and press 1. The dialog shown at right will be
D button
A Choosing a White Balance Preset
Press 1 to highlight the current white balance preset
(d-1–d-6) and press 2 to select another preset.
A Fine-Tuning Preset White Balance
The selected preset can be fine-tuned by selecting
Fine-tune and adjusting white balance as
described on page 91.
r
101
❚❚Entering a Comment
Follow the steps below to enter a descriptive comment of up to thirty-six characters
for a selected white balance preset.
1 Select L (Preset manual).
Highlight Preset manual in the white
balance menu and press 2.
2 Select a preset.
Highlight the desired preset and press
W (S).
W (S) button
3 Select Edit comment.
Highlight Edit comment and press 2.
r
4 Edit the comment.
Edit the comment as described on page 111.
102
❚❚Protecting a White Balance Preset
Follow the steps below to protect the selected white balance preset. Protected
presets can not be modified and the Fine-tune and Edit comment options can not
be used.
1 Select L (Preset manual).
Highlight Preset manual in the white
balance menu and press 2.
2 Select a preset.
Highlight the desired preset and press
W (S).
W (S) button
3 Select Protect.
Highlight Protect and press 2.
r
4 Select On.
Highlight On and press J to protect the
selected white balance preset. To remove
protection, select Off.
103
r
104
Image Enhancement
J
(P, S, A, and M Modes Only)
Picture Controls
Nikon’s unique Picture Control system makes it possible to share image processing
settings, including sharpening, contrast, brightness, saturation, and hue, among
compatible devices and software.
Selecting a Picture Control
The camera offers a choice of preset Picture Controls. In P, S, A, and M modes, you can
choose a Picture Control according to the subject or type of scene (in other modes,
the camera selects a Picture Control automatically).
Option
Description
Standard processing for balanced results. Recommended for most
situations.
Q Standard
Minimal processing for natural results. Choose for photographs that will later
be extensively processed or retouched.
R Neutral
Pictures are enhanced for a vivid, photoprint effect. Choose for photographs
that emphasize primary colors.
S Vivid
T Monochrome Take monochrome photographs.
e Portrait
Process portraits for skin with natural texture and a rounded feel.
f Landscape Produces vibrant landscapes and cityscapes.
J
1 Display Picture Controls.
To display the menus, press the G button.
Highlight Set Picture Control in the
shooting menu and press 2 to display a list
of Picture Controls.
G button
2 Choose a Picture Control.
Highlight the desired Picture Control and
press J.
105
A Custom Picture Controls
Custom Picture Controls are created through modifications to existing Picture Controls using
can be saved to a memory card for sharing among other cameras of the same model and
A The Picture Control Indicator
The current Picture Control is shown in the information display when
the R button is pressed.
Picture Control
indicator
J
106
Modifying Picture Controls
or the user’s creative intent. Choose a balanced combination of sharpening, contrast,
and saturation using Quick adjust, or make manual adjustments to individual
settings.
1 Select a Picture Control.
Highlight the desired Picture Control in the
2 Adjust settings.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight the desired setting
Repeat this step until all settings have been
adjusted, or select Quick adjust to choose a
preset combination of settings. Default settings
can be restored by pressing the O (Q) button.
3 Press J.
J
A Modifications to Original Picture Controls
Picture Controls that have been modified from default
settings are indicated by an asterisk (“E”).
107
❚❚Picture Control Settings
Option
Description
Choose from options between –2 and +2 to reduce or exaggerate the effect
of the selected Picture Control by adjusting sharpening, contrast, and
saturation (note that this resets all manual adjustments). For example,
choosing positive values for Vivid makes pictures more vivid. Not available
with Neutral, Monochrome or custom Picture Controls.
Quick adjust
Control the sharpness of outlines. Select A to adjust sharpening
Sharpening automatically according to the type of scene, or choose from values between
0 (no sharpening) and 9 (the higher the value, the greater the sharpening).
Select A to adjust contrast automatically according to the type of scene, or
choose from values between –3 and +3 (choose lower values to prevent
Contrast
highlights in portrait subjects from being “washed out” in direct sunlight,
higher values to preserve detail in misty landscapes and other low-contrast
subjects).
Choose –1 for reduced brightness, +1 for enhanced brightness. Does not
affect exposure.
Brightness
Control the vividness of colors. Select A to adjust saturation automatically
Saturation according to the type of scene, or choose from values between –3 and +3
(lower values reduce saturation and higher values increase it).
Choose negative values (to a minimum of –3) to make reds more purple,
blues more green, and greens more yellow, positive values (up to +3) to
Hue
make reds more orange, greens more blue, and blues more purple.
Filter
Simulate the effect of color filters on monochrome photographs. Choose
effects
J
Choose the tint used in monochrome photographs from B&W (black-and-
white), Sepia, Cyanotype (blue-tinted monochrome), Red, Yellow, Green,
Toning
D “A” (Auto)
Results for auto sharpening, contrast, and saturation vary with exposure and the position of
the subject in the frame. Use a type G or D lens for best results.
A Custom Picture Controls
The options available with custom Picture Controls are the same as those on which the
custom Picture Control was based.
108
A The Picture Control Grid
Control grid showing the contrast and saturation for the selected
Picture Control in relation to the other Picture Controls (only contrast
is displayed when Monochrome is selected). Release the W (S)
button to return to the Picture Control menu.
The icons for Picture Controls that use auto contrast and saturation
are displayed in green in the Picture Control grid, and lines appear
parallel to the axes of the grid.
A Previous Settings
The line under the value displayed in the Picture Control setting
menu indicates the previous value for the setting. Use this as a
reference when adjusting settings.
A Filter Effects (Monochrome Only)
The options in this menu simulate the effect of color filters on monochrome photographs.
The following filter effects are available:
Option
Yellow
Description
Y
O
R
G
Enhances contrast. Can be used to tone down the brightness of the sky in
Orange landscape photographs. Orange produces more contrast than yellow, red
more contrast than orange.
Green Softens skin tones. Can be used for portraits.
Red
J
Note that the effects achieved with Filter effects are more pronounced than those
produced by physical glass filters.
A Toning (Monochrome Only)
Pressing 3 when Toning is selected displays saturation options.
Press 4 or 2 to adjust saturation. Saturation control is not available
when B&W (black-and-white) is selected.
109
Creating Custom Picture Controls
The Picture Controls supplied with the camera can be modified and saved as custom
Picture Controls.
1 Select Manage Picture Control in the
shooting menu.
To display the menus, press the G button.
Highlight Manage Picture Control in the
shooting menu and press 2.
G button
2 Select Save/edit.
Highlight Save/edit and press 2.
3 Select a Picture Control.
Highlight an existing Picture Control and
press 2, or press J to proceed to Step 5 to
save a copy of the highlighted Picture
Control without further modification.
J
4 Edit the selected Picture Control.
abandon any changes and start over from
default settings, press the O (Q) button.
Press J when settings are complete.
5 Select a destination.
Choose a destination for the custom Picture
Control (C-1 through C-9) and press 2.
110
6 Name the Picture Control.
The text-entry dialog shown at right will be
displayed. By default, new Picture Controls
are named by adding a two-digit number
(assigned automatically) to the name of the
existing Picture Control; to use the default
Keyboard
area
Name area
name, proceed to Step 7. To move the cursor in the name area, hold the
W (S) button and press 4 or 2. To enter a new letter at the current cursor
position, use the multi selector to highlight the desired character in the
keyboard area and press J. To delete the character at the current cursor
position, press the O (Q) button.
Custom Picture Control names can be up to nineteen characters long. Any
characters after the nineteenth will be deleted.
7 Press X (T).
Press the X (T) button to save changes
and exit. The new Picture Control will
appear in the Picture Control list.
X (T) button
J
A Manage Picture Control > Rename
Custom Picture Controls can be renamed at any time
using the Rename option in the Manage Picture
Control menu.
A Manage Picture Control > Delete
The Delete option in the Manage Picture Control
menu can be used to delete selected custom Picture
Controls when they are no longer needed.
A The Original Picture Control Icon
The original preset Picture Control on which the
custom Picture Control is based is indicated by an icon
in the top right corner of the edit display.
Original Picture Control icon
111
Sharing Custom Picture Controls
Custom Picture Controls created using the Picture Control Utility available with
ViewNX 2 or optional software such as Capture NX 2 can be copied to a memory card
and loaded into the camera, or custom Picture Controls created with the camera can
be copied to the memory card to be used in other D7100 cameras and software and
then deleted when no longer needed.
To copy custom Picture Controls to or from the
memory card, or to delete custom Picture Controls
from the memory card, highlight Load/save in the
Manage Picture Control menu and press 2. The
following options will be displayed:
•
Copy to camera: Copy custom Picture Controls from the
memory card to custom Picture Controls C-1
through C-9 on the camera and name them as
desired.
•
Delete from card: Delete selected custom Picture
Controls from the memory card. The confirmation
dialog shown at right will be displayed before a
Picture Control is deleted; to delete the selected
Picture Control, highlight Yes and press J.
Copy to card: Copy a custom Picture Control (C-1
through C-9) from the camera to a selected
destination (1 through 99) on the memory card.
•
J
A Saving Custom Picture Controls
Up to 99 custom Picture Controls can be stored on the memory card at any one time. The
memory card can only be used to store user-created custom Picture Controls. The preset
renamed, or deleted.
The options in the Manage Picture Control menu apply only to the memory card in Slot 1.
Custom Picture Controls can not be deleted from or copied to or from the card in Slot 2.
112
Preserving Detail in Highlights and
Shadows
(P, S, A, and M Modes Only)
Active D-Lighting
Active D-Lighting preserves details in highlights and shadows, creating photographs
with natural contrast. Use for high contrast scenes, for example when
photographing brightly lit outdoor scenery through a door or window or taking
pictures of shaded subjects on a sunny day. It is most effective when used with
Active D-Lighting off
Active D-Lighting: YAuto
J
D “Active D-Lighting” Versus “D-Lighting”
The Active D-Lighting option in the shooting menu adjusts exposure before shooting to
brightens shadows in images after shooting.
113
To use Active D-Lighting:
1 Select Active D-Lighting in the
shooting menu.
To display the menus, press the G button.
Highlight Active D-Lighting in the shooting
menu and press 2.
G button
2 Choose an option.
Highlight YAuto, Z Extra high,
P High, Q Normal, R Low, or Off and
press J. If YAuto is selected, the camera
will automatically adjust Active D-Lighting
according to shooting conditions (note,
however, that the effects may not visible in mode M and when center-weighted
or spot metering is used).
J
D Active D-Lighting
Active D-Lighting can not be used with movies. Noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog,
or lines) may appear in photographs taken with Active D-Lighting. Uneven shading may be
visible with some subjects. Active D-Lighting can not be used at ISO sensitivities of Hi 0.3 or
above.
A See Also
Fn button or depth-of-field preview button and a command dial to select an Active
D-Lighting option, see page 255.
114
(P, S, A, and M Modes Only)
High Dynamic Range (HDR)
Used with high-contrast subjects, High Dynamic Range (HDR) preserves details in
highlights and shadows by combining two shots taken at different exposures. HDR is
and a non-CPU lens, a strength of v Auto is equivalent to T Normal). It can not
be used to record NEF (RAW) images. While HDR is in effect, movie recording
used and shutter speeds of Bulb (A) and Time (%) are not available.
+
First exposure (darker)
Second exposure (brighter)
Combined HDR image
1 Select HDR (high dynamic range).
Press the G button to display the menus.
Highlight HDR (high dynamic range) in
the shooting menu and press 2.
G button
2 Select a mode.
Highlight HDR mode and press 2.
J
Highlight one of the following and press J.
•
To take a series of HDR photographs, select
6 On (series). HDR shooting will
continue until you select Off for HDR
mode.
•
•
To take one HDR photograph, select On
(single photo). Normal shooting will resume automatically after you have
created a single HDR photograph.
To exit without creating additional HDR photographs, select Off.
If On (series) or On (single photo) is selected, a k icon
will be displayed in the control panel.
115
3 Choose the HDR strength.
To choose the difference in exposure
between the two shots (HDR strength),
highlight HDR strength and press 2.
Highlight v Auto, c Extra high,
S High, T Normal, or U Low and
press J. If v Auto is selected, the camera
will automatically adjust HDR strength
according to shooting conditions.
4 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
The camera takes two exposures when the shutter-
release button is pressed all the way down. l k will
flash in the control panel and l u in the viewfinder
while the images are combined; no photographs can be
taken until recording is complete. Regardless of the
option currently selected for release mode, only one
photograph will be taken each time the shutter-release
button is pressed.
Control panel
Viewfinder
If On (series) is selected, HDR will only turn off when Off
is selected for HDR mode; if On (single photo) is selected, HDR turns off
automatically after the photograph is taken. The k icon clears from the display
when HDR shooting ends.
J
116
D Framing HDR Photographs
The edges of the image will be cropped out. The desired results may not be achieved if the
camera or subject moves during shooting. Depending on the scene, the effect many not be
visible, shadows may appear around bright objects, or halos may appear around dark
objects. Uneven shading may be visible with some subjects.
A Interval Timer Photography
If On (series) is selected for HDR mode before interval timer shooting begins, the camera
will continue to shoot HDR photographs at the selected interval (if On (single photo) is
selected, interval timer shooting will end after a single shot).
A See Also
HDR can also be adjusted using the Fn or depth-of-field preview button and the command
J
117
J
118
Flash Photography
l
Using the Built-in Flash
The built-in flash has a Guide Number (GN) 12/39 (m/ft, ISO 100, 20 °C/68 °F) and
provides coverage for the angle of view of a 16 mm lens. It can be used not only
when natural lighting is inadequate but to fill in shadows and backlit subjects or to
add a catch light to the subject’s eyes.
❚❚Using the Built-in Flash: i, k, p, n, o, s, w, and gModes
2 Take pictures.
The flash will pop up as required when the
shutter-release button is pressed halfway, and fire
when a photograph is taken. If the flash does not
pop up automatically, DO NOT attempt to raise it by
hand. Failure to observe this precaution could
damage the flash.
❚❚Using the Built-in Flash: P, S, A, M, and 0Modes
1 Raise the flash.
l
Press the M (Y) button to raise the flash.
2 Choose a flash mode (P, S, A, and M modes
M (Y) button
3 Take pictures.
The flash will fire whenever a picture is taken.
A Metering
Select matrix or center-weighted metering to activate i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital SLR.
Standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR is activated automatically when spot metering is selected
119
Flash Mode
The flash modes available vary with shooting mode:
i, k, p, n, s, w, g
o
0
Auto+slow sync+
red-eye reduction
Auto
Fill flash
Auto+red-eye reduction
Auto+slow sync
Off
j
Off
j
P, A
S, M
Fill flash
Fill flash
Red-eye reduction
Red-eye reduction
Rear-curtain sync
Slow sync+red-eye reduction
Slow sync
Rear curtain+slow sync *
* S is displayed when setting is complete.
To choose a flash mode, press the M (Y) button and rotate the main command dial
until the desired setting is displayed in the control panel.
l
M (Y) button
Main command dial
Control panel
A Lowering the Built-in Flash
To save power when the flash is not in use, press it gently downward
until the latch clicks into place.
120
A Default Flash Modes
Default flash modes are shown below.
Mode
i, k, p, n, w, g
s
Default
Auto
Auto+red-eye reduction
Mode
o
Default
Auto+slow sync
Fill flash
0, P, S, A, M
A Flash Modes
The flash modes listed on the previous page may combine one or more of the following
settings, as shown by the flash mode icon:
•
AUTO (auto flash): When lighting is poor or subject is backlit, flash pops up automatically
when shutter-release button is pressed halfway and fires as required.
• Y (red-eye reduction): Use for portraits. Red-eye reduction lamp lights before flash fires,
reducing “red-eye.”
• j (off): Flash does not fire even when lighting is poor or subject is backlit.
•
SLOW (slow sync): Shutter speed slows automatically to capture background lighting at night
or under low light. Use to include background lighting in portraits.
REAR (rear-curtain sync): Flash fires just before shutter closes, creating a stream of light behind
moving light sources (below at right). If this icon is not displayed, flash will fire as the
shutter opens (front-curtain sync; the effect this produces with moving light sources is
shown below at left).
•
Front-curtain sync
D The Built-in Flash
lens hoods to prevent shadows. The flash has a minimum range of 0.6 m (2 ft) and can not
be used in the macro range of zoom lenses with a macro function. i-TTL flash control can be
used at ISO sensitivities between 100 and 6400. At values over 6400, the desired results may
not be achieved at some ranges or aperture settings.
Rear-curtain sync
l
the shutter-release button is pressed.
The shutter release may be briefly disabled to protect the flash after it has been used for
several consecutive shots. The flash can be used again after a short pause.
121
A Shutter Speeds Available with the Built-in Flash
The following shutter speeds are available with the built-in flash.
Mode
Shutter speed
1/250–1/60 s
1/250–1/125 s
1/250–1 s
Mode
S
M
Shutter speed
1/250–30 s
i, P, A, k, p, s, w, g
n, 0
o
1/250–30 s, A
A Flash Control Mode
The camera supports the following i-TTL flash control modes:
•
i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital SLR: Flash emits series of nearly invisible preflashes (monitor
preflashes) immediately before main flash. Preflashes reflected from objects in all areas of
frame are picked up by 2016-pixel RGB sensor and are analyzed in combination with range
information from metering system to adjust flash output for natural balance between
main subject and ambient background lighting. If type G or D lens is used, distance
information is included when calculating flash output. Precision of calculation can be
increased for non-CPU lenses by providing lens data (focal length and maximum aperture;
•
Standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR: Flash output adjusted to bring lighting in frame to standard
level; brightness of background is not taken into account. Recommended for shots in
which main subject is emphasized at expense of background details, or when exposure
compensation is used. Standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR is activated automatically when
spot metering is selected.
The flash control mode for the built-in flash can be selected using Custom Setting e3 (Flash
the built-in flash as follows:
Flash sync
—
i-TTL
l
—
—
Manual
Repeating flash
Commander mode
122
A Aperture, Sensitivity, and Flash Range
Flash range varies with sensitivity (ISO equivalency) and aperture.
Aperture at ISO equivalent of
Approximate range
100
1.4
2
2.8
4
5.6
8
11
16
200
2
2.8
4
5.6
8
11
16
22
400
2.8
4
5.6
8
11
16
22
32
800 1600 3200 6400
m
ft
4
5.6
8
8
11
16
22
32
—
—
—
—
0.7–8.5
0.6–6.0
0.6–4.2
0.6–3.0
0.6–2.1
0.6–1.5
0.6–1.1
0.6–0.8
2 ft 4 in.–27 ft 11 in.
2 ft–19 ft 8 in.
2 ft–13 ft 9 in.
2 ft–9 ft 10 in.
2 ft–6 ft 11 in.
2 ft–4 ft 11 in.
2 ft–3 ft 7 in.
5.6
8
11
16
22
32
—
—
—
11
16
22
32
—
—
11
16
22
32
—
2 ft–2 ft 7 in.
The built-in flash has a minimum range of 0.6 m (2 ft).
In mode P, the maximum aperture (minimum f-number) is limited according to ISO
sensitivity, as shown below:
Maximum aperture at ISO equivalent of:
100
200
400
800
1600
3200
6400
2.8
3.5
4
5
5.6
7.1
8
If the maximum aperture of the lens is smaller than given above, the maximum value for
aperture will be the maximum aperture of the lens.
A See Also
recomposing a photograph.
For information on auto FP high-speed sync and choosing a flash sync speed, see Custom
For information on flash control and using the built-in flash in commander mode, see
l
123
(P, S, A, and M Modes Only)
Flash Compensation
Flash compensation is used to alter flash output by from –3EV to +1EV in increments
of 1/3EV, changing the brightness of the main subject relative to the background.
Flash output can be increased to make the main subject appear brighter, or reduced
to prevent unwanted highlights or reflections.
Press the M (Y) button and rotate the sub-
command dial until the desired value is
displayed in the control panel. In general,
choose positive values to make the main subject
brighter, negative values to make it darker.
Sub-command
dial
M (Y) button
At values other than 0.0, a Y icon will be
displayed in the control panel and viewfinder after
you release the M (Y) button. The current value for
flash compensation can be confirmed by pressing the
M (Y) button.
0 EV
Normal flash output can be restored by setting flash
compensation to 0.0. Flash compensation is not
reset when the camera is turned off.
(M (Y) button pressed)
–0.3 EV
+1.0 EV
l
A Optional Flash Units
Flash compensation is also available with optional SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600,
SB-400, and SB-R200 flash units. The SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, and SB-600 also allow
flash compensation to be set using the controls on the flash unit; the value selected with the
flash unit is added to the value selected with the camera.
A See Also
For information on choosing the size of the increments available for flash compensation, see
flash and exposure compensation combine, see Custom Setting e4 (Exposure comp. for
124
FV Lock
This feature is used to lock flash output, allowing photographs to be recomposed
without changing the flash level and ensuring that flash output is appropriate to the
subject even when the subject is not positioned in the center of the frame. Flash
output is adjusted automatically for any changes in ISO sensitivity and aperture.
To use FV lock:
1 Assign FV lock to the Fn button.
Select FV lock for Custom Setting f2 (Assign Fn
2 Raise the flash.
In P, S, A, M, and 0 modes, the flash can be raised
by pressing the M (Y) button. In i, k, p, n, o,
s, w, and g modes, the flash will pop up
automatically when required.
M (Y) button
3 Focus.
Position the subject in the center of the frame
and press the shutter-release button halfway to
focus.
l
4 Lock flash level.
After confirming that the flash ready indicator (M)
is displayed in the viewfinder, press the Fn
button. The flash will emit a monitor preflash to
determine the appropriate flash level. Flash
output will be locked at this level and FV lock
icons (e) will appear in the viewfinder.
Fn button
125
5 Recompose the photograph.
6 Take the photograph.
Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to shoot. If desired,
additional pictures can be taken without releasing FV lock.
7 Release FV lock.
Press the Fn button to release FV lock. Confirm that the FV lock icon (e) is no
longer displayed in the viewfinder.
D Using FV Lock with the Built-in Flash
FV lock is only available with the built-in flash when TTL is selected for Custom Setting e3
A Using FV Lock with Optional Flash Units
l
FV lock is also available with optional flash units in TTL and (where supported) monitor pre-
flash AA and monitor pre-flash A flash control modes. Note that when commander mode is
the flash control mode for the master or at least one remote group to TTL or AA.
A Metering
The metering areas for FV lock when using optional flash unit are as follows:
Flash unit
Flash mode
i-TTL
AA
i-TTL
AA
Metered area
4-mm circle in center of frame
Area metered by flash exposure meter
Entire frame
Stand-alone flash unit
Used with other flash units
(Advanced Wireless Lighting)
Area metered by flash exposure meter
A (master flash)
A See Also
For information on using the depth-of-field preview or A AE-L/AF-L button for FV lock, see
126
Remote Control Photography
&
Using an Optional ML-L3 Remote
Control
for self-portraits.
1 Select Remote control mode (ML-L3).
Press the G button to display the menus.
Highlight Remote control mode (ML-L3) in
the shooting menu and press 2.
G button
2 Choose a remote control mode.
Highlight one of the following options and press J.
Option
Description
Shutter is released 2 s after ML-L3 shutter-release button is
pressed.
% Delayed remote
Quick-response Shutter is released when ML-L3 shutter-release button is
$
remote
pressed.
&
Press ML-L3 shutter-release button once to raise mirror, again to
release shutter and take photograph. Prevents blur caused by
camera moving when mirror is raised.
Remote
mirror-up
&
# Off
The shutter can not be released using the ML-L3.
3 Frame the photograph.
Mount the camera on a tripod or place the camera on a stable, level surface.
A Release Mode
When an optional ML-L3 remote control is used, the release mode selected with the release
(ML-L3) in the shooting menu.
127
4 Take the photograph.
From a distance of 5 m (16 ft) or less, aim the transmitter
on the ML-L3 at either of the infrared receivers on the
button. In delayed remote mode, the self-timer lamp will
light for about two seconds before the shutter is released.
In quick-response remote mode, the self-timer lamp will
flash after the shutter has been released. In remote mirror-up mode, pressing the
ML-L3 shutter-release button once raises the mirror; the shutter will be released
and the self-timer lamp will flash after 30 s or when the button is pressed a
second time.
D Before Using Optional ML-L3 Remote Controls
Before using the remote control for the first time, remove the clear plastic battery-insulator
sheet.
A Using the Built-in Flash
Before taking a photograph with the flash in P, S, A, M, or 0 modes, press the M (Y) button to
Shooting will be interrupted if the flash is raised while remote control mode is in effect. If the
flash is required, the camera will only respond to the ML-L3 shutter-release button once the
flash has charged. In auto, scene, and special effects modes in which the flash pops up
automatically, the flash will begin charging when remote control mode is selected; once the
flash is charged, it will automatically pop up and fire when required.
In flash modes that support red-eye reduction, the red-eye reduction lamp will light for
about one second before the shutter is released. In delayed remote mode, the self-timer
lamp will light for two seconds, followed by the red-eye reduction lamp which light for one
second before the shutter is released.
&
A Focusing in Remote Control Mode
The camera will not adjust focus in remote mirror-up mode or when continuous-servo
autofocus is selected; note however that if any autofocus mode is selected, you can focus by
pressing the camera shutter-release button halfway before shooting (pressing the button all
the way down will not release the shutter). If auto- or single-servo autofocus is selected or
the camera is in live view in delayed or quick-response remote mode, the camera will
automatically adjust focus before shooting; if the camera is unable to focus in viewfinder
photography, it will return to stand-by without releasing the shutter.
A Remote Mirror-up Mode
Metering is not performed in remote mirror-up mode. Photos can not be framed in the
viewfinder while the mirror is raised.
128
A Exiting Remote Control Mode
Remote control is cancelled automatically if no photograph is taken before the time selected
control mode (ML-L3), a two-button reset is performed, or shooting options are reset using
Reset shooting menu.
D Assign Shutter Button
ML-L3 can not be used when the live view selector is rotated to 1.
A Cover the Viewfinder
To prevent light entering via the viewfinder interfering with exposure, remove the rubber
A See Also
For information on choosing the length of time the camera will remain in stand-by mode
waiting for a signal from the remote control, see Custom Setting c5 (Remote on duration
&
129
Wireless Remote Controllers
wireless remote controllers, the shutter-release buttons on the WR-1 and WR-T10
perform the same functions as the camera shutter-release button, allowing remote
continuous and self-timer photography.
WR-1 Wireless Remote Controllers
When a WR-1 is connected to the camera accessory terminal, the shutter can be
released using another WR-1.
Pressing the shutter-release
button on the transmitter…
…releases the shutter on the
cameras connected to the receivers.
WR-R10/WR-T10 Wireless Remote Controllers
When a WR-R10 (transceiver) is connected to the camera, the shutter can be released
using a WR-T10 (transmitter).
&
Pressing the shutter-release
button on the WR-T10
(transmitter)…
…releases the shutter on the
cameras connected to the
WR-R10 (transceivers).
130
Other Shooting Options
t
Two-Button Reset: Restoring Default
Settings
The camera settings listed below can be restored to
default values by holding the W (S) and E buttons
down together for more than two seconds (these
buttons are marked by a green dot). The control
panel turns off briefly while settings are reset.
E button
W (S) button
Option
Image quality
Image size
Default
JPEG normal
Large
0
White balance
Fine tuning
HDR (high dynamic range)
ISO sensitivity settings
ISO sensitivity
Auto > Normal
A-B: 0, G-M: 0
Off 1
P, S, A, M
100
Auto
Off
Off
Off 2
Other shooting modes
Auto ISO sensitivity control
Remote control mode (ML-L3)
Interval timer shooting
Autofocus (viewfinder)
Autofocus mode
t
%
AF-S
AF-A
Modes other than %
AF-area mode
n, x, 0, %, 1, 2, 3
Single-point AF
51-point dynamic-area AF
Auto-area AF
m, w
i, j, k, l, p, o, r, s, t, u, v, y, z, g, u, P, S, A, M
131
Option
Autofocus (live view/movie)
Default
0
Autofocus mode
AF-S
AF-area mode
m, r, w, %, g, u, 1, 2, 3, P, S, A, M
Wide-area AF
n, 0
Normal-area AF
i, j, k, l, p, o, s, t, u, v, x, y, z
Focus point 3
Metering
AE lock hold
Bracketing
Picture Control settings 4
Flash compensation
Exposure compensation
Exposure delay mode
Flash mode
Face-priority AF
Center
Matrix
Off
Off
Unmodified
Off
Off
Off
i, k, p, n, w, g
s
Auto
Auto+red-eye reduction
o
Auto+slow sync
0, P, S, A, M
Fill flash
FV lock
Off
Off 5
Off
Multiple exposure
Flexible program
+ NEF (RAW)
Special effects mode
g
Off
Vividness
Outlines
0
0
t
i
Orientation
Width
Landscape
Normal
u
Color
Off
3
Color range
1 HDR strength is not reset.
2 If interval timer shooting is currently in progress, shooting will end. Starting time, shooting interval, and
number of intervals and shots are not reset.
3 Focus point not displayed if auto-area AF is selected for AF-area mode.
4 Current Picture Control only.
5 If multiple exposure is currently in progress, shooting will end and multiple exposure will be created
from exposures recorded to that point. Gain and number of shots are not reset.
132
(P, S, A, and M Modes Only)
Bracketing
Bracketing automatically varies exposure, flash level, Active D-Lighting (ADL), or
white balance slightly with each shot, “bracketing” the current value. Choose in
situations in which it is difficult to set exposure, flash level (i-TTL and, where
white balance, or Active D-Lighting and there is not time to check results and adjust
settings with each shot, or to experiment with different settings for the same subject.
❚❚Exposure and Flash Bracketing
To vary exposure and/or flash level over a series of photographs:
1 Select flash or exposure bracketing for
Custom Setting e6 (Auto bracketing
set) in the Custom Settings menu.
To display the menus, press the G button.
Select Custom Setting e6 (Auto bracketing
set) in the Custom Settings menu, highlight
an option, and press J. Choose AE & flash
to vary both exposure and flash level, AE
only to vary only exposure, or Flash only to
vary only flash level.
G button
2 Choose the number of shots.
Pressing the D button, rotate the main command dial to choose the number
of shots in the bracketing sequence and the order in which they will be taken.
Number of shots
Bracketing progress
indicator
t
D button
Main command dial
Control panel
D will be displayed in the viewfinder (see
right); the control panel will show M.
133
3 Select a bracketing increment.
Pressing the D button and rotate the sub-command dial to choose a
bracketing increment.
Bracketing
increment
D button
Sub-command dial
Control panel
The bracketing programs with an increment of 1/3 EV are listed below:
Control panel display
No. of shots
Bracketing order (EVs)
0/+0.3/+0.7
0/–0.7/–0.3
3
3
2
2
3
5
0/+0.3
0/–0.3
0/–0.3/+0.3
0/–0.7/–0.3/+0.3/+0.7
A See Also
For information on choosing the size of the increment, see Custom Setting b2 (EV
t
134
4 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
The camera will vary exposure and/or flash level shot-by-
shot according to the bracketing program selected.
Modifications to exposure are added to those made with
compensation values of more than 5 EV.
While bracketing is in effect, a bracketing progress indicator will be displayed in
the control panel. A segment will disappear from the indicator after each shot.
Exposure modified by:
0 EV
Exposure modified by:
–1 EV
Exposure modified by:
+1 EV
To cancel bracketing, press the D button and rotate the main command dial until
the bracketing progress indicator and M icon are no longer displayed.
t
135
A Exposure and Flash Bracketing
In continuous low speed and continuous high speed release modes, shooting will pause
after the number of shots specified in the bracketing program have been taken. Shooting
will resume the next time the shutter-release button is pressed. In self-timer mode, the
release button is pressed, regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting c3 (Self-
Custom Setting c3 (Self-timer) > Interval between shots. In other modes, one shot will be
taken each time the shutter-release button is pressed.
If the memory card fills before all shots in the sequence have been taken, shooting can be
resumed from the next shot in the sequence after the memory card has been replaced or
shots have been deleted to make room on the memory card. If the camera is turned off
before all shots in the sequence have been taken, bracketing will resume from the next shot
in the sequence when the camera is turned on.
A Exposure Bracketing
The camera modifies exposure by varying shutter speed and aperture (mode P), aperture
(mode S), or shutter speed (modes A and M). If On is selected for ISO sensitivity settings >
ISO sensitivity for optimum exposure when the limits of the camera exposure system are
exceeded; in mode M, the camera will first use auto ISO sensitivity control to bring exposure
as close as possible to the optimum and then bracket this exposure by varying shutter
speed.
t
136
❚❚White Balance Bracketing
The camera creates multiple copies of each photograph, each with a different white
1 Select white balance bracketing.
Choose WB bracketing for Custom Setting e6 Auto
bracketing set.
2 Choose the number of shots.
Pressing the D button, rotate the main command dial to choose the number
of shots in the bracketing sequence and the order in which they will be taken.
Number of shots
Bracketing progress
indicator
D button
Main command dial
Control panel
D will be displayed in the viewfinder (see right); the
control panel will show W.
t
A White Balance Bracketing
White balance bracketing is not available at an image quality of NEF (RAW). Selecting NEF
(RAW), NEF (RAW) + JPEG fine, NEF (RAW) + JPEG normal, or NEF (RAW) + JPEG basic
cancels white balance bracketing.
White balance bracketing affects only color temperature (the amber-blue axis in the white
be created each time the shutter is released, regardless of the option selected for Custom
If the camera is turned off while the memory card access lamp is lit, the camera will power off
only after all photographs in the sequence have been recorded.
137
3 Select a white balance increment.
Pressing the D button, rotate the sub-command dial to choose from
White balance
increment
D button
Sub-command dial
Control panel
The bracketing programs with an increment of 1 are listed below.
Control panel display
No. of shots White balance increment
Bracketing order
0 / 1 B / 2 B
0 / 2 A / 1 A
0 / 1 B
3
3
2
2
3
5
1B
1A
1B
1A
0 / 1 A
1A, 1B
1A, 1B
0 / 1 A / 1 B
0 / 2 A / 1 A / 1 B / 2 B
4 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
Each shot will be processed to create the number of
copies specified in the bracketing program, and
each copy will have a different white balance.
Modifications to white balance are added to the
white balance adjustment made with white
balance fine-tuning.
t
If the number of shots in the bracketing program is
greater than the number of exposures remaining,
n and the icon for the affected card will flash in
the control panel, a flashing j icon will appear in
the viewfinder as shown at right, and the shutter
release will be disabled. Shooting can begin when
a new memory card is inserted.
To cancel bracketing, press the D button and rotate the main command dial until
the bracketing progress indicator and W icon are no longer displayed.
138
❚❚ADL Bracketing
The camera varies Active D-Lighting over a series of exposures. For more information
on Active D-Lighting, see page 113.
1 Select ADL bracketing.
Choose ADL bracketing for Custom Setting e6 Auto
bracketing set.
2 Choose the number of shots.
Pressing the D button, rotate the main command dial to choose the number
of shots in the bracketing sequence. Choose two shots to take one photograph
with Active D-Lighting off and another at the value currently selected for Active
D-Lighting in the shooting menu (if Active D-Lighting is off, the second shot
will be taken with Active D-Lighting set to Auto). Choose three shots to take a
series of photographs with Active D-Lighting set to Off, Normal, and High.
Number of shots
Bracketing progress
indicator
D button
Main command dial
Control panel
D will be displayed in the viewfinder (see right); the
control panel will show d.
t
139
3 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
The camera will vary Active D-Lighting shot-by-shot
according to the bracketing program selected. While
bracketing is in effect, a bracketing progress indicator will
be displayed in the control panel. A segment will
disappear from the indicator after each shot: if the
bracketing program contains two shots, the indicator will
change from to , while if the program contains three
shots the indicator will change from to to
.
To cancel bracketing, press the D button and rotate the main command dial until
the bracketing progress indicator and d icon are no longer displayed.
A ADL Bracketing
t
In continuous low speed and continuous high speed release modes, shooting will pause
after the number of shots specified in the bracketing program have been taken. Shooting
will resume the next time the shutter-release button is pressed. In self-timer mode, the
release button is pressed, regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting c3 (Self-
Custom Setting c3 (Self-timer) > Interval between shots. In other modes, one shot will be
taken each time the shutter-release button is pressed.
If the memory card fills before all shots in the sequence have been taken, shooting can be
resumed from the next shot in the sequence after the memory card has been replaced or
shots have been deleted to make room on the memory card. If the camera is turned off
before all shots in the sequence have been taken, bracketing will resume from the next shot
in the sequence when the camera is turned on.
140
(P, S, A, and M Modes Only)
Multiple Exposure
Follow the steps below to record a series of two or three exposures in a single
photograph. Multiple exposures produce colors noticeably superior to those in
software-generated photographic overlays created from existing images.
❚❚Creating a Multiple Exposure
Multiple exposures can not be recorded in live view. Exit live view before proceeding.
A Extended Recording Times
For an interval between exposures of more than 30 s, extend the meter-off delay using
30 s longer than the option selected for Custom Setting c2. Shooting will end automatically
if no operations are performed for a set period and a multiple exposure will be created from
the exposures that have been recorded to that point.
1 Select Multiple exposure in the
shooting menu.
Press the G button to display the menus.
Highlight Multiple exposure in the
shooting menu and press 2.
G button
t
141
2 Select a mode.
Highlight Multiple exposure mode and
press 2.
Highlight one of the following and press J.
•
To take a series of multiple exposures, select
6 On (series). Multiple exposure
shooting will continue until you select Off
for Multiple exposure mode.
To take one multiple exposure, select On
(single photo). Normal shooting will resume automatically after you have
created a single multiple exposure.
To exit without creating additional multiple exposures, select Off.
•
•
If On (series) or On (single photo) is
selected, a n icon will be displayed in the
control panel.
3 Choose the number of shots.
Highlight Number of shots and press 2.
Press 1 or 3 to choose the number of
exposures that will be combined to form a
single photograph and press J.
t
142
4 Choose the amount of gain.
Highlight Auto gain and press 2.
The following options will be displayed.
Highlight an option and press J.
•
On: Gain is adjusted according to number
of exposures actually recorded (gain for
each exposure is set to 1/2 for 2 exposures,
1/3 for 3 exposures, etc.).
•
Off: Gain is not adjusted when recording multiple exposure. Recommended
if background is dark.
5 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
In continuous high-speed and continuous low-speed
a single burst. If On (series) is selected, the camera will
continue to record multiple exposures while the shutter-release button is
pressed; if On (single photo) is selected, multiple exposure shooting will end
after the first photograph. In self-timer mode, the camera will automatically
the option selected for Custom Setting c3 (Self-timer) > Number of shots
(Self-timer) > Interval between shots. In other release modes, one
photograph will be taken each time the shutter-release button is pressed;
continue shooting until all exposures have been recorded (for information on
interrupting a multiple exposure before all photographs are recorded, see page
144).
t
The n icon will flash until shooting ends. If On (series) is
selected, multiple exposure shooting will only end when
Off is selected for multiple exposure mode; if On (single
photo) is selected, multiple exposure shooting ends
automatically when the multiple exposure is complete.
The n icon clears from the display when multiple exposure shooting ends.
143
❚❚Interrupting Multiple Exposures
To interrupt a multiple exposure before the specified number of
exposures have been taken, select Off for multiple exposure
mode. If shooting ends before the specified number of
exposures have been taken, a multiple exposure will be created
from the exposures that have been recorded to that point. If
Auto gain is on, gain will be adjusted to reflect the number of
exposures actually recorded. Note that shooting will end automatically if:
• The camera is turned off
• The battery is exhausted
• Pictures are deleted
D Multiple Exposures
Do not remove or replace the memory card while recording a multiple exposure.
Multiple exposures can not be recorded in live view. Taking photographs in live view resets
Multiple exposure mode to Off.
Noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) may appear in photographs taken with
t
The information listed in the playback photo information display (including metering,
exposure, shooting mode, focal length, date of recording and camera orientation) is for the
first shot in the multiple exposure.
A Interval Timer Photography
If interval timer photography is activated before the first exposure is taken, the camera will
record exposures at the selected interval until the number of exposures specified in the
multiple exposure menu have been taken (the number of shots listed in the interval timer
shooting menu is ignored). These exposures will then be recorded as a single photograph
and interval timer shooting will end (if On (single photo) is selected for multiple exposure
mode, multiple exposure shooting will also end automatically).
A Other Settings
While a multiple exposure is being shot, memory cards can not be formatted and some
menu items are grayed out and can not be changed.
144
Interval Timer Photography
The camera is equipped to take photographs automatically at preset intervals.
D Before Shooting
Do not select self-timer (E) or MUP release mode when using the interval timer. Before
beginning interval timer photography, take a test shot at current settings and view the
results in the monitor.
Before choosing a starting time, select Time zone and date in the setup menu and make
Use of a tripod is recommended. Mount the camera on a tripod before shooting begins. To
ensure that shooting is not interrupted, be sure the camera EN-EL15 battery is fully charged.
If in doubt, charge the battery before use or use an EH-5b AC adapter and EP-5B power
connector (available separately).
1 Select Interval timer shooting in the
shooting menu.
Press the G button to display the menus.
Highlight Interval timer shooting in the
shooting menu and press 2.
G button
2 Choose a starting time.
Choose from the following starting triggers.
•
To start shooting immediately, highlight Now
and press 2. Shooting begins about 3 s
after settings are completed; proceed to
Step 3.
•
To choose a starting time, highlight Start time
and press 2 to display the start time
options shown at right. Press 4 or 2 to
highlight hours or minutes and press 1 or
3 to change. Press 2 to continue.
t
3 Choose the interval.
Press 4 or 2 to highlight hours, minutes, or
seconds; press 1 or 3 to change. Choose an
interval longer than the time needed to take
the number of shots selected in Step 4. If the
interval is too short, the number of photos
taken may be less than the total listed in Step 4 (the number of intervals
multiplied by the number of shots per interval). Press 2 to continue.
145
4 Choose the number of intervals and
number of shots per interval.
Press 4 or 2 to highlight number of
intervals or number of shots; press 1 or 3 to
change. Press 2 to continue.
Number of Number Total
intervals of shots/ number of
interval shots
5 Start shooting.
Highlight On and press J (to return to the
shooting menu without starting the interval
timer, highlight Off and press J). The first
series of shots will be taken at the specified
starting time, or after about 3 s if Now was
selected for Choose start time in Step 2. Shooting will continue at the selected
interval until all shots have been taken. Note that because the shutter speed,
frame rate, and time needed to record images may vary from one interval to the
next, the time between the end of one interval and the beginning of the next
may vary. If shooting can not proceed at current settings (for example, if a
shutter speed of Bulb (A) or Time (%) is currently selected in shooting
mode M or the start time is in less than a minute), a warning will be displayed in
the monitor.
t
D Out of Memory
If the memory card is full, the interval timer will remain active but no pictures will be taken.
inserting another memory card.
A Cover the Viewfinder
To prevent light entering via the viewfinder interfering with exposure, remove the rubber
146
A Interval Timer Photography
Interval timer photography can not be combined with remote control photography using
A Release Mode
Regardless of the release mode selected, the camera will take the specified number of shots
In S (single frame) mode, photographs will be taken at the rate chosen for Custom Setting d5
A Bracketing
Adjust bracketing settings before starting interval timer photography. If exposure, flash, or
ADL bracketing is active while interval timer photography is in effect, the camera will take
the number of shots in the bracketing program at each interval, regardless of the number of
shots specified in the interval timer menu. If white balance bracketing is active while interval
timer photography is in effect, the camera will take one shot at each interval and process it
to create the number of copies specified in the bracketing program.
A During Shooting
During interval timer photography, the Q icon in the control panel
will flash. Immediately before the next shooting interval begins, the
shutter speed display will show the number of intervals remaining,
and the aperture display will show the number of shots remaining in
the current interval. At other times, the number of intervals
remaining and the number of shots in each interval can be viewed by pressing the shutter-
release button halfway (once the button is released, the shutter speed and aperture will be
displayed until the standby timer expires).
To view current interval timer settings, select Interval timer
shooting between shots. While interval timer photography is in
progress, the interval timer menu will show the starting time, the
shooting interval, and the number of intervals and shots remaining.
None of these items can be changed while interval timer
photography is in progress.
t
Pictures can be played back and shooting and menu settings can be adjusted freely while
interval timer photography is in progress. The monitor will turn off automatically about four
seconds before each interval.
147
❚❚Pausing Interval Timer Photography
Interval timer photography can be paused by:
• Pressing the J button between intervals
• Highlighting Start > Pause in the interval timer menu and pressing J
• Turning the camera off and then on again (if desired, the memory card can be
replaced while the camera is off)
• Selecting self-timer (E) or MUP release mode
To resume shooting:
1 Choose a new starting time.
Choose a new starting time as described on
page 145.
2 Resume shooting.
Highlight Restart and press J. Note that if
interval timer photography was paused
during shooting, any shots remaining in the
current interval will be canceled.
❚❚Interrupting Interval Timer Photography
Interval timer shooting will end automatically if the battery is exhausted. Interval
timer photography can also be ended by:
• Selecting Start > Off in the interval timer menu
Normal shooting will resume when interval timer photography ends.
t
❚❚No Photograph
The camera will skip the current interval if any of the following situations persist for
eight seconds or more after the interval was due to start: the photograph or
photographs for the previous interval have yet to be taken, the memory buffer is full,
or the camera is unable to focus in AF-S or when single-servo AF is selected in AF-A
(note that the camera focuses again before each shot). Shooting will resume with the
next interval.
148
Non-CPU Lenses
By specifying lens data (lens focal length and maximum aperture), the user can gain
access to a variety of CPU lens functions when using a non-CPU lens.
If the focal length of the lens is known:
• Power zoom can be used with optional SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, and SB-600
flash units
• Lens focal length is listed (with an asterisk) in the playback photo info display
If the maximum aperture of the lens is known:
• The aperture value is displayed in the control panel and viewfinder
• Flash level is adjusted for changes in aperture if the flash unit supports AA (auto
aperture) mode
• Aperture is listed (with an asterisk) in the playback photo info display
Specifying both the focal length and maximum aperture of the lens:
• Enables color matrix metering (note that it may be necessary to use center-
weighted or spot metering to achieve accurate results with some lenses, including
Reflex-NIKKOR lenses)
• Improves the precision of center-weighted and spot metering and i-TTL balanced
fill-flash for digital SLR
t
149
The camera can store data for up to nine non-CPU lenses. To enter or edit data for a
non-CPU lens:
1 Select Non-CPU lens data.
Press the G button to display the menus.
Highlight Non-CPU lens data in the setup
menu and press 2.
G button
2 Choose a lens number.
Highlight Lens number and press 4 or 2 to
choose a lens number between 1 and 9.
3 Enter the focal length and aperture.
Highlight Focal length (mm) or Maximum
aperture and press 4 or 2 to edit the
highlighted item. Focal length can be
selected from values between 6 and
4000 mm, maximum aperture from values
between f/1.2 and f/22.
A Focal Length Not Listed
If the correct focal length is not listed, choose the closest value greater than the actual
focal length of the lens.
A Teleconverters and Zoom Lenses
The maximum aperture for teleconverters is the combined maximum aperture of the
teleconverter and the lens. Note that lens data are not adjusted when non-CPU lenses
are zoomed in or out. The data for different focal lengths can be entered as separate
lens numbers, or the data for the lens can be edited to reflect the new values for lens
focal length and maximum aperture each time zoom is adjusted.
t
4 Save settings and exit.
Press J. The specified focal length and aperture will be
stored under the chosen lens number.
150
To recall lens data when using a non-CPU lens:
1 Assign non-CPU lens number selection to a camera control.
Select Choose non-CPU lens number as the “Press + command dials” option
for a camera control in the Custom Settings menu. Non-CPU lens number
selection can be assigned to the Fn button (Custom Setting f2, Assign Fn
2 Use the selected control to choose the lens number.
Press the selected button and rotate the main command dial until the desired
lens number is displayed in the control panel.
Focal length Maximum aperture
Lens number
Control panel
Fn button Main command dial
t
151
Using a GPS Unit
An optional GP-1 GPS unit can be connected to the camera’s accessory terminal
camera’s current position to be recorded when photographs are taken. Turn the
camera off before connecting the GPS unit; for more information, see the manual
provided with the GPS Unit.
❚❚Setup Menu Options
The GPS item in the setup menu contains the options listed below.
•
Standby timer: Choose whether the exposure meters turn off automatically when a
GPS unit is attached.
Option
Description
Exposure meters turn off automatically if no operations are performed for the
Enable time to acquire GPS data, the delay is extended by up to one minute after the
exposure meters are activated or the camera is turned on). This reduces the drain
on the battery.
Disable Exposure meters do not turn off while a GPS unit is connected.
•
•
Position: This item is only available if a GPS unit is connected, when it displays the
current latitude, longitude, altitude, and Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) as
reported by GPS.
Use GPS to set camera clock: Select Yes to synchronize the camera clock with the time
reported by the GPS device.
t
A Coordinated Universal Time (UTC)
UTC data is provided by the GPS device and is independent of the camera clock.
A The n Icon
Connection status is shown by the n icon:
• n (static): Camera has established communication with the GPS
unit. Photo information for pictures taken while this icon is
• n (flashing): The GPS unit is searching for a signal. Pictures taken
while the icon is flashing do not include GPS data.
•
No icon: No new GPS data have been received from the GPS unit for
at least two seconds. Pictures taken when the n icon is not displayed do not include GPS
data.
152
Live View Photography
x
Follow the steps below to take photographs in live view.
1 Rotate the live view selector to C (live view
photography).
D Cover the Viewfinder
To prevent light entering via the viewfinder from interfering
with exposure, remove the rubber eyecup and cover the
viewfinder with the supplied DK-5 eyepiece cap before
Live view selector
2 Press the a button.
The mirror will be raised and the view through the lens will
be displayed in the camera monitor. The subject will no
longer be visible in the viewfinder.
a button
3 Position the focus point.
Position the focus point over your subject as described on page 155.
4 Focus.
Press the shutter-release button halfway to focus.
The focus point will flash green while the camera focuses.
If the camera is able to focus, the focus point will be
displayed in green; if the camera is unable to focus, the
focus point will flash red (note that pictures can be taken
even when the focus point flashes red; check focus in the
monitor before shooting). Exposure can be locked by
A AE-L/AF-L button
x
the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. In mode M, exposure can be
153
5 Take the picture.
Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down
to shoot. The monitor will turn off.
6 Exit live view mode.
Press the a button to exit live view mode.
D Ending Live View
Live view ends automatically if the lens is removed. Live view may also end
automatically to prevent damage to the camera’s internal circuits; exit live view when
the camera is not in use. Note that the temperature of the camera’s internal circuits
may rise and noise (bright spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels, or fog) may be
displayed in the following instances (the camera may also become noticeably warm,
but this does not indicate a malfunction):
• The ambient temperature is high
• The camera has been used for extended periods in live view or to record movies
• The camera has been used in continuous release mode for extended periods
If live view does not start when you attempt to start live view, wait for the internal
circuits to cool and then try again.
A Movies
Movie recording is not available during live view photography and pressing the
x
154
Focusing in Live View
To focus using autofocus, rotate the focus-mode
selector to AF and follow the steps below to choose
autofocus and AF-area modes. For information on
focusing manually, see page 159.
Focus-mode selector
❚❚Choosing a Focus Mode
The following autofocus modes are available in live view (note that full-time-servo AF
is not available in g and i modes):
Mode
AF-S
Description
Single-servo AF: For stationary subjects. Focus locks when shutter-release button is
pressed halfway.
Full-time-servo AF: For moving subjects. Camera focuses continuously until shutter-
release button is pressed. Focus locks when shutter-release button is pressed halfway.
AF-F
To choose an autofocus mode, press the AF-mode button and rotate the main
command dial until the desired mode is displayed in the monitor.
AF-mode button Main command dial
D Using Autofocus in Live View
Monitor
Use an AF-S lens. The desired results may not be achieved with other lenses or
teleconverters. Note that in live view, autofocus is slower and the monitor may brighten or
darken while the camera focuses. The focus point may sometimes be displayed in green
when the camera is unable to focus. The camera may be unable to focus in the following
situations:
x
• The subject contains lines parallel to the long edge of the frame
• The subject lacks contrast
• The subject in the focus point contains areas of sharply contrasting brightness, or includes
spot lighting or a neon sign or other light source that changes in brightness
• Flicker or banding appears under fluorescent, mercury-vapor, sodium-vapor, or similar
lighting
• A cross (star) filter or other special filter is used
• The subject appears smaller than the focus point
• The subject is dominated by regular geometric patterns (e.g., blinds or a row of windows
in a skyscraper)
• The subject is moving
155
❚❚Choosing an AF-Area Mode
In modes other than i, the following AF-area modes can be selected in live view
(note that subject-tracking AF is not available in %, g, and u modes):
Mode
Description
Face-priority AF: Use for portraits. The camera automatically detects and focuses on
portrait subjects; the selected subject is indicated by a double yellow border (if
multiple faces, up to a maximum of 35, are detected, the camera will focus on the
closest subject; to choose a different subject, use the multi selector). If the camera can
no longer detect the subject (because, for example, the subject has turned to face
away from the camera), the border will no longer be displayed.
!
Wide-area AF: Use for hand-held shots of landscapes and other non-portrait subjects.
Use the multi selector to move the focus point anywhere in the frame, or press J to
position the focus point in the center of the frame.
Normal-area AF: Use for pin-point focus on a selected spot in the frame. Use the multi
selector to move the focus point anywhere in the frame, or press J to position the
focus point in the center of the frame. A tripod is recommended.
$
%
Subject-tracking AF: Position the focus point over your subject and press J. The focus
point will track the selected subject as it moves through the frame. To end tracking,
press J again. Note that the camera may be unable to track subjects if they move
quickly, leave the frame or are obscured by other objects, change visibly in size, color,
or brightness, or are too small, too large, too bright, too dark, or similar in color or
brightness to the background.
&
To choose an AF-area mode, press the AF-mode button and rotate the sub-command
dial until the desired mode is displayed in the monitor.
AF-mode button Sub-command
dial
Monitor
x
156
Using the P Button
The options listed below can be accessed by
pressing the P button during live view
photography. Highlight items using the multi
selector and press 2 to view options for the
highlighted item. After choosing the desired
setting, press J to exit.
P button
Option
Description
Choose from the DX (24×16) and 1.3×
Image area
Image quality
Image size
Set Picture Control
Adjust Active D-Lighting to preserve details in highlights and
Active D-Lighting
Choose from Delayed remote, Quick-
response remote, and Remote mirror-up
modes for remote control photography
using the optional ML-L3 remote control
Remote control mode (ML-L3)
Press 1 or 3 to adjust monitor brightness
for live view. Changes to monitor
brightness have no effect on photographs
recorded with the camera.
Monitor brightness
x
157
The Live View Display: Live View Photography
w e
q
r
t
Item
Description
0
The amount of time remaining before live view ends
automatically. Displayed if shooting will end in 30 s or less.
Time remaining
q
Autofocus mode
AF-area mode
The current autofocus mode.
The current AF-area mode.
w
e
The current focus point. The display varies with the option
selected for AF-area mode.
Indicates whether the photograph would be under- or
overexposed at current settings (mode M only).
Focus point
r
t
Exposure indicator
Note: Display shown with all indicators lit for illustrative purposes.
x
A Exposure
Depending on the scene, exposure may differ from that which would be obtained when live
view is not used. Metering in live view is adjusted to suit the live view display, producing
photographs with exposure close to what is seen in the monitor. In P, S, A, M, and % modes,
under –3 EV can not be previewed in the monitor.
A See Also
158
The Information Display: Live View Photography
To hide or display indicators in the monitor during live view photography, press the
R button.
Information on
Information off
Virtual horizon
Framing guides
Manual Focus
ring until the subject is in focus.
To magnify the view in the monitor up to about 19× for precise
focus, press the X (T) button. While the view through the
lens is zoomed in, a navigation window will appear in a gray
frame at the bottom right corner of the display. Use the multi
selector to scroll to areas of the frame not visible in the monitor
(available only if wide- or normal-area AF is selected for AF-
area mode), or press W (S) to zoom out.
x
X (T) button
Navigation window
159
A Non-CPU Lenses
When using non-CPU lenses, be sure to enter the focal length and maximum aperture using
D The Live View Display
Although they will not appear in the final picture, jagged edges, color fringing, moire, and
bright spots may appear in the monitor, while bright bands may appear in some areas with
flashing signs and other intermittent light sources or if the subject is briefly illuminated by a
flash or other bright, momentary light source. In addition, distortion may occur if the camera
is panned horizontally or an object moves at high speed through the frame. Flicker and
banding visible in the monitor under fluorescent, mercury vapor, or sodium lamps can be
photograph at some shutter speeds. When shooting in live view mode, avoid pointing the
camera at the sun or other strong light sources. Failure to observe this precaution could
result in damage to the camera’s internal circuitry.
D The Count Down Display
turns red if live view is about to end to protect the internal circuits or, if an option other than
before the monitor is due to turn off automatically). Depending on shooting conditions, the
timer may appear immediately when live view is selected. Note that although the count
down does not appear during playback, live view will still end automatically when the timer
expires.
A HDMI
If the camera is attached to an HDMI video device during live view photography, the camera
monitor will remain on and the video device will display the view through the lens. If the
device supports HDMI-CEC, select Off for the HDMI > Device control option in the setup
x
160
Movie Live View
y
Movies can be recorded in live view.
1 Rotate the live view selector to 1 (movie live view).
Live view selector
2 Press the a button.
The mirror will be raised and the view through the lens will
be displayed in the camera monitor as it would appear in
the actual movie, modified for the effects of exposure. The
subject will no longer be visible in the viewfinder.
a button
A The 0 Icon
A Before Recording
y
161
5 Focus.
Frame the opening shot and focus as described in Steps 3
subjects that can be detected in face-priority AF drops in movie live view.
A Exposure
The following settings can be adjusted in movie live view:
Aperture
—
Shutter speed
ISO sensitivity
Exposure compensation
P, S, A, %
—
—
✔
M
—
✔
✔
—
Other shooting
modes
—
—
—
—
In mode M, ISO sensitivity can be set to values between 100 and Hi 2 and shutter speed
to values between 1/25 s and 1/8000 s (the slowest available shutter speed varies with
automatically. If the result is over- or under-exposed, exit and restart movie live view.
6 Start recording.
Press the movie-record button to start recording. A
recording indicator and the time available are displayed
in the monitor. Exposure is set using matrix metering and
(in modes P, S, A, and %) altered by up to 3 EV in steps of
1/3 EV by pressing the E button and rotating the main
locked by pressing the shutter-release button halfway.
Movie-record button
Recording indicator
Time remaining
y
162
7 End recording.
Press the movie-record button again to end recording.
Recording will end automatically when the maximum
length is reached, or the memory card is full.
A Maximum Length
The maximum length for individual movie files is 4 GB (for maximum recording times,
A Taking Photographs
To take a photograph while recording is in progress, press the shutter-release button
all the way down (if desired, shooting information display can be assigned to the Fn,
depth-of-field preview,or A AE-L/AF-L button and the button used to display camera
footage recorded to that point will be saved) and the camera will return to live view.
The photograph will be recorded at the current image area setting using a crop with
an aspect ratio of 16 : 9. Photos will be taken with the flash off. Note that the exposure
for photographs can not be previewed during movie live view; mode P, S, or A is
recommended, but accurate results can be achieved in mode M by using the Fn, depth-
and checking the exposure indicator. Exposure compensation for the photograph can
be set to values between –5 and +5 EV, but only values between –3 and +3 can be
D The Count-Down Display
Depending on shooting conditions, the timer may appear immediately when movie
recording begins. Note that regardless of the amount of recording time available, live
view will still end automatically when the timer expires. Wait for the internal circuits to
cool before resuming movie recording.
8 Exit live view mode.
Press the a button to exit live view mode.
y
163
Using the P Button
The options listed below can be accessed by
pressing the P button before recording begins in
movie live view (pressing the P button while
recording is in progress has no effect). Highlight
items using the multi selector and press 2 to view
options for the highlighted item. After choosing
the desired setting, press J to exit.
P button
Option
Description
Choose from the DX (24×16) and 1.3×
Image area
Set Picture Control
Monitor brightness
Press 1 or 3 to adjust monitor brightness
for movie live view. Changes to monitor
brightness have no effect on movies
recorded with the camera.
Frame size/frame rate
Movie quality
Press 1 or 3 to adjust microphone
microphone and optional ME-1 stereo
microphones are affected.
Microphone
When two memory cards are inserted, you can choose the card to
y
Destination
Displayed only when third-party
headphones are plugged into the
headphone connector. Press 1 or 3 to
Headphone volume
164
The Live View Display: Movie Live View
t y
q
w
e
r
Item
Description
0
—
“No movie” icon
Headphone volume
Microphone sensitivity Microphone sensitivity for movie recording.
Indicates that movies can not be recorded.
Volume of audio output to headphones.
q
w
e
Sound level
r
high; adjust microphone sensitivity accordingly.
The recording time available for movies.
The frame size for movie recording.
Time remaining
(movie live view)
Movie frame size
t
y
y
A Using an External Microphone
The optional ME-1 stereo microphone can be used to reduce noise caused by lens vibration
being recorded during autofocus.
A Headphones
Third-party headphones can be used. Note that high sound levels may result in high
volume; particular care should be taken when headphones are used.
165
The Information Display: Movie Live View
To hide or display indicators in the monitor during movie live view, press the R
button.
Information on
Information off
Virtual horizon
Framing guides
y
A See Also
Frame size, microphone sensitivity, and card slot options are also available in the Movie
roles played by the J, Fn, depth-of-field preview, and A AE-L/AF-L buttons can be chosen
three options also allow you to lock exposure without having to keep a button pressed).
button can be used to start movie live view or to start and end movie recording.
166
Image Area
16 : 9. Selecting 1.3× (18×12), however, reduces the angle of view and increases the
apparent focal length of the lens. A c icon is displayed when 1.3× (18×12) is
selected.
DX (24×16)
1.3× (18×12)
A Movie Live View Photographs
The following table shows the size of photographs taken in movie live view:
Image area
Size/image quality option
Large
Size (pixels)
6000 × 3368
4496 × 2528
2992 × 1680
4800 × 2696
3600 × 2024
2400 × 1344
Print size (cm/in.) *
50.8 × 28.5/20.0 × 11.2
38.1 × 21.4/15.0 × 8.4
25.3 × 14.2/10.0 × 5.6
40.6 × 22.8/16.0 × 9.0
30.5 × 17.1/12.0 × 6.7
20.3 × 11.4/ 8.0 × 4.5
y
DX (24×16)
Medium
Small
Large
Medium
Small
1.3× (18×12)
* Approximate size when printed at 300 dpi. Print size in inches equals image size in pixels
divided by printer resolution in dots per inch (dpi; 1 inch = approximately 2.54 cm).
Image quality is determined by the option selected for Image quality in the shooting menu
167
A HDMI
both in the camera monitor and on the HDMI device. Indicators in the monitor and on the
HDMI device can be hidden or displayed using the R button. To use live view when the
camera is connected to an HDMI-CEC device, select Off for HDMI > Device control in the
50p is selected for Frame size/frame rate, the monitor will turn off when the camera is
connected to an HDMI video device.
A Remote Movie Recording
shutter-release buttons on optional remote cords or optional wireless remote controllers
D Recording Movies
Flicker, banding, or distortion may be visible in the monitor and in the final movie under
fluorescent, mercury vapor, or sodium lamps or if the camera is panned horizontally or an
object moves at high speed through frame (for information on reducing flicker and banding,
also appear. Bright bands may appear in some areas of the frame with flashing signs and
other intermittent light sources or if the subject is briefly illuminated by a flash or other
bright, momentary light source. When recording movies, avoid pointing the camera at the
sun or other strong light sources. Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage
to the camera’s internal circuitry. Note that noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or
lines) and unexpected colors may appear if you zoom in on the view through the lens
The camera can record both video and sound; do not cover the microphone during
recording. Note that the built-in microphone may record lens noise during autofocus and
vibration reduction.
Flash lighting can not be used during movie live view.
Recording ends automatically if the lens is removed or the mode dial is rotated.
Live view may end automatically to prevent damage to the camera’s internal circuits; exit live
view when the camera is not in use. Note that the temperature of the camera’s internal
circuits may rise and noise (bright spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels, or fog) may be
displayed in the following instances (the camera may also become noticeably warm, but this
does not indicate a malfunction):
y
• The ambient temperature is high
• The camera has been used for extended periods in live view or to record movies
• The camera has been used in continuous release mode for extended periods
If live view does not start when you attempt to start live view or movie recording, wait for the
internal circuits to cool and then try again.
168
Movie Settings
Use the Movie settings option in the shooting menu to adjust the following settings.
•
Frame size/frame rate, Movie quality: Choose from the following options:
Frame size/frame rate
Movie quality
Maximum bit rate (Mbps)
(★high quality/Normal)
Maximum length
(★high quality/Normal)
Frame size (pixels)
Frame rate *
v/8
w/9
o/1
p/2
q/3
r/4
s/5
1920 × 1080
1920 × 1080
1920 × 1080
1920 × 1080
1920 × 1080
1280 × 720
1280 × 720
60i
50i
30p
25p
24p
60p
50p
20 min./
29 min. 59 s
24/12
* Listed value. Actual frame rates for 60p, 50p, 30p, 25p, and 24p are 59.94, 50, 29.97, 25, and 23.976 fps
respectively.
•
•
Microphone: Turn the built-in or optional ME-1 stereo microphones on or off or
adjust microphone sensitivity. Choose Auto sensitivity to adjust sensitivity
automatically, Microphone off to turn sound recording off; to select microphone
sensitivity manually, select Manual sensitivity and choose a sensitivity.
Destination: Choose the slot to which movies are recorded. The
menu shows the time available on each card; recording ends
automatically when no time remains.
y
A Frame Size/Frame Rate
Settings of 1920×1080; 60i and 1920×1080; 50i are not available for Movie settings >
Frame size/frame rate when DX (24×16) is selected for Image area in the shooting menu
(24×16) for Image area when either of these options is in effect resets Frame size/frame
rate to 1920×1080; 30p (if 1920×1080; 60i is selected) or to 1920×1080; 25p (if
1920×1080; 50i is selected).
169
1 Select Movie settings.
Press the G button to display the menus.
Highlight Movie settings in the shooting
menu and press 2.
G button
2 Choose movie options.
Highlight the desired item and press 2, then
highlight an option and press J.
y
D Frame Size and Rate
Frame size and rate affects the distribution and amount of noise (randomly-spaced bright
pixels, fog, or bright spots).
170
Viewing Movies
playback.
1 icon
Length
Current position/total length
Movie progress bar
The following operations can be performed:
Volume
Guide
To
Use
Description
Pause
Pause playback.
Resume playback when movie is paused or during rewind/
advance.
Play
J
Speed increases with each press, from
2× to 4× to 8× to 16×; keep pressed to
Rewind/
advance
skip to beginning or end of movie (first frame is indicated by h
in top right corner of monitor, last frame by i). If playback is
paused, movie rewinds or advances one frame at a time; keep
pressed for continuous rewind or advance.
Skip 10 s
Rotate the main command dial to skip ahead or back 10 s.
Rotate the sub-command dial to skip to the last or first frame.
Skip ahead/
back
(T)/
W (S)
X
Adjust volume
Trim movie
Press (T) to increase volume, W (S) to decrease.
X
P
Exit to full-frame playback.
Exit
/K
y
Return to
shooting mode
Press the shutter-release button halfway to exit to shooting
mode.
171
A The 2 Icon
2 is displayed in full-frame and movie playback if the movie was
recorded without sound.
y
172
Editing Movies
Trim footage to create edited copies of movies or save selected frames as JPEG stills.
Option
Description
Create a copy from which the opening or closing footage has been
removed.
9
4
Choose start/end point
Save selected frame
Save a selected frame as a JPEG still.
Trimming Movies
To create trimmed copies of movies:
1 Display a movie full frame.
Press the K button to display pictures full
frame in the monitor and press 4 and 2 to
scroll through pictures until the movie you
wish to edit is displayed.
K button
2 Choose a starting or end point.
Play the movie back as described on page
playback and 3 to pause and pressing 4 or
2 or rotating the main or sub-command
Your approximate position in the movie can
be ascertained from the movie progress bar.
Movie progress bar
3 Display movie edit options.
Press the P button to display movie edit
options.
y
P button
173
4 Select Choose start/end point.
Highlight Choose start/end point and press
J.
The dialog shown at right will be displayed;
choose whether the current frame will be
the starting or end point of the copy and
press J.
5 Delete frames.
If the desired frame is not currently
displayed, press 4 or 2 to advance or
rewind (to skip to 10 s ahead or back, rotate
the main command dial; to skip to the first or
last frame, rotate the sub-command dial). To
switch the current selection from start point
L (U) button
(w) to end point (x) or vice versa, press L (U).
Once you have selected the start point and/or end point,
press 1. All frames before the selected start point and
after the selected end point will be removed from the
copy.
6 Save the copy.
Highlight one of the following and press J:
•
•
Save as new file: Save the copy to a new file.
Overwrite existing file: Replace the original
movie file with the edited copy.
Cancel: Return to Step 5.
•
•
Preview: Preview the copy.
y
Edited copies are indicated by a 9 icon in full-frame playback.
174
A Trimming Movies
Movies must be at least two seconds long. If a copy can not be created at the current
playback position, the current position will be displayed in red in Step 5 and no copy will be
created. The copy will not be saved if there is insufficient space available on the memory
card.
Copies have the same time and date of creation as the original.
A The Retouch Menu
Movies can also be edited using the Edit movie option in the retouch
y
175
Saving Selected Frames
To save a copy of a selected frame as a JPEG still:
1 View the movie and choose a frame.
Play the movie back as described on page
171; your approximate position in the movie
can be ascertained from the movie progress
bar. Press 4 or 2 to rewind or advance and
press 3 to pause the movie at the frame you
intend to copy.
2 Display movie edit options.
Press the P button to display movie edit
options.
P button
3 Choose Save selected frame.
Highlight Save selected frame and press J.
4 Create a still copy.
Press 1 to create a still copy of the current
frame.
5 Save the copy.
Highlight Yes and press J to create a fine-
frame. Movie stills are indicated by a 9 icon
in full-frame playback.
y
A Save Selected Frame
JPEG movie stills created with the Save selected frame option can not be retouched. JPEG
176
Special Effects
%
Special effects can be used when recording images.
Shooting with Special Effects
To view the currently selected special effect mode, rotate the mode dial to q and
press the R button. To choose another special effect mode, rotate the main
command dial.
Mode dial
Main command dial
Monitor
A NEF (RAW)
If NEF (RAW) + JPEG is selected for image quality in %, g, i, or u mode, only the JPEG
be recorded instead of NEF (RAW) images.
%
A Continuous Release Modes
When g or i is selected, the frame rate for continuous release will drop. If the memory
buffer fills, the camera will display a message indicating that recording is in progress and
shooting will be suspended until the message clears from the display.
A The Retouch Menu
the retouch menu can be used to apply these effects to existing pictures.
177
%Night Vision
Use under conditions of darkness to
record monochrome images at high ISO
sensitivities (with some noise in the form
of randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or
lines). Manual focus can be used if the
camera is unable to focus using autofocus.
The built-in flash turns off; use of a tripod
is recommended to reduce blur. During
viewfinder photography, the built-in AF-
assist illuminator will light to assist the
focus operation; to disable the illuminator,
select Off for Custom Setting a7 (Built-in
g Color Sketch
The camera detects and colors outlines for
a color sketch effect. Movies shot in this
mode play back like a slide show made up
of a series of stills. The effect can be
the display refresh rate drops when live
view is in effect and that the frame rate
drops in continuous release modes.
Autofocus is not available during movie
recording.
iMiniature Effect
Distant subjects appear as miniatures.
Miniature effect movies play back at high
speed, compressing 30 to 45 minutes of
footage shot at 1920 × 1080/30p into a
movie that plays back in about 3 minutes.
The effect can be chosen during live view
drops when live view is in effect and that
the frame rate drops in continuous release
modes. Sound is not recorded with
movies; autofocus is not available during
movie recording. The built-in flash and
AF-assist illuminator turn off; use of a
tripod is recommended when lighting is
poor.
%
178
u Selective Color
1 Silhouette
2 High Key
All colors other than the selected colors
are recorded in black and white. The
effect can be chosen during live view
a tripod is recommended when lighting is
poor.
Silhouette subjects against bright
backgrounds. The built-in flash turns off;
use of a tripod is recommended when
lighting is poor.
Use with bright scenes to create bright
images that seem filled with light. The
built-in flash turns off.
3 Low Key
Use with dark scenes to create dark,
somber images with prominent
highlights. The built-in flash turns off; use
of a tripod is recommended when lighting
is poor.
%
179
Options Available in Live View
❚❚gColor Sketch
1 Press the a button.
The mirror will be raised and the view through
the lens will be displayed in the camera
monitor.
a button
2 Adjust options.
Press J to display the options shown at right
(note that the options temporarily clear from
the display during autofocus). Press 1 or 3 to
highlight Vividness or Outlines and press 4
or 2 to change. Vividness can be increased to
make colors more saturated, or decreased for a washed-out, monochromatic
effect, while outlines can be made thicker or thinner. Increasing the thickness
of the lines also makes colors more saturated. Press J to exit when settings are
complete. To exit live view, press the a button again. The selected settings will
continue in effect and will apply to photographs taken using the viewfinder.
%
180
❚❚iMiniature Effect
1 Press the a button.
The mirror will be raised and the view through
the lens will be displayed in the camera
monitor.
a button
2 Position the focus point.
Use the multi selector to position the focus
point in the area that will be in focus and then
press the shutter-release button halfway to
focus (note that the options temporarily clear
from the display during autofocus). To
temporarily clear miniature effect options from the display and enlarge the
view in the monitor for precise focus, press X (T). Press W (S) to restore
the miniature effect display.
3 Display options.
Press J to display miniature effect options.
4 Adjust options.
Press 4 or 2 to choose the orientation of the
area that will be in focus and press 1 or 3 to
adjust its width.
5 Return to the live view display.
Press J to return to live view. To exit live view, press the a button again. The
selected settings will continue in effect and will apply to photographs taken
using the viewfinder.
%
181
❚❚uSelective Color
1 Press the a button.
The mirror will be raised and the view through
the lens will be displayed in the camera
monitor.
a button
2 Display options.
Press J to display selective color options.
Selected color
3 Select a color.
Frame an object in the white square in the
center of the display and press 1 to choose the
color of the object as one that will remain in
the final image (the camera may have difficulty
detecting unsaturated colors; choose a
saturated color). To zoom in on the center of
the display for more precise color selection, press X (T). Press W (S) to
zoom out.
Color range
4 Choose the color range.
Press 1 or 3 to increase or decrease the range
of similar hues that will be included in the final
image. Choose from values between 1 and 7;
note that higher values may include hues from
other colors.
5 Select additional colors.
%
To select additional colors, rotate the main
command dial to highlight another of the 3
color boxes at the top of the display and repeat
Steps 3 and 4 to select another color. Repeat
for a third color if desired. To deselect the
highlighted color, press O/Q (To remove all colors, press and hold O/Q. A
confirmation dialog will be displayed; select Yes).
182
6 Return to the live view display.
Press J to return to live view. During shooting, only objects of the selected
hues will be recorded in color; all others will be recorded in black-and-white. To
exit live view, press the a button again. The selected settings will continue in
effect and will apply to photographs taken using the viewfinder.
%
183
%
184
More on Playback
I
Full-Frame Playback
To play photographs back, press the K button.
The most recent photograph will be displayed in
the monitor.
K button
Multi selector
Sub-command dial
O (Q) button
K button
G button
L (U) button
X (T) button
W (S) button
P button
J button
Main command dial
A Rotate Tall
To display “tall” (portrait-orientation) photographs in tall orientation,
I
A Image Review
automatically displayed in the monitor for about 4 s after shooting (because the camera is
already in the correct orientation, images are not rotated automatically during image
review). In continuous release mode, display begins when shooting ends, with the first
photograph in the current series displayed.
185
To
Use
Description
View additional
photographs
Press 2 to view photographs in order recorded, 4 to view
photographs in reverse order.
View photo
information
Press 1 or 3 to view information about current photograph
View thumbnails
Zoom in on
photograph
Confirmation dialog will be displayed. Press O (Q) again to
delete photo.
Delete images
O (Q)
Change protect
status
To protect image, or to remove protection from protected
L (U)
Return to
shooting mode
Monitor will turn off. Photographs can be taken
immediately.
/
K
Retouch photo or
trim movie
Create retouched or trimmed copy of current photograph or
P
If current picture is marked with 1 icon to show that it is a
Play movie
J
A Choosing a Memory Card Slot
If two memory cards are inserted, you can select a card for
playback by holding the D button and pressing 1 during full-
frame or thumbnail playback. The dialog shown at right will be
displayed; highlight the desired slot and press 2 to list the folders
on the selected card, then highlight a folder and press J to view
the pictures in the highlighted folder. The same procedure can be
used when selecting pictures for operations in the playback
D button
A See Also
For information on choosing how long the monitor will remain on when no operations are
command dials to view additional photographs or photo information, see Custom Setting f5
I
186
Photo Information
Photo information is superimposed on images displayed in full-frame playback.
Press 1 or 3 to cycle through photo information as shown below. Note that “image
only”, shooting data, RGB histograms, highlights, and overview data are only
GPS data are only displayed if a GPS unit was used when the photo was taken.
NIKON D7100
1
/
12
1
/12
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
L
L
A
T I T
U
D
U
E
N
E
.
35
º
º
35 971
‘
‘
ONG I T
D
E
)
.
139
35
43 696
ALMT I TUD
E
C
T I
E
(
U
T
15
/
m10
/
2012
.
1
125 F5
0,
6
100
85mm
:
:
01 15 00
0
_
.
N
OR
M
AL
100
10
D
7100
D
S
C_0001. JP
G
M
AL
15
/
2012 10 02 28
6000x4000
15
/
/2012 10 02 28
600N0Ox4R000
NIKON D7100
100
10
D
/
7100
D
S
C
:
0001 JP
G
:
:
:
-
100 1
File information
None (image only)
Overview
GPS data
-
1
100
.
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
.
F5
M
TR, SP
D
D
,
A
P
,
1
1
/
125
,
6
.
EXP
M
O
E, I S
O
H
,
00
,
.
+
1
0
0
/
/
6
1
F
O
CA
L
LENG
T
85mm
85
.
LE
N
S
/
4
A
F
VR
S
FL
SY
,
A
N
S
C
HMTYPE
O
DE
-
1
Highlights
100
Highlights
RGB
Select R, G, B
RGB
Select R, G, B
-
100 1
NIKON D7100
Highlights
RGB histogram
Shooting data
❚❚File Information
Protect status ................................................... 196
Retouch indicator ........................................... 273
Frame number/total number of frames
1
2
3
4
5
1
/12
Image quality ......................................................66
Image size.............................................................68
Image area............................................................63
Folder name...................................................... 225
File name............................................................ 226
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
_
.
N
OR
M
AL
100
10
D
/
7100
D
S
C
:
0001 JP
G
:
6000x4000
15
/
2012 10 02 28
2 If photograph was taken using AF-S or with single-servo autofocus selected during AF-A, display shows
point where focus first locked. If photograph was taken using AF-C or with continuous-servo autofocus
selected during AF-A, focus point is only displayed if option other than auto-area AF was selected for AF-
area mode and camera was able to focus.
I
187
❚❚Highlights
Image highlights *
Folder number—frame number ............... 225
Current channel *
1
2
3
-
100
1
Highlights
RGB
Select R, G, B
*
Flashing areas indicate highlights (areas that may be overexposed) for the
current channel. Hold W (S) button and press 4 or 2 to cycle through
channels as follows:
RGB
R
G
B
(all channels)
(red)
(green)
(blue)
W (S) button
❚❚RGB Histogram
White balance .....................................................89
Color temperature..........................................94
White balance fine-tuning ..........................91
Preset manual ..................................................95
Current channel *
Histogram (RGB channel). In all histograms,
horizontal axis gives pixel brightness,
vertical axis number of pixels.
3
4
5
-
Highlights
100
1
RGB
Select R, G, B
Histogram (red channel)
Histogram (green channel)
Histogram (blue channel)
6
7
8
Image highlights *
1
2
*
Flashing areas indicate highlights (areas that may be overexposed) for the
current channel. Hold W (S) button and press 4 or 2 to cycle through
channels as follows:
RGB
R
G
B
(all channels)
(red)
(green)
(blue)
Highlight display off
W (S) button
I
188
A Playback Zoom
To zoom in on the photograph when the histogram is
displayed, press X (T). Use the X (T) and W (S)
buttons to zoom in and out and scroll the image with the
multi selector. The histogram will be updated to show only
the data for the portion of the image visible in the monitor.
A Histograms
Camera histograms are intended as a guide only and may differ from those displayed in
imaging applications. Some sample histograms are shown below:
If the image contains objects with a wide range of
brightnesses, the distribution of tones will be relatively
even.
If the image is dark, tone distribution will be shifted to the
left.
If the image is bright, tone distribution will be shifted to
the right.
Increasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution of tones to the right, while
decreasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution to the left. Histograms can
provide a rough idea of overall exposure when bright ambient lighting makes it difficult to
see photographs in the monitor.
I
189
❚❚Shooting Data
Exposure compensation..................................86
3
.
:
:
.
4000 , F2
M
TR, SP
D
D
,
A
P
, 1
/
8
.
.
EXP
M
O
E, I S
O
H
,
.
H
i 0 3,
+
:
+
1mm3,
5
/
/
6
1
4
5
6
:
F
O
CA
L
LENG
T
85
85
S
:
.
LE
N
S
/
4
Lens data............................................................ 149
:
-
O
A
F
VR
/
VR
n
:
-
FL
SY
,
A
N
S
C
HMTYPE
Bu i l t W i n,
C
3
M
.
D
0
:
O
:
D
E
SL
O
:
+
.
:
:
+
Lens VR (vibration reduction) 3
M
B
TTL,
3
E
0
A
C
TTL,
---
:
---
Flash mode........................................................ 120
Flash compensation....................................... 124
Camera name
Image area............................................................63
Folder number—frame number ............... 225
White balance .....................................................89
Color temperature..........................................94
White balance fine-tuning ..........................91
Preset manual ..................................................95
Color space........................................................ 227
7
-
1
NIKON D7100
100
100
100
100
8
9
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
H
I TE
B
A
L
A
N
E
C
A
U
T
G
A
O
B
N
1, 0,
0
C
WO
L
O
T
I
R
U
C
SPAC
sR
ST
0
P I
C
RE
K
C
TRL
DA
R
D
10
11
12
13
QU
AD
J
U
ST
S
HARPE
N
I
NG
3
C
ONTR
A
T
ST
ESS
T I ON
0
BR I
G
U
H
R
N
0
S
A
U
T
E
A
0
H
0
-
1
-
1
-
1
NIKON D7100
14
15
16
.
:
:
:
:
NO I SE RE
D
U
G
C
H
H
I
I S
O
L
,
NO
R
M
.
-
.
T
AC
HD
T
D
L I
NO
R
A
R
A
D
U
TM
O
-
RETOUCH
L I
R
G
H
T I NG
Sharpening........................................................ 108
A
F I LTER
C
WY
A
MNOTYPE
TR I
:
.
ME
C
O
MM
E
N
T
SPRMI NG HA
S
C
O
17
18
19
20
Brightness.......................................................... 108
N
I
KO
N
D7100
Long exposure noise reduction................. 228
Active D-Lighting............................................ 113
HDR strength.................................................... 115
Retouch history ............................................... 273
Image comment.............................................. 266
:
:
A
RT I ST
PYR I
N
N
I KON
I KON
T
A
R
O
21
22
C
O
GHT
23
24
25
26
27
28
NIKON D7100
Metering................................................................83
1
2
I
190
1
2
Displayed in red if photo was taken with auto ISO sensitivity control on.
than zero for any metering method.
3
4
5
6
7
8
Displayed only if VR lens is attached.
Standard, Vivid, Portrait, and Landscape Picture Controls only.
Neutral, Monochrome, and custom Picture Controls.
Not displayed with monochrome Picture Controls.
Monochrome Picture Controls only.
The fourth page of the shooting data is only displayed if copyright information was recorded with the
❚❚GPS Data *
Latitude
Longitude
Altitude
1
2
3
4
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
L
L
A
T I T
U
D
U
E
N
E
.
35
º
º
35 971
‘
‘
ONG I T
D
E
)
.
139
35
43 696
Coordinated Universal Time (UTC)
ALMT I TUD
E
C
T I E (
U
T
15
/
m10
/
2012
:
:
01 15 00
-
1
NIKON D7100
100
*
Data for movies are for start of recording.
I
191
❚❚Overview Data
NIKON D7100
1
/12
.
.
1 4000 F2 8
H
i 0 3
85mm
+
.
–
1. 3
1 0
SLOW
.
.
1 4000 F2 8
H
i 0 3
85mm
0,
0
+
.
–
1. 3
1 0
SLOW
0,
0
_
.
100
10
D
/
7100
D
S
C
:
0001 JP
G
M
AL
600N0Ox4R000
:
15
/
2012 10 02 28
Frame number/total number of images
Camera name
Histogram showing the distribution of
Image comment indicator........................... 266
Active D-Lighting............................................ 113
Color space........................................................ 227
Flash mode........................................................ 120
White balance .....................................................89
Color temperature..........................................94
White balance fine-tuning ..........................91
Preset manual ..................................................95
Flash compensation....................................... 124
Exposure compensation..................................86
1
2
3
4
5
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Image quality.......................................................66
6
7
8
Image size .............................................................68
Metering................................................................83
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
27
28
*
Displayed in red if photo was taken with auto ISO sensitivity control on.
I
192
Thumbnail Playback
To display images in “contact sheets” of four, nine, or 72 images, press the W (S)
button.
W (S)
W (S)
X (T)
X (T)
Full-frame
playback
Thumbnail playback
Calendar
playback
To
Use
Description
Press W (S) to increase the number of images
displayed.
Display more images
W (S)
Press X (T) to reduce the number of images
X (T) displayed. When four images are displayed, press to
view highlighted image full frame.
Display fewer images
Use multi selector to highlight images for full-frame
Highlight images
View highlighted image
J
Press J to display the highlighted image full frame.
Delete highlighted
image
O (Q)
Change protect status of
highlighted image
Monitor will turn off. Photographs can be taken
Return to shooting
mode
/
K
immediately.
Retouch photo or trim
movie
Create retouched or trimmed copy of current
P
I
193
Calendar Playback
To view images taken on a selected date, press the W (S) button when 72 images
are displayed.
Date list
W (S)
W (S)
X (T)
X (T)
Thumbnail list
Full-frame
playback
Thumbnail playback
Calendar playback
The operations can be performed depend on whether the cursor is in the date list or
the thumbnail list:
To
Use
Description
Toggle between date
list and thumbnail list
Exit to thumbnail
playback/Zoom in on X (T)
highlighted photo
Press W (S) or J button in date list to place cursor in
thumbnail list. Press W (S) again to return to date list.
W (S)/J
•
•
Date list: Exit to 72-frame playback.
Thumbnail list: Press and hold X (T) button to zoom
in on highlighted picture.
Highlight dates/
Highlight images
•
•
Date list: Highlight date.
Thumbnail list: Highlight picture.
Toggle full frame
J
•
Thumbnail list: View highlighted picture.
playback
Delete highlighted
•
•
Date list: Delete all pictures taken on selected date.
O (Q)
photo(s)
Change protect
photo
Return to shooting
mode
Monitor will turn off. Photographs can be taken
immediately.
/
K
Retouch photo or
trim movie
Create retouched or trimmed copy of photograph or
P
I
194
Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom
Press the X (T) button to zoom in on the image displayed in full-frame playback
or on the image currently highlighted in thumbnail playback. The following
operations can be performed while zoom is in effect:
To
Use
Description
Press X (T) to zoom in to maximum
of approximately 38× (large images in
24 × 16/DX format), 28× (medium
X (T)/
W (S)
Zoom in or out
images) or 19× (small images). Press
W (S) to zoom out. While photo is
zoomed in, use multi selector to view
areas of image not visible in monitor.
Keep multi selector pressed to scroll rapidly to other areas of
frame. Navigation window is displayed when zoom ratio is
altered; area currently visible in monitor is indicated by yellow
border.
View other
areas of image
Faces (up to 35) detected during zoom
are indicated by white borders in
navigation window. Rotate sub-
command dial to view other faces.
Select faces
Rotate main command dial to view same location in other
photos at current zoom ratio. Playback zoom is cancelled
when a movie is displayed.
View other
images
Changeprotect
status
Return to
shooting mode
/
Monitor will turn off. Photographs can be taken immediately.
K
Retouch photo
P
I
195
Protecting Photographs from Deletion
In full-frame, zoom, thumbnail, and calendar playback, the L (U) button can be
used to protect photographs from accidental deletion. Protected files can not be
deleted using the O (Q) button or the Delete option in the playback menu. Note
262).
To protect a photograph:
1 Select an image.
Display the image in full-frame playback or playback zoom or highlight it in the
thumbnail list in thumbnail or calendar playback.
Full-frame playback
Thumbnail playback
Calendar playback
2 Press the L (U) button.
The photograph will be marked with a P
icon. To remove protection from the
photograph so that it can be deleted, display
the photograph or highlight it in the
thumbnail list and then press the L (U)
button.
L (U) button
I
A Removing Protection from All Images
To remove protection from all images in the folder or folders currently selected in the
Playback folder menu, press the L (U) and O (Q) buttons together for about two
seconds during playback.
196
Deleting Photographs
To delete the photograph displayed in full-frame playback or highlighted in the
thumbnail list, press the O (Q) button. To delete multiple selected photographs, all
photographs taken on a selected date, or all photographs in the current playback
folder, use the Delete option in the playback menu. Once deleted, photographs can
not be recovered. Note that pictures that are protected or hidden can not be deleted.
Full-Frame, Thumbnail, and Calendar Playback
Press the O (Q) button to delete the current photograph.
1 Select an image.
Display the image or highlight it in the thumbnail list in thumbnail or calendar
playback.
2 Press the O (Q) button.
A confirmation dialog will be displayed.
O (Q) button
Full-frame playback Thumbnail playback
Calendar playback
(thumbnail list)
3 Press the O (Q) button again.
To delete the photograph, press the O (Q) button. To exit
without deleting the photograph, press the K button.
O (Q) button
I
A Calendar Playback
During calendar playback, you can delete all photographs taken on a selected date by
A See Also
The After delete option in the playback menu determines whether the next image or the
197
The Playback Menu
The Delete option in the playback menu contains the following options. Note that
depending on the number of images, some time may be required for deletion.
Option
Description
Q Selected
Delete selected pictures.
Delete all pictures in the folder currently selected for
R All
select the card from which pictures will be deleted.
❚❚Selected: Deleting Selected Photographs
1 Choose Selected for the Delete option
in the playback menu.
Press the G button and select Delete in
the playback menu. Highlight Selected and
press 2.
G button
2 Highlight a picture.
Use the multi selector to highlight a picture
(to view the highlighted picture full screen,
press and hold the X (T) button; to view
images in other locations, hold the D
button, press 1, and select the desired card
and folder as described on page 186).
3 Select the highlighted picture.
Press the W (S) button to select the
highlighted picture. Selected pictures are
marked by a O icon. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to
select additional pictures; to deselect a
picture, highlight it and press W (S).
W (S) button
I
198
4 Press J to complete the operation.
A confirmation dialog will be displayed;
highlight Yes and press J.
❚❚Select Date: Deleting Photographs Taken on a Selected Date
1 Choose Select date.
In the delete menu, highlight Select date
and press 2.
2 Highlight a date.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight a date.
To view the pictures taken on the
highlighted date, press W (S). Use the
multi selector to scroll through the pictures,
or press and hold X (T) to view the
current picture full screen. Press W (S) to
return to the date list.
W (S) button
3 Select the highlighted date.
Press 2 to select all pictures taken on the
highlighted date. Selected dates are marked
with a M icon. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to select
additional dates; to deselect a date,
highlight it and press 2.
4 Press J to complete the operation.
A confirmation dialog will be displayed;
highlight Yes and press J.
I
199
I
200
Connections
Q
Installing ViewNX 2
Install the supplied software to display and
edit photographs and movies that have
been copied to your computer. Before
installing ViewNX 2, confirm that your
computer meets the system requirements
version of ViewNX 2, which is available for
download from the websites listed on page
ViewNX 2TM
Your Imaging Toolbox
xxvi, as earlier versions that do not support the D7100 may fail to transfer NEF (RAW)
images correctly.
1 Launch the installer.
Start the computer, insert the ViewNX 2 installer CD,
and launch the installer.
2 Select a language.
q Select region (if required)
If the desired language is not
available, click Region Selection to
choose a different region and then
w Select
language
e Click
choose the desired language (region
selection is not available in the
European release).
Next
3 Start the installer.
Click Install and follow the on-screen instructions.
D Installation Guide
For help installing ViewNX 2, click Installation Guide
in Step 3.
Click Install
Q
201
4 Exit the installer.
Windows
Mac OS
Click Yes
Click OK
The following software is installed:
• ViewNX 2
• Apple QuickTime (Windows only)
5 Remove the installer CD from the CD-ROM drive.
A System Requirements
Windows
Mac OS
• Photos/JPEG movies: Intel Celeron, Pentium 4,
• Photos/JPEG movies: Intel Core or Xeon series
• H.264 movies (playback): Core Duo 2 GHz or
better; Intel Core i5 or better recommended
when viewing movies with a frame size of
1280 × 720 or more at a frame rate of 30 fps
or above or movies with a frame size of
1920 × 1080 or more
or Core series, 1.6 GHz or better
• H.264 movies (playback): 3.0 GHz or better
Pentium D; Intel Core i5 or better
recommended when viewing movies with
a frame size of 1280 × 720 or more at a
frame rate of 30 fps or above or movies
with a frame size of 1920 × 1080 or more
• H.264 movies (editing): 2.6 GHz or better
Core 2 Duo
CPU
• H.264 movies (editing): 2.6 GHz or better
Core 2 Duo
Pre-installed versions of Windows XP,
Windows Vista, Windows 7, and Windows 8;
only 32-bit versions of Windows XP are
supported
OS
Mac OS X version 10.6, 10.7, or 10.8
• Windows 8/Windows 7/Windows Vista: 1 GB or
more (2 GB or more recommended)
• Windows XP: 512 MB or more (2 GB or more
recommended)
RAM
512 MB or more (2 GB or more recommended)
Hard-disk
space
A minimum of 500 MB available on the startup disk (1 GB or more recommended)
Resolution: 1024 × 768 pixels (XGA) or more Resolution: 1024 × 768 pixels (XGA) or more
Q
Monitor (1280 × 1024 pixels (SXGA) or more recommended)
(1280 × 1024 pixels (SXGA) or more recommended)
Color: 24-bit color (True Color) or more
Color: 24-bit color (millions of colors) or more
202
Using ViewNX 2
Copy Pictures to the Computer
Before proceeding, be sure you have installed the software on the supplied ViewNX 2
1 Choose how pictures will be copied to the computer.
Choose one of the following methods:
•
Direct USB connection: Turn the camera off and ensure that the memory card is
inserted in the camera. Connect the camera to the computer using the
supplied UC-E6 USB cable and then turn the camera on.
A Use a Reliable Power Source
To ensure that data transfer is not interrupted, be sure the camera EN-EL15 battery
is fully charged. If in doubt, charge the battery before use or use an EH-5b AC
adapter and EP-5B power connector (available separately).
A USB Hubs
Connect the camera directly to the computer; do not connect the cable via a USB
hub or keyboard.
•
•
SD card slot: If your computer is equipped with an SD card slot, the card can be
inserted directly in the slot.
SD card reader: Connect a card reader (available separately from third-party
suppliers) to the computer and insert the memory card.
2 Start Nikon Transfer 2 component of ViewNX 2.
If a message is displayed prompting you to choose a program, select
Nikon Transfer 2.
A Windows 7
If the following dialog is displayed, select Nikon Transfer 2 as described below.
1 Under Import pictures and videos, click
Change program. A program selection dialog
will be displayed; select Import file using
Nikon Transfer 2 and click OK.
Q
2 Double-click Import file.
203
3 Click Start Transfer.
At default settings, all the pictures on the
memory card will be copied to the computer.
Start Transfer
4 Terminate the connection.
If the camera is connected to the computer, turn the camera off and disconnect
the USB cable. If you are using a card reader or card slot, choose the appropriate
option in the computer operating system to eject the removable disk
corresponding to the memory card and then remove the card from the card
reader or card slot.
View Pictures
Pictures are displayed in ViewNX 2 when transfer is
complete.
A Starting ViewNX 2 Manually
• Windows: Double-click the ViewNX 2 shortcut on
the desktop.
• Mac OS: Click the ViewNX 2 icon in the Dock.
❚❚Retouching Photographs
To crop pictures and perform such tasks as adjusting sharpness
and tone levels, click the Edit button in the ViewNX 2 toolbar.
❚❚Editing Movies
To perform such tasks as trimming unwanted footage from
movies shot with the camera, click the Movie Editor button in
the ViewNX 2 toolbar.
❚❚Printing Pictures
Click the Print button in the ViewNX 2 toolbar. A dialog will be
displayed, allowing you to print pictures on a printer connected
to the computer.
Q
204
A For More Information
Consult online help for more information on using
ViewNX 2.
A Connecting Cables
Be sure the camera is off when connecting or disconnecting interface cables. Do not use
force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle. Close the connector cover when the
connector is not in use.
D During Transfer
Do not turn the camera off or disconnect the USB cable while transfer is in progress.
A Windows
To visit the Nikon website after installing ViewNX 2, select All Programs > Link to Nikon
from the Windows start menu (Internet connection required).
Q
205
Ethernet and Wireless Networks
version 1.4.0 or later (the Wireless Transmitter Utility is supplied with the UT-1; the
latest versions of the UT-1 firmware and Wireless Transmitter Utility can be
UT-1 requires firmware version 1.1 or later (the firmware version can be displayed by
connecting the UT-1 and selecting Network > Options > Firmware version in the
the camera, the UT-1 can be used to upload pictures to a computer or ftp server over
to the UT-1, wireless LANs.
❚❚Available Modes
The following modes are available when the camera is connected to a network using
the UT-1 or the UT-1 and a WT-5 wireless transmitter:
Mode
Function
FTP upload
Image transfer
Upload existing photos and movies to a computer or ftp server, or
upload new photos as they are taken.
Control camera from computer using Camera Control Pro 2
(available separately).
Camera control
For more information, see the documentation provided with the UT-1 and/or WT-5.
Q
206
D Image Upload
When the UT-1 is connected, the P button functions during playback to select pictures for
upload in ftp and image transfer modes. Other playback operations that use the P button,
currently connected to a network. These functions can however be accessed by selecting an
option other than FTP upload or Image transfer for Connection type.
A During Transfer
Movies can not be recorded or played back when the UT-1 is connected and there are either
images remaining to be sent or images currently being transferred via an Ethernet or
wireless network.
A Movies
Movies can be uploaded over Ethernet and wireless networks in transfer mode. Note,
however, that movies can not be uploaded using the Auto send or Send folder features in
the Options menu.
A WT-5 Wireless Transmitters
The principal differences between the the WT-5 and WT-5A/B/C/D/E is in the number of
channels supported; unless otherwise stated, all references to the the WT-5 also apply to the
WT-5A/B/C/D/E.
A Camera Control Pro 2
camera from a computer. When Camera Control Pro 2 is used to capture photographs and
movies directly to the computer, the PC connection indicator (c) will appear in the control
panel.
Q
207
Printing Photographs
directly to the camera.
Connecting the Printer
Connect the camera using the supplied UC-E6 USB cable.
1 Turn the camera off.
2 Connect the USB cable.
Turn the printer on and connect the USB cable as shown. Do not use force or
attempt to insert the connectors at an angle.
D USB Hubs
Connect the camera directly to the printer; do not connect the cable via a USB hub.
3 Turn the camera on.
A welcome screen will be displayed in the monitor,
followed by a PictBridge playback display.
A Printing Via Direct USB Connection
Be sure the EN-EL15 battery is fully charged or use an optional EH-5b AC adapter and EP-5B
power connector. When taking photographs to be printed via direct USB connection, set
D Selecting Photographs for Printing
images can be created using the NEF (RAW) processing option in the retouch menu
Q
A See Also
208
Printing Pictures One at a Time
1 Select a picture.
Press 4 or 2 to view additional pictures. Press the X
press K to exit zoom). To view six pictures at a time, press
the W (S) button. Use the multi selector to highlight pictures, or press X
(T) to display the highlighted picture full frame; to view images in other
locations when thumbnails are displayed, hold the D button, press 1, and
select the desired card and folder as described on page 186.
2 Display printing options.
Press J to display PictBridge printing options.
3 Adjust printing options.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight an option and press 2 to select.
Option
Description
Highlight a page size (only sizes supported by the current printer are listed)
Page size and press J to select and exit to the previous menu (to print at the default
page size for the current printer, select Printer default).
No. of Press 1 or 3 to choose number of copies (maximum 99), then press J to
copies select and return to the previous menu.
This option is available only if supported by the printer. Highlight Printer
default (use current printer settings), Print with border (print photo with
white border), or No border and press J to select and exit to the previous
Border
menu.
Highlight Printer default (use current printer settings), Print time stamp
(print times and dates of recording on photos), or No time stamp and press J
to select and exit to the previous menu.
Time
stamp
This option is available only if supported by the printer. To exit without
cropping, highlight No cropping and press J. To crop the current picture,
highlight Crop and press 2.
Cropping
A crop selection dialog will be displayed; press X (T) to increase the size of
the crop, W (S) to decrease. Position the crop using the multi selector and
press J. Note that print quality may drop if small crops are printed at large
sizes.
4 Start printing.
Q
Select Start printing and press J to start printing. To
cancel before all copies have been printed, press J.
209
Printing Multiple Pictures
1 Display the PictBridge menu.
Press the G button in the PictBridge playback display
G button
2 Choose an option.
Highlight one of the following options and press 2.
•
•
Print select: Select pictures for printing.
Select date: Print one copy of all the pictures taken on a
selected date.
•
•
Print (DPOF): Print an existing print order created with the DPOF print order
displayed in Step 3.
card, proceed to Step 4. Note that if the memory card contains more than
256 pictures, only the first 256 images will be printed.
Q
210
3 Select pictures or choose a date.
If you chose Print select or Print (DPOF) in Step 2, press 4
or 2 to scroll through the pictures on the memory card;
to view images in other locations, hold the D button,
press 1, and select the desired card and folder as
full screen, press and hold the X (T) button. To
select the current picture for printing, press 1. The
picture will be marked with a Z icon and the number of
prints will be set to 1. Press 1 or 3 to specify the
number of prints (up to 99; to deselect the picture,
press 3 when the number of prints is 1). Continue until
all the desired pictures have been selected.
X (T) button: View photo
full screen
If you chose Select date in Step 2, press 1 or 3 to highlight
a date and press 2 to toggle the highlighted date on or
off. To view the pictures taken on the selected date,
press W (S). Use the multi selector to scroll through
the pictures, or press and hold X (T) to view the
current picture full screen. Press W (S) again to
return to the date selection dialog.
X (T) button: View
highlighted photo full screen
W (S) button: View photos
for selected date
Q
211
4 Display printing options.
Press J to display PictBridge printing options.
5 Adjust printing options.
Choose page size, border, and time stamp options as described on page 209 (a
warning will be displayed if the selected page size is too small for an index
print).
6 Start printing.
Select Start printing and press J to start printing. To
cancel before all copies have been printed, press J.
Q
212
Creating a DPOF Print Order: Print Set
The DPOF print order option in the playback menu is used to create digital “print
orders” for PictBridge-compatible printers and devices that support DPOF.
1 Choose Select/set for the DPOF print
order item in the playback menu.
Press the G button and select DPOF print
order in the playback menu. Highlight
Select/set and press 2 (to remove all
photographs from the print order, select
G button
Deselect all?).
2 Select pictures.
Press 4 or 2 to scroll through the pictures
on the memory card (to view images in other
locations, hold the D button and press 1).
To display the current picture in full screen,
press and hold the X (T) button. To
select the current picture for printing, press
1. The picture will be marked with a Z icon
and the number of prints will be set to 1.
Press 1 or 3 to specify the number of prints
(up to 99; to deselect the picture, press 3
when the number of prints is 1). Continue
until all the desired pictures have been
selected.
X (T) button: View photo full screen
3 Display imprint options.
Press J to display data imprint options.
Q
213
4 Select imprint options.
Highlight the following options and press 2
to toggle the highlighted option on or off (to
complete the print order without including
this information, proceed to Step 5).
•
Print shooting data: Print shutter speed and
aperture on all pictures in print order.
•
Print date: Print date of recording on all pictures in print order.
5 Complete the print order.
Press J to complete the print order.
D DPOF Print Order
To print the current print order when the camera is connected to a PictBridge printer, select
Print (DPOF) in the PictBridge menu and follow the steps in “Printing Multiple Pictures” to
not supported when printing via direct USB connection; to print the date of recording on
photographs in the current print order, use the PictBridge Time stamp option.
The DPOF print order option can not be used if there is not enough space on the memory
card to store the print order.
(RAW) images can be created using the NEF (RAW) processing option in the retouch menu
Q
Print orders may not print correctly if images are deleted using a computer or other device
after the print order is created.
214
Viewing Photographs on TV
The camera can be connected to high-defintion video devices using a High-
Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI) cable (available separately from commercial
sources). The cable must have a HDMI mini connector (Type C) for connection to the
camera.
1 Turn the camera off.
Always turn the camera off before connecting or disconnecting an HDMI cable.
2 Connect the HDMI cable as shown.
Connect to high-definition device
(choose cable with connector for
HDMI device)
Connect to camera
3 Tune the device to the HDMI channel.
4 Turn the camera on and press the K button.
During playback, images will be displayed on the television screen.
D Close the Connector Cover
Close the camera connector cover when the connectors are not in use. Foreign matter in the
connectors can interfere with data transfer.
A Television Playback
Use of an EH-5b AC adapter and EP-5B power connector (available separately) is
recommended for extended playback. The TV will display images full screen if photo
visible when photographs are viewed on a television screen.
Q
A Audio
Audio will not be played back over headphones connected to the camera. Volume can be
adjusted using television controls; the camera controls can not be used.
215
❚❚HDMI Options
used to enable the camera for remote control from devices that support HDMI-CEC
(High-Definition Multimedia Interface–Consumer Electronics Control, a standard
that allows HDMI devices to be used to control peripherals to which they are
connected).
Output Resolution
Choose the format for images output to the HDMI device.
If Auto is selected, the camera will automatically select
the appropriate format.
Device Control
If On is selected for HDMI >Device control in the setup
menu when the camera is connected to a television that
supports HDMI-CEC and both the camera and television
are on, the display shown at right will appear on the
television and the television remote can be used in place
of the camera multi selector and J button during full-
frame playback and slide shows. If Off is selected, the television remote can not be
used to control the camera.
A HDMI and Live View
HDMI displays connected via an HDMI cable can be used for live view photography and
output to the HDMI device at the resolution selected for HDMI > Output resolution in the
setup menu. If Auto is selected, HDMI output will be adjusted according to the option
HDMI device does not support the setting automatically selected at the current frame size
and rate, choose an option other than Auto for Output resolution. Movies may be output
A HDMI-CEC Devices
When the camera is connected to an HDMI-CEC device, ) will appear in the control panel
in place of the number of exposures remaining.
Q
A Device Control
See the television manual for details.
216
Menu Guide
M
D The Playback Menu: Managing Images
To display the playback menu, press G and select the D (playback menu) tab.
G button
The playback menu contains the following options:
Option
0
Option
0
Delete
Playback folder
Hide image
Playback display options
Copy image(s)
Image review
After delete
Rotate tall
Slide show
DPOF print order
A See Also
Menu defaults are listed on page 324.
G button ➜ D playback menu
Playback Folder
Option
Description
D7100
All
Pictures in all folders created with the D7100 will be visible during playback.
Pictures in all folders will be visible during playback.
Current
Only pictures in the current folder will be visible during playback.
U
217
G button ➜ D playback menu
Hide Image
Hide or reveal pictures. Hidden pictures are visible only in the Hide image menu and
can only be deleted by formatting the memory card.
Option
Description
Select/set
Hide or reveal selected pictures.
Selecting this option displays a list of dates. To hide all
pictures taken on a date, highlight the date and press 2.
Selected dates are marked by a L; to reveal all pictures
taken on a selected date, highlight it and press 2. Press J
to complete the operation.
Select date
Deselect all? Reveal all pictures.
D Protected and Hidden Images
Revealing a protected image will also remove protection from the image.
Follow the steps below to hide or reveal selected pictures.
1 Choose Select/set.
Highlight Select/set and press 2.
2 Select pictures.
Use the multi selector to scroll through the
pictures on the memory card (to view the
highlighted picture full screen, press and
hold the X (T) button; to view images in
hold D and press 1) and press W (S) to
W (S) button
select the current picture. Selected pictures are marked by a R icon; to deselect
a picture, highlight it and press W (S) again. Continue until all the desired
pictures have been selected.
3 Press J.
Press J to complete the operation.
U
218
G button ➜ D playback menu
Playback Display Options
Choose the information available in the playback photo
option, then press 2 to select the option for the photo
information display. A L appears next to selected items; to
deselect, highlight and press 2. To return to the playback
menu, press J.
G button ➜ D playback menu
Copy Image(s)
Copy pictures from one memory card to another. This option is only available when
two memory cards are inserted in the camera.
Option
Description
Select source
Select image(s)
Choose card from which pictures will be copied.
Select pictures to be copied.
Select destination folder
Copy image(s)?
Select destination folder on remaining card.
Copy selected pictures to specified destination.
1 Choose Select source.
Highlight Select source and press 2.
2 Select the source card.
Highlight the slot for the card containing the
images to be copied and press J.
U
219
3 Choose Select image(s).
Highlight Select image(s) and press 2.
4 Select the source folder.
Highlight the folder containing the images
to be copied and press 2.
5 Make the initial selection.
Before going on to select or deselect
individual images, you can mark all or all
protected images in the folder for copying
by choosing Select all images or Select
protected images. To mark only
individually selected images for copying,
choose Deselect all before proceeding.
6 Select additional images.
Highlight pictures and press W (S) to
select or deselect (to view the highlighted
picture full screen, press and hold the
X (T) button). Selected images are
marked with a L. Press J to proceed to Step
7 when your selection is complete.
W (S) button
7 Choose Select destination folder.
Highlight Select destination folder and
press 2.
U
220
8 Select a destination folder.
To enter a folder number, choose Select
folder by number, enter the number
selected number does not already exist, a
new folder will be created.
To choose from a list of existing folders,
choose Select folder from list, highlight a
folder, and press J.
9 Copy the images.
Highlight Copy image(s)? and press J.
A confirmation dialog will be displayed;
highlight Yes and press J. Press J again to
exit when copying is complete.
D Copying Images
Images will not be copied if there is insufficient space on the destination card. Be sure the
battery is fully charged before copying movies.
If the destination folder contains an image with the
same name as one of the images to be copied, a
confirmation dialog will be displayed. Select Replace
existing image to replace the image with the image to
be copied, or select Replace all to replace all existing
images with the same names without further
prompting. To continue without replacing the image,
select Skip, or select Cancel to exit without copying
any further images.
can not be copied.
U
221
G button ➜ D playback menu
Image Review
Choose whether pictures are automatically displayed in the
monitor immediately after shooting. If Off is selected, pictures
can only be displayed by pressing the K button.
G button ➜ D playback menu
After Delete
Choose the picture displayed after an image is deleted.
Option
Description
Display following picture. If deleted picture was last frame, previous
picture will be displayed.
S Show next
Display previous picture. If deleted picture was first frame, following
picture will be displayed.
T Show previous
If user was scrolling through pictures in order recorded, following
picture will be displayed as described for Show next. If user was
scrolling through pictures in reverse order, previous picture will be
displayed as described for Show previous.
U Continue as before
G button ➜ D playback menu
Rotate Tall
Choose whether to rotate “tall” (portrait-orientation) pictures
for display during playback. Note that because the camera itself
is already in the appropriate orientation during shooting,
images are not rotated automatically during image review.
Option
On
Description
“Tall” (portrait-orientation) pictures are automatically rotated for display in the
will be displayed in “wide” (landscape) orientation.
Off
“Tall” (portrait-orientation) pictures are displayed in “wide” (landscape) orientation.
U
222
G button ➜ D playback menu
Slide Show
Option
Start
Description
Start slide show.
Choose type of image displayed from Still images and movies, Still
images only, and Movies only.
Image type
Frame interval Choose how long each picture will be displayed.
To start the slide show, highlight Start and press J. The
following operations can be performed while the slide show is
in progress:
To
Press
Description
Press 4 to return to previous frame, 2 to skip to next
frame.
Skip back/skip ahead
View additional photo
info
Change or hide photo info displayed (still images only;
Pause/resume
J
Pause or resume slide show.
(T)/ Press (T) during movie playback to increase
W (S) volume, W (S) to decrease.
X
X
Raise/lower volume
Exit to playback menu
Exit to playback mode
G
End slide show and return to playback menu.
End show and return to playback mode.
K
Press shutter-release button halfway to return to
shooting mode.
Exit to shooting mode
The dialog shown at right is displayed when the show ends.
Select Restart to restart or Exit to return to the playback menu.
U
223
C The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
To display the shooting menu, press G and select the C (shooting menu) tab.
G button
The shooting menu contains the following options:
Option
Reset shooting menu
Storage folder
File naming
Role played by card in Slot 2
Image quality
0
Option
0
Color space
Active D-Lighting
HDR (high dynamic range)
Auto distortion control
Long exposure NR
Image size
Image area
High ISO NR
ISO sensitivity settings
Remote control mode (ML-L3)
Multiple exposure
Interval timer shooting
Movie settings
JPEG compression
NEF (RAW) recording
White balance
Set Picture Control
Manage Picture Control
Note: Depending on camera settings, some items may be grayed out and unavailable. For
information on the options available in each shooting mode, see page 321.
G button ➜ C shooting menu
Reset Shooting Menu
Select Yes to restore shooting menu options to their default
U
224
G button ➜ C shooting menu
Storage Folder
Select the folder in which subsequent images will be stored.
❚❚Selecting Folders by Folder Number
1 Choose Select folder by number.
Highlight Select folder by number and press 2.
The dialog shown at right will be displayed.
2 Choose a folder number.
Press 4 or 2 to highlight a digit, press 1 or 3 to change. If a folder with the
selected number already exists, a W, X, or Y icon will be displayed to the left
of the folder number:
• W : Folder is empty.
• X : Folder is partially full.
• Y : Folder contains 999 pictures or a picture numbered 9999. No further
pictures can be stored in this folder.
The card on which the folder is stored is shown by the card slot icon in the top
right corner of the Select folder by number dialog. The card used for new
folders depends on the option currently selected for Role played by card in
3 Save changes and exit.
Press J to complete the operation and return to the shooting menu (to exit
without choosing the storage folder, press the G button). If a folder with the
specified number does not already exist, a new folder will be created.
Subsequent photographs will be stored in the selected folder unless it is
already full.
D Folder and File Numbers
If the current folder is numbered 999 and contains 999 pictures or a picture numbered 9999,
the shutter-release will be disabled and no further photographs can be taken. To continue
shooting, create a folder with a number less than 999, or select an existing folder with a
number less than 999 and less than 999 images.
A Startup Time
Additional time may be required for camera startup if the memory card contains a very large
number of files or folders.
U
225
❚❚Selecting Folders from a List
1 Choose Select folder from list.
Highlight Select folder from list and press 2.
2 Highlight a folder.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight a folder.
3 Select the highlighted folder.
Press J to select the highlighted folder and return to the shooting menu.
Subsequent photographs will be stored in the selected folder.
G button ➜ C shooting menu
File Naming
Photographs are saved using file names consisting of “DSC_” or, in the case of images
that use the Adobe RGB color space, “_DSC”, followed by a four-digit number and a
three-letter extension (e.g., “DSC_0001.JPG”). The File naming option is used to
select three letters to replace the “DSC” portion of the file name. For information on
A Extensions
The following extensions are used: “.NEF” for NEF (RAW) images, “.JPG” for JPEG images,
“.MOV” for movies, and “.NDF” for dust off reference data. In each pair of photographs
recorded at image-quality settings of NEF (RAW) + JPEG, the NEF and JPEG images have the
same file names but different extensions.
U
226
G button ➜ C shooting menu
Color Space
The color space determines the gamut of colors available for color reproduction.
Choose sRGB for photographs that will be printed or used “as is,” with no further
modification. Adobe RGB has a wider color gamut and is recommended for images
that will be extensively processed or retouched after leaving the camera.
A Color Space
Color spaces define the correspondence between colors and the numeric values that
represent them in a digital image file. The sRGB color space is widely used, while the Adobe
RGB color space is typically used in publishing and commercial printing. sRGB is
recommended when taking photographs that will be printed without modification or
viewed in applications that do not support color management, or when taking photographs
that will be printed with ExifPrint, the direct printing option on some household printers, or
kiosk printing or other commercial print services. Adobe RGB photographs can also be
printed using these options, but colors will not be as vivid.
JPEG photographs taken in the Adobe RGB color space are DCF compliant; applications and
printers that support DCF will select the correct color space automatically. If the application
or device does not support DCF, select the appropriate color space manually. For more
information, see the documentation provided with the application or device.
A Nikon Software
ViewNX 2 (supplied) and Capture NX 2 (available separately) automatically select the correct
color space when opening photographs created with this camera.
G button ➜ C shooting menu
Auto Distortion Control
Select On to reduce barrel distortion when shooting with wide-
angle lenses and to reduce pin-cushion distortion when
shooting with long lenses (note that the edges of the area
visible in the viewfinder may be cropped out of the final
photograph, and that the time needed to process photographs
before recording begins may increase). This option does not
apply to movies and is available only with type G and D lenses (PC, fisheye, and
certain other lenses excluded); results are not guaranteed with other lenses.
A Retouch: Distortion Control
For information on creating copies of existing photographs with reduced barrel and pin-
cushion distortion, see page 285.
U
227
Long Exposure NR
(Long Exposure Noise Reduction)
G button ➜ C shooting menu
If On is selected, photographs taken at shutter speeds slower
than 1 s will be processed to reduce noise (bright spots,
randomly-spaced bright pixels, or fog). The time required for
processing roughly doubles; during processing, “l m”
will flash in the shutter speed/aperture displays and pictures
can not be taken (if the camera is turned off before
processing is complete, the picture will be saved but noise
reduction will not be performed). In continuous release
mode, frame rates will slow and while photographs are being processed, the capacity
of the memory buffer will drop. Long exposure noise reduction is not available
during movie recording.
G button ➜ C shooting menu
High ISO NR
Photographs taken at high ISO sensitivities can be processed to reduce “noise.”
Option
High
Description
Reduce noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, lines, or fog), particularly in
Normal photographs taken at high ISO sensitivities. Choose the amount of noise reduction
performed from High, Normal, and Low.
Low
Noise reduction is only performed at ISO sensitivities of ISO 1250 and higher. The
amount of noise reduction is less than the amount performed when Low is selected
for High ISO NR.
Off
U
228
The following Custom Settings are available:
Custom Setting
Reset custom settings
Autofocus
Custom Setting
Shooting/display
d9 LCD illumination
0
0
d
a
a1 AF-C priority selection
a2 AF-S priority selection
a3 Focus tracking with lock-on
a4 AF point illumination
a5 Focus point wrap-around
a6 Number of focus points
a7 Built-in AF-assist illuminator
e
Bracketing/flash
e1 Flash sync speed
e2 Flash shutter speed
e3 Flash cntrl for built-in flash
e4 Exposure comp. for flash
e5 Modeling flash
e6 Auto bracketing set
e7 Bracketing order
b
Metering/exposure
b1 ISO sensitivity step value
b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl
b3 Easy exposure compensation
b4 Center-weighted area
b5 Fine-tune optimal exposure
f
Controls
c
Timers/AE lock
f1 OK button
f2 Assign Fn button
c1 Shutter-release button AE-L
c2 Standby timer
c3 Self-timer
c4 Monitor off delay
c5 Remote on duration (ML-L3)
f3 Assign preview button
f4 Assign AE-L/AF-L button
f5 Customize command dials
f6 Release button to use dial
f7 Slot empty release lock
f8 Reverse indicators
d
Shooting/display
d1 Beep
d2 Viewfinder grid display
d3 ISO display and adjustment
d4 Screen tips
d5 CL mode shooting speed
d6 Max. continuous release
d7 File number sequence
d8 Information display
f9 Assign MB-D15 4 button
g
Movie
g1 Assign Fn button
g2 Assign preview button
g3 Assign AE-L/AF-L button
g4 Assign shutter button
Note: Depending on camera settings, some items may be grayed out and unavailable. For
adjacent to the altered settings in the second level of the Custom Settings menu.
U
230
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Reset Custom Settings
Select Yes to restore Custom Settings to their default values
a: Autofocus
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
a1: AF-C Priority Selection
whether photographs can be taken whenever the shutter-release button is pressed
(release priority) or only when the camera is in focus (focus priority).
Option
Release
Focus
Description
G
Photos can be taken whenever the shutter-release button is pressed.
Photos can only be taken when the in-focus indicator (I) is displayed.
F
Regardless of the option selected, focus will not lock when AF-C is selected for
autofocus mode. The camera will continue to adjust focus until the shutter is
released.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
a2: AF-S Priority Selection
whether photographs can be taken only when the camera is in focus (focus priority)
or whenever the shutter-release button is pressed (release priority).
Option
Release
Focus
Description
G
Photos can be taken whenever the shutter-release button is pressed.
Photos can only be taken when the in-focus indicator (I) is displayed.
F
Regardless of the option selected, if the in-focus indicator (I) is displayed when AF-S
is selected for autofocus mode, focus will lock while the shutter-release button is
pressed halfway. Focus lock continues until the shutter is released.
U
231
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
a3: Focus Tracking with Lock-On
This option controls how autofocus adjusts to sudden large changes in the distance
to the subject when AF-C is selected or continuous-servo autofocus is selected when
Option
Description
C
(
D
)
E
5 (Long)
When the distance to the subject changes abruptly, the camera waits for the
specified period before adjusting the distance to the subject. This prevents
the camera from refocusing when the subject is briefly obscured by objects
passing through the frame.
4
3 (Normal)
2
1 (Short)
The camera immediately adjusts focus when the distance to the subject
changes. Use when photographing a series of subjects at varying distances in
quick succession.
Off
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
a4: AF Point Illumination
Choose whether the active focus point is highlighted in red in the viewfinder.
Option
Auto
Description
The selected focus point is automatically highlighted as needed to establish
contrast with the background.
The selected focus point is always highlighted, regardless of the brightness of
the background. Depending on the brightness of the background, the
selected focus point may be difficult to see.
On
Off
The selected focus point is not highlighted.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
a5: Focus Point Wrap-Around
Choose whether focus-point selection “wraps around” from one edge of the display
to another.
Option
Description
Focus-point selection “wraps around” from top to
bottom, bottom to top, right to left, and left to right, so
that, for example, pressing 2 when a focus point at the
right edge of the display is highlighted (q) selects the
corresponding focus point at the left edge of the
display (w).
w
q
Wrap
The focus-point display is bounded by the outermost focus points so that, for
example, pressing 2 when a focus point at the right edge of the display is
selected has no effect.
No wrap
U
232
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
a6: Number of Focus Points
Choose the number of focus points available for manual focus-point selection.
Option Description
B
A
51 points Choose from the 51 focus points shown at right.
Choose from the 11 focus points shown at right. Use for
11 points
quick focus-point selection.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
a7: Built-in AF-assist Illuminator
Choose whether the built-in AF-assist illuminator lights to assist
the focus operation when lighting is poor.
Option
On
Description
The AF-assist illuminator lights when lighting is poor (viewfinder photography
only). AF-assist illumination is only available when both of the following
conditions are met:
when the camera is in AF-A mode.
area AF is chosen and the center focus point is selected.
The AF-assist illuminator does not light to assist the focus operation. The camera
may not be able to focus using autofocus when lighting is poor.
Off
A The AF-Assist Illuminator
Remove lens hoods when using the AF-assist illuminator.
A See Also
U
233
b: Metering/Exposure
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
b1: ISO Sensitivity Step Value
Select the increments used when making adjustments to ISO
sensitivity. If possible, the current ISO sensitivity setting is
maintained when the step value is changed. If the current
setting is not available at the new step value, ISO sensitivity will
be rounded to the nearest available setting.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
b2: EV Steps for Exposure Cntrl
Select the increments used when making adjustments to
shutter speed, aperture, exposure and flash compensation, and
bracketing.
U
234
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
b3: Easy Exposure Compensation
This option controls whether the E button is needed to set exposure compensation
display will flash even when exposure compensation is set to 0.
Option
Description
Exposure compensation is set by rotating one of the command dials (see note
below). The setting selected using the command dial is reset when the camera
turns off or the standby timer expires (exposure compensation settings
selected using the E button are not reset).
On (Auto reset)
As above, except that the exposure compensation value selected using the
command dial is not reset when the camera turns off or the standby timer
expires.
On
Exposure compensation is set by pressing the E button and rotating the main
command dial.
Off
A Change Main/Sub
The dial used to set exposure compensation when On (Auto reset) or On is selected for
Custom Setting b3 (Easy exposure compensation) depends on the option selected for
Customize command dials > Change main/sub
Off
On
P
S
A
Sub-command dial
Sub-command dial
Main command dial
Sub-command dial
Main command dial
Sub-command dial
M
N/A
A Show ISO/Easy ISO
Custom Setting b3 (Easy exposure compensation) can not be used with Custom Setting d3
(ISO display and adjustment) > Show ISO/Easy ISO. Adjustments to either of these items
reset the remaining item; a message is displayed when the item is reset.
U
235
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
b4: Center-Weighted Area
When calculating exposure, center-weighted metering assigns
the greatest weight to a circle in the center of the frame. The
diameter (φ) of this circle can be set to 6, 8, 10, or 13 mm or to
the average of the entire frame.
Note that the diameter is fixed at 8 mm when a non-CPU lens is used, regardless of
Average is selected, the average of the entire frame will be used for CPU lenses.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
b5: Fine-tune Optimal Exposure
Use this option to fine-tune the exposure value selected by the
camera. Exposure can be fine-tuned separately for each
metering method by from +1 to –1 EV in steps of 1/6 EV.
D Fine-Tuning Exposure
Exposure fine-tuning is not affected by two-button resets. Note that as the exposure
compensation (E) icon is not displayed, the only way to determine how much exposure has
is preferred in most situations.
c: Timers/AE Lock
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
c1: Shutter-Release Button AE-L
If On is selected, exposure will lock when the shutter-release
button is pressed halfway.
U
236
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
c2: Standby timer
Choose how long the camera continues to meter exposure
when no operations are performed. The shutter-speed and
aperture displays in the control panel and viewfinder turn off
automatically when the timer expires.
Choose a shorter standby timer delay for longer battery life.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
c3: Self-Timer
Choose the length of the shutter release delay, the number of
shots taken, and the interval between shots in self-timer mode
•
•
•
Self-timer delay: Choose the length of the shutter-release delay.
Number of shots: Press 1 and 3 to choose the number of shots
taken each time the shutter-release button is pressed.
Interval between shots: Choose the interval between shots when
the Number of shots is more than 1.
U
237
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
c4: Monitor off Delay
Choose how long the monitor remains on when no operations
are performed during playback (Playback; defaults to 10 s) and
image review (Image review; defaults to 4 s), when menus
(Menus; defaults to 1 minute) or information (Information
display; defaults to 10 s) are displayed, or during live view and
movie recording (Live view; defaults to 10 minutes). Choose a
shorter monitor-off delay for longer battery life.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
c5: Remote on Duration (ML-L3)
Choose how long the camera will remain on stand-by in remote
selected period, remote shooting will end and Off will
automatically be selected for Remote control mode (ML-L3) in
the shooting menu. Choose shorter times for longer battery life.
d: Shooting/Display
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
d1: Beep
Choose the pitch and volume of the beep that sounds when the camera focuses
focus locks during live view photography, while the release timer is counting down in
regardless of the option selected.
•
Volume: Choose 3 (high), 2 (medium), 1 (low) or Off (mute).
When an option other than Off is selected, c appears in the
information display.
•
Pitch: Choose High or Low.
U
238
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
d2: Viewfinder Grid Display
Choose On to display on-demand grid lines in the viewfinder
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
d3: ISO Display and Adjustment
If Show ISO sensitivity or Show ISO/Easy ISO is selected, the control panel will
show ISO sensitivity in place of the number of exposures remaining. If Show ISO/
Easy ISO is selected, ISO sensitivity can be set in modes P and S by rotating the sub-
command dial or in mode A by rotating the main command dial. Select Show frame
count to display the number of exposures remaining in the control panel.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
d4: Screen Tips
Choose On to display tool tips for items selected in the
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
d5: CL Mode Shooting Speed
Choose the maximum frame advance rate in CL (continuous low
setting also determines the frame advance rate for single-
frame).
U
239
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
d6: Max. Continuous Release
The maximum number of shots that can be taken in a single burst in continuous
mode can be set to any value between 1 and 100.
A The Memory Buffer
Regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting d6, shooting will slow when the
buffer.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
d7: File Number Sequence
When a photograph is taken, the camera names the file by
adding one to the last file number used. This option controls
whether file numbering continues from the last number used
when a new folder is created, the memory card is formatted, or
a new memory card is inserted in the camera.
Option
Description
When a new folder is created, the memory card formatted, or a new memory card
inserted in the camera, file numbering continues from the last number used or from
On the largest file number in the current folder, whichever is higher. If a photograph is
taken when the current folder contains a photograph numbered 9999, a new folder
will be created automatically and file numbering will begin again from 0001.
File numbering is reset to 0001 when a new folder is created, the memory card is
formatted, or a new memory card is inserted in the camera. Note that a new folder is
created automatically if a photograph is taken when the current folder contains 999
Off
photographs.
As for On, except that the next photograph taken is assigned a file number by adding
Reset one to the largest file number in the current folder. If the folder is empty, file
numbering is reset to 0001.
D File Number Sequence
If the current folder is numbered 999 and contains either 999 photographs or a photograph
numbered 9999, the shutter-release button will be disabled and no further photographs can
be taken. Choose Reset for Custom Setting d7 (File number sequence) and then either
format the current memory card or insert a new memory card.
U
240
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
d8: Information Display
will automatically change from black to white or white to black to maintain contrast
with the background. To always use the same color lettering, select Manual and
choose Dark on light (w; black lettering) or Light on dark (x; white lettering).
Monitor brightness will automatically be adjusted for maximum contrast with the
selected text color.
Dark on light
Light on dark
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
d9: LCD Illumination
If Off is selected, the control panel backlight (LCD illuminator)
will only light while the power switch is rotated toward D. If On
is selected, the control panel will be illuminated whenever the
life.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
d10: Exposure Delay Mode
In situations where the slightest camera movement can blur
pictures, select 1 s, 2 s, or 3 s to delay shutter release until one,
two, or three seconds after the mirror is raised.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
d11: Flash Warning
If On is selected, the flash-ready indicator (c) will flash in the viewfinder if the flash is
required to ensure optimal exposure.
U
241
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
d12: MB-D15 Battery Type
To ensure that the camera functions as expected when the optional MB-D15 battery
pack is used with AA batteries, match the option selected in this menu to the type of
batteries inserted in the battery pack. There is no need to adjust this option when
using EN-EL15 batteries.
Option
Description
1
2
3
LR6 (AA alkaline)
HR6 (AA Ni-MH)
FR6 (AA lithium)
Select when using LR6 alkaline AA batteries.
Select when using HR6 Ni-MH AA batteries.
Select when using FR6 lithium AA batteries.
A Using AA Batteries
The capacity of AA batteries drops sharply at temperatures below 20 °C (68 °F) and varies
with make and storage conditions; in some cases, batteries may cease to function before
their expiry date. Some AA batteries can not be used; due to their performance
characteristics and limited capacity, alkaline batteries have less capacity than some other
types and should only be used if no alternative is available and then only at warmer
temperatures. The camera shows the level of AA batteries as follows:
Control panel
L
Viewfinder
—
d
Description
Batteries fully charged.
H
Low battery. Ready fresh batteries.
H
(flashes)
d
(flashes)
Shutter release disabled. Change batteries.
U
242
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
d13: Battery Order
Choose whether the battery in the camera or the batteries in the
battery pack are used first when an optional MB-D15 battery
pack is attached. Note that if the MB-D15 is powered by an
optional EH-5b AC adapter and EP-5B power connector, the AC
adapter will be used regardless of the option selected.
A s icon is displayed in the camera control panel when the
batteries in the MB-D15 are in use.
A The MB-D15 Battery Pack
The MB-D15 takes one EN-EL15 rechargeable Li-ion battery or six AA alkaline, Ni-MH, or
lithium batteries (an EN-EL15 is supplied with the camera; AA batteries are available
separately).
The information display shows the type of battery inserted in the
MB-D15 as follows:
MB-D15 battery type display
$
Battery type
EN-EL15 rechargeable Li-ion battery
AA batteries
w
U
243
e: Bracketing/Flash
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
e1: Flash Sync Speed
This option controls flash sync speed.
Option
Description
Auto FP high-speed sync is used when a compatible flash unit is attached
to 1/320 s. When the camera shows a shutter speed of 1/320 s in mode P or A,
auto FP high-speed sync will be activated if the actual shutter speed is faster
than 1/320 s.
1/320 s
(Auto FP)
Auto FP high-speed sync is used when a compatible flash unit is attached
to 1/250 s. When the camera shows a shutter speed of 1/250 s in mode P or A,
auto FP high-speed sync will be activated if the actual shutter speed is faster
than 1/250 s.
1/250 s
(Auto FP)
1/250 s–1/60 s Flash sync speed set to selected value.
A Fixing Shutter Speed at the Flash Sync Speed Limit
To fix shutter speed at the sync speed limit in mode S or M, select the next shutter speed after
the slowest possible shutter speed (30 s or Time/%). An X (flash sync indicator) will be
displayed in the viewfinder and control panel.
A Auto FP High-Speed Sync
Allows the flash to be used at the highest shutter speed supported by the camera, making it
possible to choose the maximum aperture for reduced depth of field even when the subject
is backlit in bright sunlight. The information display flash mode indicator shows “FP” when
U
244
❚❚Auto FP High-Speed Sync
When 1/320 s (Auto FP) or 1/250 s (Auto FP) is selected for Custom Setting e1
shutter speed (Auto FP High-Speed Sync).
Flash sync speed
1/320 s (Auto FP)
1/250 s (Auto FP)
1/250 s
Optional
flash unit
Optional
flash unit
Optional
flash unit
Built-in flash
Built-in flash
Built-in flash
Shutter speed
From 1/8000 to but
not including 1/320 s
From 1/320 to but
not including 1/250 s
1/250–30 s
—
Auto FP
—
—
Auto FP
—
—
—
Flash sync *
Auto FP
—
Flash sync
* Flash range drops as shutter speed increases. Flash range will nevertheless be greater than
that obtained at the same speeds with Auto FP.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
e2: Flash Shutter Speed
This option determines the slowest shutter speed available
when using front- or rear-curtain sync or red-eye reduction in
mode P or A (regardless of the setting chosen, shutter speeds
can be as slow as 30 s in S and M modes or at flash settings of
slow sync, slow rear-curtain sync, or red-eye reduction with slow
sync). Options range from 1/60 s (1/60 s) to 30 s (30 s).
U
245
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
e3: Flash Cntrl for Built-in Flash
Choose the flash mode for the built-in flash.
Option
Description
Flash output is adjusted automatically in response to shooting
conditions.
1 TTL
flashes.
2
Manual
The flash fires repeatedly while the shutter is open, producing a strobe-
Use the built-in flash as a master flash controlling remote optional flash
3 Repeating flash
4 Commander mode
❚❚Manual
Choose a flash level between Full and 1/128 (1/128 of full power). At full power, the
built-in flash has a Guide Number of 12/39 (m/ft, ISO 100, 20 °C/68 °F).
❚❚Repeating Flash
The flash fires repeatedly while the shutter is open, producing
a strobe-light effect. Press 4 or 2 to highlight the following
options, 1 or 3 to change.
Option
Description
Output Choose flash output (expressed as a fraction of full power).
Choose the number of times the flash fires at the selected
output. Note that depending on shutter speed and the
option selected for Frequency, the actual number of flashes
Times
may be less than selected.
Frequency Choose how often the flash fires per second.
A Flash Control Mode
The flash control mode for the built-in flash is shown in the
A “Manual” and “Repeating Flash”
Y icons flash in the control panel and viewfinder when these options are selected.
U
246
A The SB-400
When an optional SB-400 flash unit is attached and turned on, Custom Setting e3 changes to
Optional flash, allowing the flash control mode for the SB-400 to be selected from TTL and
Manual (Repeating flash and Commander mode options are not available).
A “Times“
The options available for Repeating flash > Times are determined by flash output.
Output
1/4
Options available for “Times”
Output
1/32
Options available for “Times”
2–10, 15
2
1/8
1/16
2–5
2–10
1/64
1/128
2–10, 15, 20, 25
2–10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35
❚❚Commander Mode
Use the built-in flash as a master flash controlling one or more remote optional flash
Selecting this option displays the menu shown at right. Press 4
or 2 to highlight the following options, 1 or 3 to change.
Option
Built-in
flash
Description
Choose a flash mode for the built-in flash (commander flash).
i-TTL mode. Choose flash compensation from values between +3.0 and –3.0 EV in
increments of 1/3 EV.
Choose the flash level from values between 1/1 and 1/128 (1/128 of full power).
The built-in flash does not fire, although remote flash units do. The built-in flash
must be raised so that it can emit monitor pre-flashes.
TTL
M
– –
Group A Choose a flash mode for all flash units in group A.
i-TTL mode. Choose flash compensation from values between +3.0 and –3.0 EV in
TTL
increments of 1/3 EV.
AA
compensation from values between +3.0 and –3.0 EV in increments of 1/3 EV.
M
Choose the flash level from values between 1/1 and 1/128 (1/128 of full power).
– – The flash units in this group do not fire.
Choose a flash mode for all flash units in group B. The options available are the
same as those listed for Group A, above.
Group B
Choose from channels 1–4. All flash units in both groups must be set to the same
channel.
Channel
U
247
Follow the steps below to take photographs in commander mode.
1 Adjust settings for the built-in flash.
Choose the flash control mode and output level for the
built-in flash. Note that output level can not be adjusted
in – – mode.
2 Adjust settings for group A.
Choose the flash control mode and output level for the
flash units in group A.
3 Adjust settings for group B.
Choose the flash control mode and output level for the
flash units in group B.
4 Select the channel.
5 Press J.
U
248
6 Compose the shot.
Compose the shot and arrange the flash units as shown below. Note that the
maximum distance at which the remote flash units can be placed may vary with
shooting conditions.
Wireless remote sensors
on flash units should face
camera.
60° or less
10 m/33 ft or less 30° or less
5 m/15 ft or
less
Camera
(built-in flash)
30° or less
60° or less
5 m/15 ft or less
7 Configure the remote flash units.
Turn all the remote flash units on, adjust group settings as desired, and set them
to the channel selected in Step 4. See the flash unit instruction manuals for
details.
8 Raise the built-in flash.
Press the M (Y) button to raise the built-in flash. Note that even if – – is
selected for Built-in flash > Mode, the built-in flash must be raised so that
monitor preflashes will be emitted.
9 Frame the photograph, focus, and shoot.
After confirming that the camera flash-ready light and the flash-ready lights for
all other flash units are lit, frame the photograph, focus, and shoot. FV lock
U
249
A The Flash Sync Mode Display
M does not appear in the control panel flash sync mode display when – – is selected for Built-
in flash > Mode.
A Flash Compensation
The flash compensation value selected with the M (Y) button and sub-command dial is
added to the flash compensation values selected for the built-in flash, group A, and group B
in the Commander mode menu. A Y icon is displayed in the control panel and viewfinder
when a flash compensation value other than 0 is selected for Built-in flash > TTL. The Y
icon flashes when the built-in flash is in mode M.
D Commander Mode
Position the sensor windows on the remote flash units to pick up the light from the built-in
flash (particular care is required if the camera is not mounted on a tripod). Be sure that direct
light or strong reflections from the remote flash units do not enter the camera lens (in TTL
mode) or the photocells on the remote flash units (AA mode), as this may interfere with
exposure. To prevent timing flashes emitted by the built-in flash from appearing in
photographs taken at short range, choose low ISO sensitivities or small apertures (high
f-numbers) or use an optional SG-3IR infrared panel for the built-in flash. An SG-3IR is
required for best results with rear-curtain sync, which produces brighter timing flashes.
After positioning the remote flash units, take a test shot and view the results in the camera
monitor.
Although there is no limit on the number of remote flash units that may be used, the
practical maximum is three. With more than this number, the light emitted by the remote
flash units will interfere with performance.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
e4: Exposure Comp. for Flash
Choose how the camera adjusts flash level when exposure compensation is used.
Option
Description
Both flash level and exposure compensation are adjusted to modify
exposure over the entire frame.
YE Entire frame
E
Background only Exposure compensation applies to background only.
U
250
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
e5: Modeling Flash
If On is selected when the camera is being used with the built-in
modeling flash will be emitted when the camera depth-of-field
if Off is selected.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
e6: Auto Bracketing Set
Choose AE & flash (j) to perform both exposure and flash-level bracketing, AE only
(k) to bracket only exposure, Flash only (l) to perform only flash-level bracketing,
white balance bracketing is not available at image quality settings of NEF (RAW) or
NEF (RAW) + JPEG.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
e7: Bracketing Order
At the default setting of MTR > under > over (H), exposure, flash, and white balance
Under > MTR > over (I) is selected, shooting will proceed in order from the
lowest to the highest value. This setting has no effect on ADL bracketing.
U
251
f: Controls
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
f1: OK Button
This option determines the role assigned to the J button during viewfinder
photography, playback, and live view (regardless of the option selected, pressing J
when a movie is displayed full frame starts movie playback).
❚❚Shooting Mode
Option
Role assigned to J button
Select center focus point.
Select center focus point
J
K
Highlight active focus point Highlight the active focus point.
Not used None.
❚❚Playback Mode
Option
Role assigned to J button
Thumbnail on/off
Toggle between full-frame and thumbnail playback.
n
o
In both full-frame and thumbnail playback, a histogram
Toggle between full-frame or thumbnail playback and
playback zoom. Choose the initial zoom setting from Low
magnification, Medium magnification, and High
magnification. The zoom display will center on the active
focus point.
View histograms
Zoom on/off
X
Choose slot and folder
p
❚❚Live View
Option
Role assigned to J button
Pressing the J button in live view selects the center focus
point.
Select center focus point
J
Press the J button to toggle zoom on and off. Choose the
initial zoom setting from Low magnification, Medium
magnification, and High magnification. The zoom display
will center on the active focus point.
Zoom on/off
Not used
X
Pressing the J button has no effect in live view.
U
252
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
f2: Assign Fn Button
Choose the role played by the Fn button, either by itself (Press)
or when used in combination with the command dials (Press +
command dials).
❚❚Press
Selecting Press displays the following options:
Option
Description
Preview
q
Press the Fn button to lock flash value (built-in flash and compatible
FV lock
r
AE/AF lock
Focus and exposure lock while the Fn button is pressed.
B
C
AE lock only Exposure locks while the Fn button is pressed.
AE lock
(Hold)
Exposure locks when the Fn button is pressed, and remains locked until
the button is pressed a second time or the standby timer expires.
E
F
AF lock only Focus locks while the Fn button is pressed.
Pressing the Fn button initiates autofocus. The shutter-release button can
not be used to focus.
The flash will not fire in photos taken while the Fn button is pressed.
AF-ON
A
s
Flash off
If the Fn button is pressed while exposure, flash, or ADL bracketing is active
in single frame or quiet shutter-release mode, all shots in the current
Bracketing bracketing program will be taken each time the shutter-release button is
t
burst
pressed. If white balance bracketing is active or continuous release mode
(mode CH or CL) is selected, the camera will repeat the bracketing burst
while the shutter-release button is held down.
If image quality is set to JPEG fine, JPEG normal, or JPEG basic, “RAW”
will be displayed in the control panel and an NEF (RAW) copy will be
recorded with the next picture taken after the Fn button is pressed (to
record NEF/RAW copies with a series of photographs, keep the shutter-
release button pressed halfway between shots). To exit without recording
an NEF (RAW) copy, press the Fn button again.
+ NEF (RAW)
e
Matrix
Matrix metering is activated while the Fn button is pressed.
Center-weighted metering is activated while the Fn button is pressed.
Spot metering is activated while the Fn button is pressed.
L
M
N
metering
Center-
weighted
metering
Spot
metering
U
253
Option
Description
Viewfinder
9
virtual
horizon
Press the Fn button to view a virtual horizon display in the viewfinder.
m
n
MY MENU
Access top
item in MY
MENU
Press the Fn button to jump to the top item in “MY MENU.” Select this
option for quick access to a frequently-used menu item.
6
Fn button performs same function as K button. Select when using a
telephoto lens or in other circumstances in which it is difficult to operate
the K button with your left hand.
Playback
None
K
Pressing the button has no effect.
A Incompatible Options
If the option selected for Press can not be used in combination with the option selected for
Press + command dials, a message will be displayed and whichever of Press or Press +
command dials was selected first will be set to None.
A Viewfinder Virtual Horizon
When Viewfinder virtual horizon is selected for Custom Setting f2 (Assign Fn button),
pressing the Fn button displays a roll indicator in the viewfinder. Press the button again to
restore the indicator to its normal function.
Camera tilted right
Camera level
Camera tilted left
Viewfinder (camera in
landscape orientation)
Viewfinder (camera in
portrait orientation)
U
Note that the display may not be accurate when the camera is tilted at a sharp angle forward
or back. To display a virtual horizon in the monitor, use the Virtual horizon option in the
254
❚❚Press + Command Dials
Selecting Press + command dials displays the following options:
Option
Choose
Description
Press the Fn button and rotate a command dial to choose an image area
5
If the Fn button is pressed when the command dials are rotated, changes
1 step spd/ to shutter speed (modes S and M) and aperture (modes A and M) are made
v
aperture
in increments of 1 EV, regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting
Choose non-
CPU lens
number
Active
Press the Fn button and rotate a command dial to choose a lens number
w
Press the Fn button and rotate a command dial to adjust Active D-Lighting
y
HDR (high
dynamic
range)
Keeping the Fn button pressed, rotate the main command dial to choose
z
No operation is performed when the command dials are rotated while the
Fn button is pressed.
None
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
f3: Assign Preview Button
Choose the role played by the depth-of-field preview button,
either by itself (Press) or when used in combination with the
command dials (Press + command dials). The options
default options for Press and Press + command dials are
Preview and None, respectively.
U
255
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
f4: Assign AE-L/AF-L Button
Choose the role played by the A AE-L/AF-L button, either by itself
(Press) or when used in combination with the command dials
(Press + command dials).
❚❚Press
Selecting Press displays the following options:
Option
Description
AE/AF lock
Focus and exposure lock while the A AE-L/AF-L button is pressed.
B
C
AE lock only Exposure locks while the A AE-L/AF-L button is pressed.
AE lock
(Hold)
Exposure locks when the A AE-L/AF-L button is pressed, and remains locked
until the button is pressed a second time or the standby timer expires.
E
F
AF lock only Focus locks while the A AE-L/AF-L button is pressed.
The A AE-L/AF-L button initiates autofocus. The shutter-release button can
not be used to focus.
A
AF-ON
Press the A AE-L/AF-L button to lock flash value (built-in flash and
lock.
FV lock
None
r
Pressing the button has no effect.
❚❚Press + Command Dials
Selecting Press + command dials displays the following options:
Option
Choose
Description
Press the A AE-L/AF-L button and rotate a command dial to choose an
5
Choose non-
CPU lens
number
Press the A AE-L/AF-L button and rotate a command dial to choose a lens
w
No operation is performed when the command dials are rotated while the
A AE-L/AF-L button is pressed.
None
U
256
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
This option controls the operation of the main and sub-command dials.
f5: Customize Command Dials
•
Reverse rotation: Reverse the direction of rotation of the
command dials when they are used to make adjustments to
Exposure compensation and/or Shutter speed/aperture.
Highlight options and press 2 to select or deselect, then
press J. This setting also applies to the command dials for
the MB-D15.
•
Change main/sub: If Off is selected, the main command dial
controls shutter speed and the sub-command dial controls
aperture. Select On (Mode A) to use the main command dial
to select aperture in shooting mode A, On to use the main
command dial to select aperture in modes A and M and the
sub-command dial to select shutter speed in modes S and M.
This setting also applies to the command dials for the MB-D15.
Aperture setting: If Sub-command dial is selected, aperture can only be adjusted
with the sub-command dial (or with the main command dial if On is selected for
Change main/sub). If Aperture ring is selected, aperture can only be adjusted
with the lens aperture ring and the camera aperture display will show aperture in
increments of 1 EV (aperture for type G lenses is still set using the sub-command
dial). Note that regardless of the setting chosen, the aperture ring must be used to
adjust aperture when a non-CPU lens is attached.
Menus and playback: If Off is selected, the multi selector is used to choose the picture
displayed during full-frame playback, highlight thumbnails, and navigate menus.
If On or On (image review excluded) is selected, the main command dial can be
used to choose the picture displayed during full-frame playback, move the cursor
left or right during thumbnail playback, and move the menu highlight bar up or
down. The sub-command dial is used to display additional photo information in
full-frame playback and to move the cursor up or down during thumbnail
playback. Select On (image review excluded) to prevent the command dials from
being used for playback during image review. While menus are displayed, rotating
the sub-command dial right displays the sub-menu for the selected option, while
rotating it left displays the previous menu. To make a selection, press 2 or J.
•
•
U
257
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
f6: Release Button to Use Dial
If Yes is selected, adjustments that are normally made by rotating the command dial
while holding a button can instead be made by rotating the command dial after the
button is released (setting ends when the button is pressed again, the shutter-release
button is pressed halfway, or the standby timer expires). The following buttons are
affected: the E, M (Y), W (S), X (T), L (U), AF-mode, Z (Q), or D, Fn,
preview, and A AE-L/AF-L buttons. The Fn and preview buttons are only affected when
assigned Choose image area, Choose non-CPU lens number, Active D-Lighting,
or HDR (high dynamic range) using Custom Setting f2 (Assign Fn button) or f3
(Assign preview button). The A AE-L/AF-L button is only affected when assigned
Choose image area or Choose non-CPU lens number using Custom Setting f4
(Assign AE-L/AF-L button). Note that the standby timer will not expire when No
limit is selected for Custom Setting c2 (Standby timer).
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
f7: Slot Empty Release Lock
Selecting Enable release allows the shutter to be released when no memory card is
inserted, although no pictures will be recorded (they will however be displayed in the
monitor in demo mode). If Release locked is selected, the shutter-release button is
only enabled when a memory card is inserted in the camera.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
f8: Reverse Indicators
If
(W) is selected, the exposure indicators in the control panel,
viewfinder, and information display are displayed with negative values on the left
and positive values on the right. Select
(V) to display positive
values on the left and negative values on the right.
U
258
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
f9: Assign MB-D15 4 Button
Choose the function assigned to the A AE-L/AF-L
button on the optional MB-D15 battery pack.
Option
Description
B
C
AE/AF lock
AE lock only
Focus and exposure lock while the MB-D15 A AE-L/AF-L button is pressed.
Exposure locks while the MB-D15 A AE-L/AF-L button is pressed.
Exposure locks when the MB-D15 A AE-L/AF-L button is pressed, and
E AE lock (Hold) remains locked until the button is pressed a second time or the standby
timer expires.
F
AF lock only
AF-ON
Focus locks while the MB-D15 A AE-L/AF-L button is pressed.
Pressing the MB-D15 A AE-L/AF-L button initiates autofocus. The shutter-
release button can not be used to focus.
A
Press the MB-D15 A AE-L/AF-L button to lock flash value (built-in flash and
FV lock.
FV lock
r
Same as Fn
button
The MB-D15 A AE-L/AF-L button performs the function selected for
G
g: Movie
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
g1: Assign Fn Button
Choose the role played by the Fn button during movie live view (the default option is
None).
Option
Description
Press the button to display information on shutter speed, aperture, and
other photo settings in place of movie recording information. Press again
Focus and exposure lock while the button is pressed.
Exposure locks while the button is pressed.
View photo
shooting info
s
B
C
AE/AF lock
AE lock only
Exposure locks when the button is pressed, and remains locked until the
button is pressed a second time or the standby timer expires.
Focus locks while the button is pressed.
Pressing the button initiates autofocus. The shutter-release button can
not be used to focus.
E AE lock (Hold)
F
AF lock only
AF-ON
A
None
Pressing the button has no effect.
U
259
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
g2: Assign Preview Button
Choose the role played by the depth-of-field preview button during movie live view.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
g3: Assign AE-L/AF-L Button
Choose the role played by the A AE-L/AF-L button during movie live view. The options
setting is AE/AF lock.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
g4: Assign Shutter Button
Choose the role played by pressing the shutter-release button when 1 is selected
with the live view selector.
Option
Description
Press the shutter-release button all the way down to end movie recording
and take a photograph with an aspect ratio of 16 : 9 (for information on
image size, see page 167).
C
Take photos
Press the shutter-release button halfway to start movie live view. You can
then press the shutter-release button halfway to focus (autofocus mode
only) and press it all the way down to start or end recording. To end
movie live view, press the a button. The shutter-release button on an
used to start movie live view and to start and end movie recording; the
optional ML-L3 remote control, however, can not be used to record
movies; the shutter-release button on the ML-L3 has no effect.
1
Record movies
A Record Movies
If this option is selected, the shutter-release button can not be used for such functions as
interval-timer photography or recording Image Dust Off reference data when the live view
R button, and photo shooting info can not be displayed using buttons to which View
button), g2 (Assign preview button), or g3 (Assign AE-L/AF-L button). Select Take
photos to use these functions.
U
260
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
To display the setup menu, press G and select the B (setup menu) tab.
G button
The setup menu contains the following options:
Option
Format memory card
0
Option
0
Image comment
Save user settings
Reset user settings
Monitor brightness
Clean image sensor
Lock mirror up for cleaning 1
Image Dust Off ref photo
Flicker reduction
Time zone and date
Language
Auto image rotation
Battery info
Copyright information
Save/load settings
Virtual horizon
Non-CPU lens data
AF fine-tune
HDMI
GPS
Wireless mobile adapter
Network
Eye-Fi upload 2
Firmware version
1 Not available when battery is low.
A See Also
Menu defaults are listed on page 326.
U
261
G button ➜ B setup menu
Format Memory Card
To begin formatting, choose a memory card slot and select Yes.
Note that formatting permanently deletes all pictures and other
data on the card in the selected slot. Before formatting, be sure to
make backup copies as required.
D During Formatting
Do not turn the camera off or remove memory cards during formatting.
A Two-Button Format
Memory cards can also be formatted by pressing the O (Q) and Z (Q) buttons for more
G button ➜ B setup menu
Monitor Brightness
Press 1 or 3 to choose monitor brightness for playback, menus,
and the information display. Choose higher values for increased
brightness, lower values for reduced brightness.
A Monitor Brightness
Values of +4 or higher make the monitor easier to read in bright light but also result in yellow
colors taking on a greenish cast. Choose lower values for accurate color reproduction.
A See Also
For information on adjusting monitor brightness in live view, see page 157.
U
262
G button ➜ B setup menu
Image Dust Off Ref Photo
Acquire reference data for the Image Dust Off option in Capture NX 2 (available
separately; for more information, see the Capture NX 2 manual).
Image Dust Off ref photo is available only when a CPU lens is mounted on the
camera. A lens with a focal length of at least 50 mm is recommended. When using a
zoom lens, zoom all the way in.
1 Choose a start option.
Highlight one of the following options and press
J. To exit without acquiring Image Dust Off
reference data, press G.
•
•
Start: The message shown at right will be
displayed and “rEF” will appear in the
viewfinder and control panel displays.
Clean sensor and then start: Select this option to
clean the image sensor before starting. The
message shown at right will be displayed and
“rEF” will appear in the viewfinder and control
panel displays when cleaning is complete.
2 Frame a featureless white object in the viewfinder.
With the lens about ten centimeters (four inches) from a well-lit, featureless
white object, frame the object so that it fills the viewfinder and then press the
shutter-release button halfway.
In autofocus mode, focus will automatically be set to infinity; in manual focus
mode, set focus to infinity manually.
U
263
3 Acquire dust off reference data.
Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to acquire Image Dust
Off reference data. The monitor turns off when the shutter-release button is
pressed. Note that noise reduction will be performed if the subject is poorly lit,
increasing recording times.
If the reference object is too bright or too dark, the camera
may be unable to acquire Image Dust Off reference data
and the message shown at right will be displayed. Choose
another reference object and repeat the process from
Step 1.
D Image Sensor Cleaning
Dust off reference data recorded before image sensor cleaning is performed can not be used
with photographs taken after image sensor cleaning is performed. Select Clean sensor and
then start only if the dust off reference data will not be used with existing photographs.
A Image Dust Off Reference Data
The same reference data can be used for photographs taken with
different lenses or at different apertures. Reference images can not
be viewed using computer imaging software. A grid pattern is
displayed when reference images are viewed on the camera.
G button ➜ B setup menu
Flicker Reduction
Reduce flicker and banding when shooting under fluorescent or mercury-vapor
lighting during live view or movie recording. Choose Auto to allow the camera to
automatically choose the correct frequency, or manually match the frequency to that
of the local AC power supply.
A Flicker Reduction
If Auto fails to produce the desired results and you are unsure as to the frequency of the local
power supply, test both the 50 and 60 Hz options and choose the one that produces the best
results. Flicker reduction may not produce the desired results if the subject is very bright, in
which case you should select mode A or M and choose a smaller aperture (higher f-number)
before starting live view.
U
264
G button ➜ B setup menu
Time Zone and Date
Change time zones, set the camera clock, choose the date display order, and turn
Option
Description
Choose a time zone. The camera clock is automatically set to the time in
the new time zone.
Time zone
Set the camera clock. If the clock is not set, a flashing B icon will appear
in the information display.
Choose the order in which the day, month, and year are displayed.
Turn daylight saving time on or off. The camera clock will automatically be
advanced or set back one hour. The default setting is Off.
Date and time
Date format
Daylight saving time
G button ➜ B setup menu
Language
Choose a language for camera menus and messages.
G button ➜ B setup menu
Auto Image Rotation
Photographs taken while On is selected contain information on camera orientation,
following orientations are recorded:
Landscape (wide)
orientation
Camera rotated 90°
clockwise
Camera rotated 90°
counter-clockwise
Camera orientation is not recorded when Off is selected. Choose this option when
panning or taking photographs with the lens pointing up or down.
A Rotate Tall
To automatically rotate “tall” (portrait-orientation) photographs for display during playback,
U
265
G button ➜ B setup menu
Battery Info
View information on the battery currently inserted in the
camera.
Item
Description
Charge
The current battery level expressed as a percentage.
The number of times the shutter has been released with the current battery
since the battery was last charged. Note that the camera may sometimes
release the shutter without recording a photograph, for example when
measuring preset white balance.
A five-level display showing battery age. 0 (k) indicates that battery
performance is unimpaired, 4 (l) that the battery has reached the end of its
charging life and should be replaced. Note that batteries charged at
temperatures under about 5 °C (41 °F) may show a temporary drop in
charging life; the battery age display will however return to normal once the
battery has been recharged at a temperature of about 20 °C (68 °F) or higher.
No. of shots
Battery age
A The MB-D15 Battery Pack
The display for the MB-D15 battery pack is shown at right. If AA
batteries are used, the battery level will be shown by a battery level
icon; other items will not be displayed.
G button ➜ B setup menu
Image Comment
Add a comment to new photographs as they are taken. Comments can be viewed as
comment is also visible on the shooting data page in the photo information display
up to 36 characters long.
• Attach comment: Select this option to attach the comment
to all subsequent photographs. Attach comment can be
turned on and off by highlighting it and pressing 2. After
choosing the desired setting, press J to exit.
U
266
G button ➜ B setup menu
Copyright Information
Add copyright information to new photographs as they are taken. Copyright
information is included in the shooting data shown in the photo information display
names can be up to 36 characters long.
Copyright holder names can be up to 54 characters long.
• Attach copyright information: Select this option to attach
copyright information to all subsequent photographs.
Attach copyright information can be turned on and off by
highlighting it and pressing 2. After choosing the desired
setting, press J to exit.
D Copyright Information
To prevent unauthorized use of the artist or copyright holder names, make sure that Attach
copyright information is not selected and that the Artist and Copyright fields are blank
before lending or transferring the camera to another person. Nikon does not accept liability
for any damages or disputes arising from the use of the Copyright information option.
U
267
G button ➜ B setup menu
Save/Load Settings
Select Save settings to save the following settings to the memory card in Slot 1
among D7100 cameras.
Menu
Option
Playback display options
Image review
Menu
Option
Custom All Custom Settings except Reset
settings custom settings
Clean image sensor
Playback
After delete
Flicker reduction
Rotate tall
Time zone and date (excepting
date and time)
Language
File naming
Role played by card in Slot 2
Image quality
Auto image rotation
Image size
Image comment
Copyright information
Non-CPU lens data
HDMI
Setup
Image area
JPEG compression
NEF (RAW) recording
White balance (with fine-tuning
and presets d-1–d-6)
Set Picture Control
Color space
GPS
Shooting
Wireless mobile adapter
Eye-Fi upload
All My Menu items
Active D-Lighting
Auto distortion control
Long exposure NR
High ISO NR
My Menu/
Recent All recent settings
Settings
Choose tab
ISO sensitivity settings
Movie settings
Settings saved using this model of camera can be restored by selecting Load
settings. Note that Save/load settings is only available when a memory card is
inserted in the camera, and that the Load settings option is only available if the card
contains saved settings.
A Saved Settings
Settings are saved in a file named NCSETUPB. The camera will not be able to load settings if
the file name is changed.
U
268
G button ➜ B setup menu
Virtual Horizon
Display a virtual horizon based on information from the camera tilt sensor. If the
camera is tilted neither left nor right, the roll reference line will turn green. Each
division is equivalent to 5°.
Camera level
Camera tilted left or
right
D Tilting the Camera
The virtual horizon display is not accurate when the camera is tilted at a sharp angle forward
or back. If the camera is unable to measure tilt, the amount of tilt will not be displayed.
A See Also
For information on viewing a virtual horizon in the viewfinder, see Custom Setting f2 (Assign
U
269
G button ➜ B setup menu
AF Fine-tune
Fine-tune focus for up to 12 lens types. AF tuning is not recommended in most
situations and may interfere with normal focus; use only when required.
Option
AF fine-tune
(On/Off)
Description
•
•
On: Turn AF tuning on.
Off: Turn AF tuning off.
Move focal
point away
from camera.
Tune AF for the current lens (CPU lenses only).
Press 1 or 3 to choose a value between +20 and
–20. Values for up to 12 lens types can be stored.
Only one value can be stored for each type of lens.
Current
value
Saved value
Default
Choose the AF tuning value used when no
previously saved value exists for the current lens
(CPU lenses only).
Move focal
point toward value
camera.
Previous
List previously saved AF tuning values. To delete a lens from the list, highlight
the desired lens and press O (Q). To change a lens identifier (for example, to
choose an identifier that is the same as the last two digits of the lens serial
number to distinguish it from other lenses of the same type in light of the fact
that Saved value can be used with only one lens of each type), highlight the
desired lens and press 2.
List saved
values
The menu shown at right will be displayed; press 1 or 3
to choose an identifier and press J to save changes and
exit.
D AF Tuning
The camera may be unable to focus at minimum range or at infinity when AF tuning is
applied.
D Live View
A Saved Value
Only one value can be stored for each type of lens. If a teleconverter is used, separate values
can be stored for each combination of lens and teleconverter.
U
270
G button ➜ B setup menu
Wireless Mobile Adapter
Choose whether the camera will establish wireless connections with smart devices
USB connector.
Option
Enable
Description
Enable wireless connections to smart devices running the Wireless Mobile
Utility.
Disable wireless connections to smart devices. Choose this option in
locations where the use of wireless devices is prohibited. Selecting this
option also reduces the drain on the camera battery.
Disable
U
271
G button ➜ B setup menu
Eye-Fi Upload
This option is displayed only when an Eye-Fi memory card (available separately from
third-party suppliers) is inserted in the camera. Choose Enable to upload
photographs to a preselected destination (if two Eye-Fi cards are inserted, you can
choose the card used for upload). Note that pictures will not be uploaded if signal
strength is insufficient.
Observe all local laws concerning wireless devices and choose Disable where
wireless devices are prohibited.
When an Eye-Fi card is inserted, its status is indicated by an icon
in the information display:
• d: Eye-Fi upload disabled.
• e: Eye-Fi upload enabled but no pictures available for upload.
• f (static): Eye-Fi upload enabled; waiting to begin upload.
• f (animated): Eye-Fi upload enabled; uploading data.
• g: Error — camera can not control Eye-Fi card. If a flashing W appears in the
pictures can be taken normally but you may be unable to change Eye-Fi settings.
D Eye-Fi Cards
Eye-Fi cards may emit wireless signals when Disable is selected. If a warning is displayed in
See the manual provided with the Eye-Fi card, and direct any inquiries to the manufacturer.
The camera can be used to turn Eye-Fi cards on and off, but may not support other Eye-Fi
functions.
Some cards may not be available in some countries or regions; consult the manufacturer for
more information. Eye-Fi cards are for use only in the country of purchase. Be sure the Eye-
Fi card firmware has been updated to the latest version.
A Using Eye-Fi Cards in Ad Hoc Mode
Additional time may be required when connecting using Eye-Fi cards that support ad hoc
G button ➜ B setup menu
Firmware Version
View the current camera firmware version.
U
272
N The Retouch Menu:
Creating Retouched Copies
To display the retouch menu, press G and select the N (retouch menu) tab.
G button
The options in the retouch menu are used to create trimmed or retouched copies of
existing pictures. The retouch menu is only displayed when a memory card
containing photographs is inserted in the camera (note that if the memory card is
being used to store both RAW/NEF and JPEG copies of the same photographs as
processing apply only to the JPEG copies).
Option
0
Option
Straighten
Distortion control
Fisheye
Color outline
Color sketch
0
i
j
k
D-Lighting
e
(
)
Red-eye correction
Trim
Monochrome
Filter effects
l
m
f
g
h
n Color balance
Perspective control
Miniature effect
Selective color
Edit movie
o
7
8
Image overlay 1
NEF (RAW) processing
Resize
i
u
9
&
Quick retouch
p
Side-by-side comparison 2
1 Can only be selected by pressing G and selecting N tab.
2 Only available if P is pressed in full-frame playback when a retouched image or original is
displayed.
D Retouching Copies
Most options can be applied to copies created using other retouch options, although with
the exceptions of Image overlay and Edit movie > Choose start/end point, each option
can be applied only once (note that multiple edits may result in loss of detail). Options that
can not be applied to the current image are grayed out and unavailable.
A Image Quality
Except in the case of copies created with Trim, Image overlay, NEF (RAW) processing, and
Resize, copies created from JPEG images are the same size and quality as the original, while
copies created from NEF (RAW) photos are saved as large fine-quality JPEG images. Size-
priority compression is used when copies are saved in JPEG format.
U
273
Creating Retouched Copies
To create a retouched copy:
1 Select an item in the retouch menu.
Press 1or 3to highlight an item, 2to select.
2 Select a picture.
Highlight a picture and press J (to view the
highlighted picture full screen, press and hold the
X (T) button; to view images in other
press 1).
A Retouch
The camera may not be able to display or retouch images created with other devices.
3 Select retouch options.
For more information, see the section for the
selected item. To exit without creating a
retouched copy, press G.
A Monitor off Delay
The monitor will turn off and the operation will be cancelled if no actions are
performed for a brief period. Any unsaved changes will be lost. To increase the time
the monitor remains on, choose a longer menu display time for Custom Setting c4
4 Create a retouched copy.
Press J to create a retouched copy. Retouched
copies are indicated by a o icon.
U
274
G button ➜ N retouch menu
D-Lighting
D-lighting brightens shadows, making it ideal for dark or backlit photographs.
Before
After
Press 1or 3to choose the amount of correction performed.
The effect can be previewed in the edit display. Press J to copy
the photograph.
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Red-Eye Correction
This option is used to correct “red-eye” caused by the flash, and is available only with
photographs taken using the flash. The photograph selected for red-eye correction
can be previewed in the edit display. Confirm the effects of red-eye correction and
create a copy as described in the following table. Note that red-eye correction may
not always produce the expected results and may in very rare circumstances be
applied to portions of the image that are not affected by red-eye; check the preview
thoroughly before proceeding.
To
Use
Description
Zoom in
X (T)
Press X (T) to zoom in, W (S) to zoom out. While photo is
zoomed in, use multi selector to view areas of image not visible in
monitor. Keep multi selector pressed to scroll rapidly to other areas
of frame. Navigation window is displayed when zoom buttons or
multi selector is pressed; area currently visible in monitor is indicated
by yellow border. Press J to cancel zoom.
Zoom out
W (S)
View other
areas of image
Cancel zoom
Create copy
J
J
If the camera detects red-eye in the selected photograph, a copy will
be created that has been processed to reduce its effects. No copy
will be created if the camera is unable to detect red-eye.
U
276
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Trim
Create a cropped copy of the selected photograph. The
selected photograph is displayed with the selected crop shown
in yellow; create a cropped copy as described in the following
table.
To
Use
Description
Reduce size of crop
Increase size of crop
W (S) Press W (S) to reduce the size of the crop.
X (T) Press X (T) to increase the size of the crop.
Rotate the main command dial to switch between aspect
ratios of 3 : 2, 4 : 3, 5 : 4, 1 : 1, and 16 : 9.
Change crop aspect ratio
Use multi selector to position the crop. Press and hold to
move the crop rapidly to the desired position.
Position crop
Create copy
J
Save the current crop as a separate file.
A Trim: Image Quality and Size
Copies created from NEF (RAW) or NEF (RAW) + JPEG photos have an
photos have the same image quality as the original. The size of the
copy varies with crop size and aspect ratio and appears at upper left
in the crop display.
A Viewing Cropped Copies
Playback zoom may not be available when cropped copies are displayed.
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Monochrome
Copy photographs in Black-and-white, Sepia, or
Cyanotype (blue and white monochrome).
Selecting Sepia or Cyanotype displays a preview of
the selected image; press 1to increase color
saturation, 3to decrease. Press J to create a
monochrome copy.
Increase
saturation
Decrease
saturation
U
277
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Filter Effects
Choose from the following filter effects. After adjusting filter effects as described
below, press J to copy the photograph.
Option
Description
Creates the effect of a skylight filter, making the
picture less blue. The effect can be previewed in the
monitor as shown at right.
Skylight
Creates a copy with warm tone filter effects, giving the
Warm filter copy a “warm” red cast. The effect can be previewed in
the monitor.
Red intensifier
Intensify reds (Red intensifier), greens (Green
Green intensifier intensifier), or blues (Blue intensifier). Press 1to
increase the effect, 3to decrease.
Blue intensifier
Add starburst effects to light sources.
•
•
Number of points: Choose from four, six, or eight.
Filter amount: Choose the brightness of the light
sources affected.
Cross screen
•
•
•
Filter angle: Choose the angle of the points.
Length of points: Choose the length of points.
Confirm: Preview the effects of the filter as shown at
right. Press X (T) to preview the copy full frame.
Save: Create a retouched copy.
•
Add a soft filter effect. Press 1or 3to choose the filter
strength.
Soft
U
278
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Color Balance
Use the multi selector to create a copy with modified color
balance as shown below. The effect is displayed in the monitor
the distribution of tones in the copy.
Increase amount of green
Create retouched copy
Increase amount of blue
Increase amount of amber
Increase amount of magenta
A Zoom
To zoom in on the image displayed in the monitor, press X (T). The
histogram will be updated to show data only for the portion of the
image displayed in the monitor. While the image is zoomed in, press
L (U) to toggle back and forth between color balance and zoom.
When zoom is selected, you can zoom in and out with the X (T)
and W (S) and scroll the image with the multi selector.
U
279
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Image Overlay
Image overlay combines two existing NEF (RAW) photographs to create a single
picture that is saved separately from the originals; the results, which make use of RAW
data from the camera image sensor, are noticeably better than overlays created in an
imaging application. The new picture is saved at current image quality and size
are available). To create a NEF (RAW) copy, choose an image quality of NEF (RAW).
+
1 Select Image overlay.
Highlight Image overlay in the retouch menu
and press 2.
The dialog shown at right will be displayed, with
Image 1 highlighted; press J to display a list of
the NEF pictures created with this camera.
2 Select the first image.
Use the multi selector to highlight the first
photograph in the overlay. To view the
highlighted photograph full frame, press and
hold the X (T) button (to view images in
D and press 1). Press J to select the highlighted photograph and return to
the preview display.
3 Select the second image.
The selected image will appear as Image 1. Highlight Image 2 and press J,
then select the second photo as described in Step 2.
U
280
4 Adjust gain.
Highlight Image 1 or Image 2 and optimize
exposure for the overlay by pressing 1or 3to
select gain from values between 0.1 and 2.0.
Repeat for the second image. The default value is
1.0; select 0.5 to halve gain or 2.0 to double it. The
effects are visible in the Preview column.
5 Preview the overlay.
Press 4or 2to place the cursor in the Preview
column and press 1or 3to highlight Overlay.
Press J to preview the overlay as shown at right
(to save the overlay without displaying a preview,
select Save). To return to Step 4 and select new
photos or adjust gain, press W (S).
6 Save the overlay.
Press J while the preview is displayed to save the
overlay. After an overlay is created, the resulting
image will be displayed full-frame in the monitor.
D Image Overlay
Only NEF (RAW) photographs with the same image area and bit depth can be combined.
The overlay has the same photo info (including date of recording, metering, shutter speed,
aperture, shooting mode, exposure compensation, focal length, and image orientation), and
values for white balance and Picture Control as the photograph selected for Image 1. The
current image comment is appended to the overlay when it is saved; copyright information,
however, is not copied. Overlays saved in NEF (RAW) format use the compression selected
for Type in the NEF (RAW) recording menu and have the same bit depth as the original
images; JPEG overlays are saved using size-priority compression.
U
281
G button ➜ N retouch menu
NEF (RAW) Processing
Create JPEG copies of NEF (RAW) photographs.
1 Select NEF (RAW) processing.
Highlight NEF (RAW) processing in the retouch
menu and press 2to display a picture selection
dialog listing only NEF (RAW) images created with
this camera.
2 Select a photograph.
Highlight a photograph (to view the highlighted
photograph full frame, press and hold the X
(T) button; to view images in other locations
Press J to select the highlighted photograph
and proceed to the next step.
3 Choose settings for the JPEG copy.
Adjust the settings listed below. Note that white balance is not available with
multiple exposures or pictures created with image overlay and that exposure
compensation can only be set to values between –2 and +2 EV. The Picture
Control grid is not displayed when Picture Controls are adjusted.
U
282
4 Copy the photograph.
Highlight EXE and press J to create a JPEG copy
of the selected photograph (to exit without
copying the photograph, press the G button).
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Resize
Create small copies of selected photographs. Photographs with an aspect ratio of
1 Select Resize.
To resize selected images, press G to display
the menus and select Resize in the retouch
menu.
2 Choose a destination.
If two memory cards are inserted, you can choose
a destination for the resized copies by
highlighting Choose destination and pressing 2
(if only one card is inserted, proceed to Step 3).
The menu shown at right will be displayed;
highlight a card slot and press J.
3 Choose a size.
Highlight Choose size and press 2.
The options shown at right will be displayed;
highlight an option and press J.
U
283
4 Choose pictures.
Highlight Select image and press 2.
The dialog shown at right will be displayed;
highlight pictures using the multi selector and
press the W (S) button to select or deselect (to
view the highlighted picture full screen, press and
hold the X (T) button; to view images in
D and press 1). Selected pictures are marked
by a 8 icon. Press J when the selection is
complete.
5 Save the resized copies.
A confirmation dialog will be displayed. Highlight Yes and
press J to save the resized copies.
A Viewing Resized Copies
Playback zoom may not be available when resized copies are displayed.
A Image Quality
JPEG fine; copies created from JPEG photos have the same image quality as the original.
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Quick Retouch
Create copies with enhanced saturation and contrast.
D-Lighting is applied as required to brighten dark or backlit
subjects.
Press 1or 3to choose the amount of enhancement. The effect
can be previewed in the edit display. Press J to copy the
photograph.
U
284
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Straighten
Create a straightened copy of the selected image. Press 2to
rotate the image clockwise by up to five degrees in increments
of approximately 0.25 degrees, 4to rotate it counterclockwise
(the effect can be previewed in the edit display; note that edges
of the image will be trimmed to create a square copy). Press J
to copy the photograph, or press K to exit to playback without
creating a copy.
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Distortion Control
Create copies with reduced peripheral distortion. Select Auto
to let the camera correct distortion automatically and then
make fine adjustments using the multi selector, or select
Manual to reduce distortion manually (note that Auto is not
available with photos taken using auto distortion control; see
cushion distortion (the effect can be previewed in the edit display; note that greater
amounts of distortion control result in more of the edges being cropped out). Press
J to copy the photograph, or press K to exit to playback without creating a copy.
A Auto
Auto is for use only with pictures taken with type G and D lenses (PC, fisheye, and certain
other lenses excluded). Results are not guaranteed with other lenses.
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Fisheye
Create copies that appear to have been taken with a fisheye
lens. Press 2to increase the effect (this also increases the
amount of that will be cropped out at the edges of the image),
4to reduce it. The effect can be previewed in the edit display.
Press J to copy the photograph, or press K to exit to playback
without creating a copy.
U
285
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Color Outline
Create an outline copy of a photograph to use as a base for
painting. The effect can be previewed in the edit display. Press
J to copy the photograph.
Before
After
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Color Sketch
Create a copy of a photograph that resembles a sketch made
with colored pencils. Press 1or 3to highlight Vividness or
Outlines and press 4or 2to change. Vividness can be
increased to make colors more saturated, or decreased for a
washed-out, monochromatic effect, while outlines can be made
thicker or thinner. Thicker outlines makes colors more
saturated. The results can be previewed in the edit display. Press J to copy the
photograph, or press K to exit to playback without creating a copy.
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Perspective Control
Create copies that reduce the effects of perspective taken from
the base of a tall object. Use the multi selector to adjust
perspective (note that greater amounts of perspective control
result in more of the edges being cropped out). The results can
be previewed in the edit display. Press J to copy the
photograph, or press K to exit to playback without creating a
copy.
Before
After
U
286
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Miniature Effect
Create a copy that appears to be a photo of a diorama. Works best with photos taken
from a high vantage point. The area that will be in focus in the copy is indicated by a
yellow frame.
To
Press
Description
Choose
orientation
W (S) Press W (S) to choose orientation of area that is in focus.
If area of effect is in wide orientation, press 1
or 3to position frame showing area of copy
that will be in focus.
Choose
position
Area in focus
If area of effect is in tall orientation, press 4or
2to position frame showing area of copy
that will be in focus.
If area of effect is in wide orientation, press 4or 2to choose
height.
Choose size
If area of effect is in tall orientation, press 1or 3to choose width.
Preview copy X (T) Preview copy.
Cancel
Create copy
K
Exit to full-frame playback without creating copy.
Create copy.
J
U
287
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Selective Color
Create a copy in which only selected hues appear in color.
1 Select Selective color.
Highlight Selective color in the retouch
menu and press 2to display a picture
selection dialog.
2 Select a photograph.
Highlight a photograph (to view the
highlighted photograph full frame, press
and hold the X (T) button; to view
images in other locations as described on
select the highlighted photograph and proceed to the next step.
3 Select a color.
Selected color
Use the multi selector to position the cursor
over an object and press the A AE-L/AF-L
button to select the color of the object as
one that will remain in the final copy (the
camera may have difficulty detecting
unsaturated colors; choose a saturated
color). To zoom in on the picture for precise
A AE-L/AF-L button
color selection, press X (T). Press W (S) to zoom out.
4 Highlight the color range.
Color range
Rotate the main command dial to highlight
the color range for the selected color.
U
288
5 Choose the color range.
Press 1or 3to increase or decrease the
range of similar hues that will be included in
the final photograph. Choose from values
between 1 and 7; note that higher values
may include hues from other colors. The
effect can be previewed in the edit display.
6 Select additional colors.
To select additional colors, rotate the main
command dial to highlight another of the
three color boxes at the top of the display
and repeat Steps 3–5 to select another color.
Repeat for a third color if desired (To
deselect the highlighted color, press O/Q, or press and hold O/Q to remove all
colors. A confirmation dialog will be displayed; select Yes).
7 Save the edited copy.
Press J to copy the photograph.
U
289
Side-by-side Comparison
Compare retouched copies to the original photographs. This option is only available
if P button is pressed to display the retouch menu when a copy or original is played
back full frame.
1 Select a picture.
In full-frame playback, select a retouched
copy (shown by a o icon) or a photograph
that has been retouched and press P.
P button
2 Select Side-by-side comparison.
Highlight Side-by-side comparison and press
J.
3 Compare the copy with the original.
Options used to create
copy
The source image is displayed on the left, the
retouched copy on the right, with the options
used to create the copy listed at the top of the
display. Press 4or 2to switch between the
source image and the retouched copy. To view
the highlighted picture full frame, press and hold
the X (T) button. If the copy was created
from two source images using Image overlay, or
if the source has been copied multiple times,
Source Retouched
image
copy
press 1or 3to view the other source images or copies. To exit to playback
mode, press the K button, or press J to exit to playback with the highlighted
image selected.
D Side-by-side Comparisons
The source image will not be displayed if the copy was created from a photograph that was
is on a card in a different slot from that used when the image was created.
U
290
O My Menu/m Recent Settings
To display My Menu, press G and select the O (My Menu) tab.
G button
The My Menu option can be used to create and edit a customized list of options from
the playback, shooting, Custom Settings, setup, and retouch menus for quick access
(up to 20 items). If desired, recent settings can be displayed in place of My Menu
Options can be added, deleted, and reordered as described below.
❚❚Adding Options to My Menu
1 Select Add items.
In My Menu (O), highlight Add items and
press 2.
2 Select a menu.
Highlight the name of the menu containing
the option you wish to add and press 2.
3 Select an item.
Highlight the desired menu item and press
J.
4 Position the new item.
Press 1or 3to move the new item up or
down in My Menu. Press J to add the new
item.
U
291
5 Add more items.
The items currently displayed in My Menu
are indicated by a check mark. Items
indicated by a V icon can not be selected.
Repeat Steps 1–4 to select additional items.
❚❚Deleting Options from My Menu
1 Select Remove items.
In My Menu (O), highlight Remove items and press 2.
2 Select items.
Highlight items and press 2to select or
deselect. Selected items are indicated by a
check mark.
3 Delete the selected items.
Press J. A confirmation dialog will be
displayed; press J again to delete the
selected items.
A Deleting Items in My Menu
To delete the item currently highlighted in My Menu, press the O (Q) button. A
confirmation dialog will be displayed; press O (Q) again to remove the selected item from
My Menu.
U
292
❚❚Reordering Options in My Menu
1 Select Rank items.
In My Menu (O), highlight Rank items and press 2.
2 Select an item.
Highlight the item you wish to move and
press J.
3 Position the item.
Press 1or 3to move the item up or down
in My Menu and press J. Repeat Steps 2–3
to reposition additional items.
4 Exit to My Menu.
Press the G button to return to My Menu.
G button
U
293
Recent Settings
To display the twenty most recently used settings, select m Recent settings for
O My Menu > Choose tab.
1 Select Choose tab.
In My Menu (O), highlight Choose tab and
press 2.
2 Select m Recent settings.
Highlight m Recent settings and press J.
The name of the menu will change from “MY
MENU” to “RECENT SETTINGS.”
Menu items will be added to the top of the recent settings menu as they are used. To
view My Menu again, select O My Menu for m Recent settings > Choose tab.
A Removing Items from the Recent Settings Menu
U
To remove an item from the recent settings menu, highlight it and press the O (Q) button.
A confirmation dialog will be displayed; press O (Q) again to delete the selected item.
294
Technical Notes
n
Read this chapter for information on compatible accessories, cleaning and storing
the camera, and what to do if an error message is displayed or you encounter
problems using the camera.
Compatible Lenses
Camera setting
Shooting
mode
Focus mode
Metering system
L
M
M(with electronic
rangefinder)
P
S
A
M
AF
M
N
Lens/accessory
Type G or D AF NIKKOR 2
3D Color
3
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
AF-S, AF-I NIKKOR
PC-E NIKKOR series
PC Micro 85mm f/2.8D4
AF-S / AF-I Teleconverter7
Other AF NIKKOR (except lenses for F3AF)
AI-P NIKKOR
5
5
5
5
3,5
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
—
—
—
✔
✔
✔
5
6
3,5
3
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
8
8
3
3
✔
✔
9
—
✔
✔
AI-, AI-modified, NIKKOR or Nikon Series E
9
12
13
14
—
✔
✔
—
✔
—
✔
✔
lenses11
15
12
16
12
20
Medical-NIKKOR 120mm f/4
Reflex-NIKKOR
PC-NIKKOR
AI-type Teleconverter17
PB-6 Bellows Focusing Attachment19
Auto extension rings (PK-series 11A, 12, or 13;
PN-11)
—
—
—
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
—
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
✔
14
—
5
✔
✔
18
13
14
✔
✔
✔
18
✔
—
—
✔
18
12
—
✔
✔
—
✔
—
✔
1 IX-NIKKOR lenses can not be used.
2 Vibration Reduction (VR) supported with VR lenses.
4 The camera’s exposure metering and flash control systems do not work properly when shifting and/or
tilting the lens, or when an aperture other than the maximum aperture is used.
5 Can not be used with shifting or tilting.
6 Manual shooting mode only.
7 Can be used with AF-S and AF-I lenses only (0297). For information on the focus points available for
autofocus and electronic rangefinding, see page 297.
8 When focusing at minimum focus distance with AF 80–200mm f/2.8, AF 35–70mm f/2.8, AF 28–85mm
f/3.5–4.5 <New>, or AF 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5 lens at maximum zoom, in-focus indicator (I) may be
displayed when image on matte screen in viewfinder is not in focus. Adjust focus manually until image
in viewfinder is in focus.
9 With maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster.
n
295
11 Range of rotation for AI 80–200mm f/2.8 ED tripod mount is limited by camera body. Filters can not be
exchanged while AI 200–400mm f/4 ED is mounted on camera.
12 If maximum aperture is specified using Non-CPU lens data (0149), aperture value will be displayed
in viewfinder and control panel.
13 Can be used only if lens focal length and maximum aperture are specified using Non-CPU lens data
14 For improved precision, specify lens focal length and maximum aperture using Non-CPU lens data
15 Can be used in manual mode M at shutter speeds slower than flash sync speed by one step or more.
16 Exposure determined by presetting lens aperture. In mode A, preset aperture using lens aperture ring
before performing AE lock and shifting lens. In mode M, preset aperture using lens aperture ring and
determine exposure before shifting lens.
17 Exposure compensation required when used with AI 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5, AI 35–105mm f/3.5–4.5, AI
35–135mm f/3.5–4.5, or AF-S 80–200mm f/2.8D. See teleconverter manual for details.
18 With maximum effective aperture of f/5.6 or faster.
19 Requires PK-12 or PK-13 auto extension ring. PB-6D may be required depending on camera
orientation.
20 Use preset aperture. In mode A, set aperture using focusing attachment before determining exposure
and taking photograph.
• PF-4 Reprocopy Outfit requires PA-4 Camera Holder.
• Noise in the form of horizontal lines may appear in movies taken with the following lenses at ISO
sensitivities of 6400 or higher; use manual focus or focus lock.
- AF-S Zoom Nikkor 24–85mm f/3.5–4.5G (IF)
- AF-S DX Zoom-Nikkor 18–70mm f/3.5–4.5G IF-ED
A Recognizing CPU and Type G and D Lenses
CPU lenses (particularly types G and D) are recommended, but note that IX-NIKKOR lenses
can not be used. CPU lenses can be identified by the presence of CPU contacts, type G and D
lenses by a letter on the lens barrel. Type G lenses are not equipped with a lens aperture ring.
CPU contacts
Aperture ring
CPU lens
Type G lens
Type D lens
n
296
A The AF-S/AF-I Teleconverter
The AF-S/AF-I teleconverter can be used with the following AF-S and AF-I lenses:
• AF-S NIKKOR 70–200mm f/2.8G ED VR II
• AF-S VR 70–200mm f/2.8G ED
• AF-S 80–200mm f/2.8D ED
• AF-S 300mm f/4D ED
• AF-S NIKKOR 400mm f/2.8G ED VR
• AF-S 400mm f/2.8D ED II
• AF-S VR Micro-Nikkor 105mm f/2.8G IF-ED * • AF-S 400mm f/2.8D ED
• AF-S NIKKOR 200mm f/2G ED VR II
• AF-S VR 200mm f/2G ED
• AF-S NIKKOR 200–400mm f/4G ED VR II
• AF-S VR 200–400mm f/4G ED
• AF-S NIKKOR 300mm f/2.8G ED VR II
• AF-S VR 300mm f/2.8G ED
• AF-S 300mm f/2.8D ED II
• AF-I 400mm f/2.8D ED
• AF-S NIKKOR 500mm f/4G ED VR
• AF-S 500mm f/4D ED II
• AF-S 500mm f/4D ED
• AF-I 500mm f/4D ED
• AF-S NIKKOR 600mm f/4G ED VR
• AF-S 600mm f/4D ED II
• AF-S 600mm f/4D ED
• AF-S 300mm f/2.8D ED
• AF-I 300mm f/2.8D ED
* Autofocus not supported.
• AF-I 600mm f/4D ED
A Autofocus Support
If the combined aperture when the camera is used with an
AF-S teleconverter is slower than f/5.6 but is equal to or faster
than f/8, autofocus and electronic rangefinding will be
TC-17E II/TC-20E/
TC-20E II/TC-20E III
available only with the focus point shown at right and the camera may be unable to focus on
dark or low-contrast subjects. Single point AF is used when 3D-tracking or auto-area AF is
n
297
A Lens f-number
The f-number given in lens names is the maximum aperture of the lens.
A Compatible Non-CPU Lenses
When using non-CPU lenses and accessories, rotate the camera mode dial to A or M and set
aperture using the lens aperture ring. In other modes, the shutter-release is disabled. Non-
lenses, including color matrix metering; if no data are provided, center-weighted metering
will be used in place of color matrix metering, while if the maximum aperture is not
provided, the camera aperture display will show the number of stops from maximum
aperture and the actual aperture value must be read off the lens aperture ring.
D Incompatible Accessories and Non-CPU Lenses
The following can NOT be used with the D7100:
• TC-16AS AF teleconverter
• Non-AI lenses
• AF lenses for the F3AF (AF 80mm f/2.8, AF
200mm f/3.5 ED, AF Teleconverter TC-16)
• Lenses that require the AU-1 focusing unit • PC 28mm f/4 (serial number 180900 or
(400mm f/4.5, 600mm f/5.6, 800mm f/8,
1200mm f/11)
• Fisheye (6mm f/5.6, 7.5mm f/5.6, 8mm f/8,
OP 10mm f/5.6)
• 2.1cm f/4
• Extension Ring K2
• 180–600mm f/8 ED (serial numbers
174041–174180)
• 360–1200mm f/11 ED (serial numbers
174031–174127)
earlier)
• PC 35mm f/2.8 (serial numbers 851001–
906200)
• PC 35mm f/3.5 (old type)
• Reflex 1000mm f/6.3 (old type)
• Reflex 1000mm f/11 (serial numbers
142361–143000)
• Reflex 2000mm f/11 (serial numbers
200111–200310)
• 200–600mm f/9.5 (serial numbers 280001–
300490)
n
298
A The Built-in Flash
The built-in flash can be used with CPU lenses with focal lengths of 16–300 mm, although
in some cases the flash may be unable to entirely light the subject at some ranges or focal
lengths due to shadows cast by the lens, while lenses that block the subject’s view of the
red-eye reduction lamp may interfere with red-eye reduction. Remove lens hoods to
prevent shadows. The flash has a minimum range of 0.6 m (2 ft) and can not be used in the
macro range of macro zoom lenses. When DX (24×16) is selected for Image area, the flash
may be unable to light the entire subject with the following lenses at ranges less than those
given below:
Minimum distance without
Lens
Zoom position
vignetting
18 mm
20 mm
24 mm
18 mm
20 mm
24 mm
24 mm
28–55 mm
18 mm
24–200 mm
28 mm
50–300 mm
24 mm
28 mm
35 mm
20 mm
24 mm
28–35 mm
18 mm
24–35 mm
28 mm
35 mm
1.0 m/3 ft 3 in.
1.0 m/3 ft 3 in.
No vignetting
1.5 m/4 ft 11 in.
1.0 m/3 ft 3 in.
No vignetting
1.0 m/3 ft 3 in.
No vignetting
1.0 m/3 ft 3 in.
No vignetting
1.5 m/4 ft 11 in.
No vignetting
1.5 m/4 ft 11 in.
1.0 m/3 ft 3 in.
No vignetting
3.0 m/9 ft 10 in.
1.0 m/3 ft 3 in.
No vignetting
1.5 m/4 ft 11 in.
No vignetting
1.5 m/4 ft 11 in.
1.0 m/3 ft 3 in.
No vignetting
1.5 m/4 ft 11 in.
No vignetting
AF-S DX NIKKOR 10–24mm f/3.5–4.5G ED
AF-S DX Zoom-Nikkor 12–24mm f/4G IF-ED
AF-S DX Zoom-Nikkor 17–55mm f/2.8G IF-ED
AF-S DX VR Zoom-Nikkor 18–200mm f/3.5–5.6G IF-ED
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–200mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR II
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–300mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR
AF-S NIKKOR 16–35mm f/4G ED VR
AF-S Zoom-Nikkor 17–35mm f/2.8D IF-ED
AF Zoom-Nikkor 18–35mm f/3.5– 4.5D IF-ED
AF-S NIKKOR 24–70mm f/2.8G ED
50–70 mm
28 mm
35–70 mm
When DX (24×16) is selected for Image
area, the flash will be unable to light the
entire subject at all ranges.
AF-S Zoom-Nikkor 28–70mm f/2.8D IF-ED
AF-S NIKKOR 14–24mm f/2.8G ED
n
299
When 1.3× (18×12) is selected for Image area, the flash may be unable to light the entire
subject with the following lenses at ranges less than those given below.
Minimum distance without
Lens
Zoom position
vignetting
AF-S DX NIKKOR 10–24mm f/3.5–4.5G ED
AF-S DX Zoom-Nikkor 12–24mm f/4G IF-ED
15–24 mm
15 mm
18–24 mm
20 mm
24–55 mm
28 mm
50–300 mm
24 mm
20 mm
24 mm
28–35 mm
17 mm
20 mm
No vignetting
1.0 m/3 ft 3 in.
No vignetting
1.0 m/3 ft 3 in.
No vignetting
1.0 m/3 ft 3 in.
No vignetting
3.0 m/9 ft 10 in.
1.5 m/4 ft 11 in.
1.0 m/3 ft 3 in.
No vignetting
1.5 m/4 ft 11 in.
1.0 m/3 ft 3 in.
No vignetting
1.5 m/4 ft 11 in.
1.0 m/3 ft 3 in.
No vignetting
AF-S DX Zoom-Nikkor 17–55mm f/2.8G IF-ED
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–300mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR
AF-S NIKKOR 14–24mm f/2.8G ED
AF-S NIKKOR 16–35mm f/4G ED VR
AF-S Zoom-Nikkor 17–35mm f/2.8D IF-ED
AF-S NIKKOR 24–70mm f/2.8G ED
24–35 mm
24 mm
28 mm
35–70 mm
The built-in flash can also be used with AI-S, AI-, AI-modified NIKKOR, Nikon Series E and
non- CPU lenses with a focal length of 16–300 mm. AI 50–300mm f/4.5, modified AI 50–
300mm f/4.5, AI 50–300mm f/4.5 ED, and AI-S 50–300mm f/4.5 ED lenses must be used at a
zoom position of 70 mm or above.
n
300
D AF-Assist Illumination
AF-assist illumination is not available with the following lenses:
• AF-S NIKKOR 14–24mm f/2.8G ED
• AF-S NIKKOR 200mm f/2G ED VR II
• AF-S VR Nikkor 200mm f/2G IF-ED
• AF-S VR Zoom-Nikkor 200–400mm f/4G
IF-ED
• AF-S NIKKOR 200–400mm f/4G ED VR II
• AF-S NIKKOR 300mm f/2.8G ED VR II
At ranges under 0.7 m (2 ft 4 in.), the following lenses may block the AF-assist illuminator and
interfere with autofocus when lighting is poor:
• AF-S Zoom-Nikkor 17–35mm f/2.8D IF-ED • AF-S NIKKOR 24–85mm f/3.5–4.5G ED VR
• AF-S DX Zoom-Nikkor 17–55mm f/2.8G
IF-ED
• AF Zoom-Nikkor 20–35mm f/2.8D IF
• AF Zoom-Nikkor 24–85mm f/2.8–4D IF
• AF-S VR Zoom-Nikkor 24–120mm
f/3.5–5.6G IF-ED
• AF-S NIKKOR 35mm f/1.4G
• AF Micro-Nikkor 200mm f/4D IF-ED
At ranges under 1.0 m (3 ft 3 in.), the following lenses may block the AF-assist illuminator and
interfere with autofocus when lighting is poor:
• AF-S DX VR Zoom-Nikkor 18–200mm
f/3.5–5.6G IF-ED
• AF-S NIKKOR 24–70mm f/2.8G ED
• AF-S Zoom-Nikkor 28–70mm f/2.8D IF-ED
• AF Zoom Micro Nikkor ED 70–180mm
f/4.5–5.6D
• AF Zoom-Nikkor 24–120mm f/3.5–5.6D IF • AF-S VR Micro-Nikkor 105mm f/2.8G IF-ED
At ranges under 1.5 m (4 ft 11 in.), the following lenses may block the AF-assist illuminator
and interfere with autofocus when lighting is poor:
•
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–300mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR
•
AF-S DX NIKKOR 55–300mm f/4.5–5.6G ED VR
• AF-S NIKKOR 24–120mm f/4G ED VR
• AF-S NIKKOR 70–200mm f/2.8G ED VR II
• AF-S NIKKOR 28–300mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR • AF Zoom-Nikkor 80–200mm f/2.8D ED
At ranges under 2.0 m (6 ft 7 in.), the following lenses may block the AF-assist illuminator and
interfere with autofocus when lighting is poor:
• AF-S VR Zoom-Nikkor ED 70–200mm
f/2.8G (IF)
• AF-S Zoom Nikkor ED 80–200mm f/2.8D
(IF)
• AF-S NIKKOR 70–200mm f/4G ED VR
n
301
A Calculating Angle of View
The size of the area exposed by a 35mm camera is 36 × 24 mm. The size of the area exposed
by the D7100 when DX (24×16) is selected for Image area in the shooting menu, in contrast,
is 23.5 × 15.6 mm, meaning that the angle of view of a 35mm camera is approximately 1.5
times that of the D7100 (when 1.3× (18×12) is selected, the size of the area exposed is
reduced and the angle of view is reduced by a further 1.3×).
Picture size (35mm format)
(36 × 24 mm)
Picture size when DX (24×16) is selected
for Image area (23.5 × 15.6 mm)
Picture size when 1.3× (18×12) is selected
for Image area (18.8 × 12.5 mm)
Picture diagonal
Lens
Angle of view (35mm format)
Angle of view when DX (24×16) is selected for Image area
Angle of view when 1.3× (18×12) is selected for Image area
n
302
Optional Flash Units (Speedlights)
The camera supports the Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS) and can be used with
CLS-compatible flash units. Optional flash units can be attached directly to the
camera accessory shoe as described below. The accessory shoe is equipped with a
safety lock for flash units with a locking pin.
1 Remove the accessory shoe cover.
2 Mount the flash unit on the accessory shoe.
See the manual provided with the flash unit for details.
The built-in flash will not fire when an optional flash unit is
attached.
A The AS-15 Sync Terminal Adapter
When the AS-15 sync terminal adapter (available separately) is mounted on the camera
accessory shoe, flash accessories can be connected via a sync terminal.
D Use Only Nikon Flash Accessories
Use only Nikon flash units. Negative voltages or voltages over 250 V applied to the accessory
shoe could not only prevent normal operation, but damage the sync circuitry of the camera
or flash. Before using a Nikon flash unit not listed in this section, contact a Nikon-authorized
service representative for more information.
n
303
The Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS)
Nikon’s advanced Creative Lighting System (CLS) offers improved communication
between the camera and compatible flash units for improved flash photography.
Refer to the documentation provided with the flash unit for details.
❚❚CLS-Compatible Flash Units
The camera can be used with the following CLS-compatible flash units:
•
The SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, SB-400, and SB-R200:
Flash unit
Feature
SB-910 1
34/111
48/157
SB-900 1
34/111
48/157
SB-800
38/125
53/174
SB-700 1
28/92
39/128
SB-600
30/98
42/138
SB-400 2
21/69
30/98
SB-R200 3
10/33
14/46
ISO 100
ISO 200
Guide No. 4
1 If a color filter is attached to the SB-910, SB-900, or SB-700 when v or N (flash) is selected for white
balance, the camera will automatically detect the filter and adjust white balance appropriately.
2 Wireless flash control is not available with the SB-400.
3 Controlled remotely with built-in flash in commander mode or using optional SB-910, SB-900,
SB-800, or SB-700 flash unit or SU-800 wireless Speedlight commander.
4 m/ft, 20 °C (68 °F), SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, and SB-600 at 35 mm zoom head position; SB-910,
SB-900, and SB-700 with standard illumination.
•
SU-800 Wireless Speedlight Commander: When mounted on a CLS-compatible camera,
the SU-800 can be used as a commander for remote SB-910, SB-900, SB-800,
SB-700, SB-600, or SB-R200 flash units in up to three groups. The SU-800 itself is
not equipped with a flash.
A Guide Number
To calculate the range of the flash at full power, divide the Guide Number by the aperture. If,
for example, the flash unit has a Guide Number of 34 m or 111 ft (ISO 100, 20 °C/68 °F); its
range at an aperture of f/5.6 is 34÷5.6 or about 6.1 meters (or in feet,
111÷5.6=approximately 19 ft 10 in.). For each twofold increase in ISO sensitivity, multiply
the Guide Number by the square root of two (approximately 1.4).
n
304
The following features are available with CLS-compatible flash units:
CLS-compatible flash units
SU-800
SB-910
Close-up
SB-900 SB-800 SB-700 SB-600 Commander photography SB-R200 SB-400
i-TTL balanced fill-flash for
digital SLR 1
Standard i-TTL flash for digital
SLR
z
z
z
z
—
—
—
—
—
—
z
i-TTL
z 2
z 2
z
z 2
z
AA Auto aperture
Non-TTL auto
GN Distance-priority manual
Manual
RPT Repeating flash
Remote flash control
i-TTL i-TTL
z 3
z 3
z
z
z
z
z
—
z 5
z
z
z
z
z
z 5
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
—
z
z 3
z 3
z
z
z
z
z
—
z 5
z
z
z
z
z
z 5
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
—
—
—
—
z
z
—
z
z
z
—
—
z
—
z
z
—
—
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
—
z
—
—
—
z
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
z
z
—
—
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
z
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
z
z
z
—
z
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
z
—
z
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
z
z
—
—
z
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
z
z
—
—
z
—
—
z
z
—
—
z
—
—
—
—
—
z4
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
z
A
M
[A:B] Quick wireless flash control
AA Auto aperture
A
M
Non-TTL auto
Manual
RPT Repeating flash
i-TTL i-TTL
[A:B] Quick wireless flash control
AA Auto aperture
A
M
Non-TTL auto
Manual
RPT Repeating flash
Flash Color Information Communication
Auto FP High-Speed Sync 6
FV lock 7
AF-assist for multi-area AF
Red-eye reduction
Camera modeling illumination
Camera flash mode selection
Camera flash unit firmware update
—
z
—
z
—
z
—
1 Not available with spot metering.
2 Can also be selected with flash unit.
3 AA/A mode selection performed on flash unit using custom settings. A is selected when a non-CPU
lens is used.
5 When a non-CPU lens is used, non-TTL auto (A) is used regardless of mode selected with flash unit.
6 Available only in i-TTL, AA, A, GN, and M flash-control modes.
7 Availalbe only in i-TTL, AA, and A flash-control modes.
A Auto Aperture/Non-TTL Auto
Unless the focal length and maximum aperture are specified using the Non-CPU lens data
option in the setup menu, choosing auto aperture (AA) when a non-CPU lens is attached
automatically selects non-TTL auto (A).
n
305
❚❚Other Flash Units
The following flash units can be used in non-TTL auto and manual modes.
SB-30, SB-27 2, SB-22S, SB-23, SB-29 3,
SB-22, SB-20, SB-16B, SB-15 SB-21B 3, SB-29S 3
Flash unit
SB-80DX, SB-28DX, SB-28,
SB-26, SB-25, SB-24
Flash mode
SB-50DX 1
A
M
Non-TTL auto
Manual
Repeating flash
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
—
✔
—
✔
G
REAR Rear-curtain sync 4
1 Select mode P, S, A, or M, lower built-in flash, and use optional flash unit only.
2 Flash mode is automatically set to TTL and shutter-release is disabled. Set flash unit to A (non-TTL auto
flash).
3 Autofocus is available with AF-S VR Micro-Nikkor 105mm f/2.8G IF-ED and AF-S Micro NIKKOR 60mm
f/2.8G ED lenses only.
4 Available when camera is used to select flash mode.
A Flash Control Mode
The information display shows the flash control mode for optional flash units attached to the
camera accessory shoe as follows:
Flash sync
i-TTL
Auto aperture (AA)
Non-TTL auto flash (A)
Distance-priority manual (GN)
Manual
Repeating flash
—
Advanced wireless lighting
n
306
D Notes on Optional Flash Units
Refer to the Speedlight manual for detailed instructions. If the flash unit supports CLS, refer
to the section on CLS-compatible digital SLR cameras. The D7100 is not included in the
“digital SLR” category in the SB-80DX, SB-28DX, and SB-50DX manuals.
If an optional flash unit is attached in shooting modes other than j, %, and u, the flash will
fire with every shot, even in modes in which the built-in flash can not be used.
i-TTL flash control can be used at ISO sensitivities between 100 and 6400. At values over
6400, the desired results may not be achieved at some ranges or aperture settings. If the
flash-ready indicator flashes for about three seconds after a photograph is taken, the flash
has fired at full power and the photograph may be underexposed.
When an SC-series 17, 28, or 29 sync cable is used for off-camera flash photography, correct
exposure may not be achieved in i-TTL mode. We recommend that you select standard i-TTL
flash control. Take a test shot and view the results in the monitor.
In i-TTL, use the flash panel or bounce adapter provided with the flash unit. Do not use other
panels such as diffusion panels, as this may produce incorrect exposure.
The SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, and SB-400 provide red-eye reduction, while the
SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, and SU-800 provide AF-assist illumination with the
following restrictions:
•
•
•
SB-910 and SB-900: AF-assist illumination is available
with 17–135 mm AF lenses, however, autofocus is
available only with the focus points shown at
right.
SB-800, SB-600, and SU-800: AF-assist illumination is
available with 24–105 mm AF lenses, however,
autofocus is available only with the focus points
shown at right.
SB-700: AF-assist illumination is available with 24–
135 mm AF lenses, however, autofocus is
available only with the focus points shown at
right.
17–19 mm
20–105 mm 106–135 mm
24–34 mm
35–49 mm
50–105 mm
24–27 mm
28–135 mm
In mode P, the maximum aperture (minimum f-number) is limited according to ISO
sensitivity, as shown below:
Maximum aperture at ISO equivalent of:
100
200
400
800
1600
3200
6400
4
5
5.6
7.1
8
10
11
If the maximum aperture of the lens is smaller than given above, the maximum value for
aperture will be the maximum aperture of the lens.
n
307
Other Accessories
At the time of writing, the following accessories were available for the D7100.
•
available from local retailers and Nikon-authorized service representatives.
Multi-Power Battery Pack MB-D15: The MB-D15 is equipped with a shutter-release
button, A AE/AF lock button, multi selector, and main- and sub-command
dials for improved operation when taking photographs in portrait (tall)
orientation. When attaching the MB-D15, remove the camera MB-D15 contact
cover.
•
•
Power
sources
•
Power Connector EP-5B, AC Adapter EH-5b: These accessories can be used to power
the camera for extended periods (EH-5a and EH-5 AC adapters can also be
for details. Note that when the camera is used with an MB-D15, the EP-5B must
be inserted into the MB-D15, not the camera. Do not attempt to use the
camera with power connectors inserted into both the camera and MB-D15.
• Filters intended for special-effects photography may interfere with autofocus
or the electronic rangefinder.
• Use C-PL or C-PL II circular polarizing filters. Polar-brand linear polarizing filters
can not be used.
• Use NC filters to protect the lens.
Filters
• To prevent ghosting, use of a filter is not recommended when the subject is
framed against a bright light, or when a bright light source is in the frame.
• Center-weighted metering is recommended with filters with exposure factors
(filter factors) over 1× (Y44, Y48, Y52, O56, R60, X0, X1, C-PL/C-PL II, ND2S, ND4,
ND4S, ND8, ND8S, ND400, A2, A12, B2, B8, B12). See the filter manual for
details.
•
DK-20C Eyepiece Correction Lenses: Lenses are available with diopters of –5, –4, –3,
–2, 0, +0.5, +1, +2, and +3 m–1 when the camera diopter adjustment control is
in the neutral position (–1 m–1). Use eyepiece correction lenses only if the
desired focus can not be achieved with the built in diopter adjustment control
(–2 to +1 m–1). Test eyepiece correction lenses before purchase to ensure that
the desired focus can be achieved. The rubber eyecup can not be used with
eyepiece correction lenses.
•
•
Magnifying Eyepiece DK-21M: The DK-21M magnifies the view through the
viewfinder by approximately 1.17× (50 mm f/1.4 lens at infinity; –1.0 m–1) for
greater precision when framing.
Magnifier DG-2: The DG-2 magnifies the scene displayed in the center of the
viewfinder for greater precision during focusing. Eyepiece adapter required
(available separately).
Viewfinder
eyepiece
accessories
•
•
Eyepiece Adapter DK-22: The DK-22 is used when attaching the DG-2 magnifier.
Right-Angle Viewing Attachment DR-6: The DR-6 attaches at a right angle to the
viewfinder eyepiece, allowing the image in the viewfinder to be viewed at
right angles to the lens (for example, from directly above when the camera is
horizontal).
n
308
•
•
Capture NX 2: A complete photo editing package with such advanced editing
features as selection control points and an auto retouch brush.
Camera Control Pro 2: Control the camera remotely from a computer to record
movies and photographs and save photographs directly to the computer hard
disk.
Software
Body cap
Note: Use the latest versions of Nikon software; see the websites listed on page
settings, Nikon Message Center 2 will periodically check for updates to Nikon
software and firmware while you are logged in to an account on the computer
and the computer is connected to the Internet. A message is automatically
displayed when an update is found.
Body Cap BF-1B/Body Cap BF-1A: The body cap keeps the mirror, viewfinder screen,
and image sensor free of dust when a lens is not in place.
•
Pressing the battery-chamber latch to the right (q), insert a fingernail into the
gap and open the battery chamber (w). Ensure that the battery is inserted in
the correct orientation (r).
controller is attached, the camera can be controlled wirelessly using a WR-T10
wireless remote controller. The WR-T10 uses a 3 V CR2032 battery.
•
Remote
controls/
wireless
remote
controllers
Insert a fingernail into the gap behind the battery-chamber latch and open the
battery chamber (q). Ensure that the battery is inserted in the correct
orientation (e).
more, with one functioning as a transmitter and the remaining units acting
receivers. The receivers are attached to the accessory terminals of one or more
cameras, allowing the transmitter to be used to release the camera shutters or
adjust settings remotely.
•
n
309
•
•
cable supplied with the camera, the UT-1 can be used to connect to Ethernet
networks and upload pictures to an ftp server or control the camera remotely
using optional Camera Control Pro 2 software. Note that the UT-1 requires its
own power source; use an optional EN-EL15 rechargeable Li-ion battery or an
EP-5B power connector and EH-5b AC adapter.
LANadapters
Wireless Transmitter WT-5: Use in combination with a UT-1 to connect to wireless
networks.
Use of the UT-1 and WT-5 requires a wireless or Ethernet network and knowledge
of how to use it. Always use the latest version of the software supplied with the
devices.
Wireless
mobile
adapters
Wireless Mobile Adapter WU-1a: Supports two-way communication between the
camera and smart devices running the Wireless Mobile Utility.
The D7100 is equipped with an accessory terminal for
connect with the 4mark on the connector aligned
with the 2next to the accessory terminal (close the
camera connector cover when the terminal is not in
use).
Accessory
terminal
accessories
Microphones
n
310
Attaching a Power Connector and AC Adapter
Turn the camera off before attaching an optional power connector and AC adapter.
1 Ready the camera.
Open the battery-chamber (q) and power
connector (w) covers.
2 Insert the EP-5B power connector.
Be sure to insert the connector in the orientation
shown, using the connector to keep the orange
battery latch pressed to one side. The latch locks
the connector in place when the connector is
fully inserted.
3 Close the battery-chamber cover.
Position the power connector cable so that it
passes through the power connector slot and
close the battery-chamber cover.
4 Connect the AC adapter.
Connect the AC adapter power cable to the AC socket on AC adapter (e) and
the EP-5B power cable to the DC socket (r). When the camera is powered by
the AC adapter and power connector, V replaces the # icon.
n
311
Caring for the Camera
Storage
When the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove the battery and
store the battery in a cool, dry area with the terminal cover in place. To prevent mold
or mildew, store the camera in a dry, well-ventilated area. Do not store your camera
with naphtha or camphor moth balls or in locations that:
• are poorly ventilated or subject to humidities of over 60%
• are next to equipment that produces strong electromagnetic fields, such as
televisions or radios
• are exposed to temperatures above 50 °C (122 °F) or below –10 °C (14 °F)
Cleaning
Use a blower to remove dust and lint, then wipe gently with a soft, dry cloth. After
Camera
body
using the camera at the beach or seaside, wipe off sand or salt with a cloth lightly
dampened in distilled water and dry thoroughly. Important: Dust or other foreign
matter inside the camera may cause damage not covered under warranty.
Lens,
These glass elements are easily damaged. Remove dust and lint with a blower. To
mirror, and remove fingerprints and other stains, apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft
viewfinder cloth and clean with care.
Remove dust and lint with a blower. When removing fingerprints and other stains,
wipe the surface lightly with a soft cloth or chamois leather. Do not apply pressure,
as this could result in damage or malfunction.
Monitor
Do not use alcohol, thinner, or other volatile chemicals.
D Servicing the Camera and Accessories
The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing. Nikon recommends that the
camera be inspected by the original retailer or Nikon-authorized service representative once
every one to two years, and that it be serviced once every three to five years (note that fees
apply to these services). Frequent inspection and servicing are particularly recommended if
the camera is used professionally. Any accessories regularly used with the camera, such as
lenses or optional Speedlights, should be included when the camera is inspected or
serviced.
n
312
Image Sensor Cleaning
If you suspect that dirt or dust on the image sensor is appearing in photographs, you
can clean the sensor using the Clean image sensor option in the setup menu. The
sensor can be cleaned at any time using the Clean now option, or cleaning can be
performed automatically when the camera is turned on or off.
❚❚“Clean Now”
1 Select Clean image sensor in the setup
menu.
Press the G button to display the menus.
Highlight Clean image sensor in the setup
menu and press 2.
G button
2 Select Clean now.
Highlight Clean now and press J. The
camera will check the image sensor and then
begin cleaning. During this time, P
flashes in the control panel and other
operations can not be performed. Do not
remove or disconnect the power source until
cleaning is complete and P is no longer
displayed.
A Place the Camera Base Down
Image sensor cleaning is most effective when the camera is placed
base down as shown at right.
n
313
❚❚“Clean at Startup/Shutdown”
Choose from the following options:
Option
Description
The image sensor is automatically cleaned each time the camera is
turned on.
The image sensor is automatically cleaned during shutdown each time
the camera is turned off.
5
6
7
Clean at startup
Clean at
shutdown
Clean at startup &
shutdown
Cleaning off
The image sensor is cleaned automatically at startup and at shutdown.
Automatic image sensor cleaning off.
1 Select Clean at startup/shutdown.
Display the Clean image sensor menu as
described in Step 2 on the previous page.
Highlight Clean at startup/shutdown and
press 2.
2 Select an option.
Highlight an option and press J.
D Image Sensor Cleaning
Using camera controls during startup interrupts image sensor cleaning. Image sensor
cleaning may not be performed at startup if the flash is charging.
If dust can not be fully removed using the options in the Clean image sensor menu, clean
If image sensor cleaning is performed several times in succession, image sensor cleaning
may be temporarily disabled to protect the camera’s internal circuitry. Cleaning can be
performed again after a short wait.
n
314
❚❚Manual Cleaning
If foreign matter can not be removed from the image sensor using the Clean image
described below. Note, however, that the sensor is extremely delicate and easily
damaged. Nikon recommends that the sensor be cleaned only by Nikon-authorized
service personnel.
1 Charge the battery or connect an AC adapter.
A reliable power source is required when inspecting or cleaning the image
sensor. Turn the camera off and insert a fully-charged EN-EL15 battery or
connect an optional EP-5B power connector and EH-5b AC adapter. The Lock
mirror up for cleaning option is only available in the setup menu at battery
levels over J.
2 Remove the lens.
Turn the camera off and remove the lens.
3 Select Lock mirror up for cleaning.
Turn the camera on and press the G
button to display the menus. Highlight Lock
mirror up for cleaning in the setup menu
and press 2.
G button
4 Press J.
The message shown at right will be
displayed in the monitor and a row of dashes
will appear in the control panel and
viewfinder. To restore normal operation
without inspecting the image sensor, turn
the camera off.
n
315
5 Raise the mirror.
Press the shutter-release button all the way
down. The mirror will be raised and the
shutter curtain will open, revealing the
image sensor. The display in the viewfinder
will turn off and the row of dashes in the control panel will flash.
6 Examine the image sensor.
Holding the camera so that light falls on the image sensor,
examine the sensor for dust or lint. If no foreign objects
are present, proceed to Step 8.
7 Clean the sensor.
Remove any dust and lint from the sensor with a blower.
Do not use a blower-brush, as the bristles could damage
the sensor. Dirt that can not be removed with a blower can
only be removed by Nikon-authorized service personnel.
Under no circumstances should you touch or wipe the
sensor.
8 Turn the camera off.
The mirror will return to the down position and the shutter curtain will close.
Replace the lens or body cap.
n
316
A Use a Reliable Power Source
The shutter curtain is delicate and easily damaged. If the camera powers off while the mirror
is raised, the curtain will close automatically. To prevent damage to the curtain, observe the
following precautions:
• Do not turn the camera off or remove or disconnect the power source while the mirror is
raised.
• If the battery runs low while the mirror is raised, a beep will sound and the self-timer lamp
will flash to warn that the shutter curtain will close and the mirror will be lowered after
about two minutes. End cleaning or inspection immediately.
D Foreign Matter on the Image Sensor
Nikon takes every possible precaution to prevent foreign matter from coming into contact
with the image sensor during production and shipping. The D7100, however, is designed to
be used with interchangeable lenses, and foreign matter may enter the camera when lenses
are removed or exchanged. Once inside the camera, this foreign matter may adhere to the
image sensor, where it may appear in photographs taken under certain conditions. To
protect the camera when no lens is in place, be sure to replace the body cap provided with
the camera, being careful to first remove all dust and other foreign matter that may be
adhering to the body cap. Avoid exchanging lenses in dusty environments.
Should foreign matter find its way onto the image sensor, clean the sensor as described
above, or have the sensor cleaned by authorized Nikon service personnel. Photographs
affected by the presence of foreign matter on the sensor can be retouched using
third-party imaging applications.
n
317
Caring for the Camera and Battery:
Cautions
Do not drop: The product may malfunction if subjected to strong shocks or vibration.
Keep dry: This product is not waterproof, and may malfunction if immersed in water or exposed
to high levels of humidity. Rusting of the internal mechanism can cause irreparable damage.
Avoid sudden changes in temperature: Sudden changes in temperature, such as those that occur
when entering or leaving a heated building on a cold day, can cause condensation inside the
device. To prevent condensation, place the device in a carrying case or plastic bag before
exposing it to sudden changes in temperature.
Keep away from strong magnetic fields: Do not use or store this device in the vicinity of equipment
that generates strong electromagnetic radiation or magnetic fields. Strong static charges or
the magnetic fields produced by equipment such as radio transmitters could interfere with the
monitor, damage data stored on the memory card, or affect the product’s internal circuitry.
Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun: Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun or other strong light
source for an extended period. Intense light may cause the image sensor to deteriorate or
produce a white blur effect in photographs.
Turn the product off before removing or disconnecting the power source: Do not unplug the product or
remove the battery while the product is on or while images are being recorded or deleted.
Forcibly cutting power in these circumstances could result in loss of data or in damage to
product memory or internal circuitry. To prevent an accidental interruption of power, avoid
carrying the product from one location to another while the AC adapter is connected.
Cleaning: When cleaning the camera body, use a blower to gently remove dust and lint, then
wipe gently with a soft, dry cloth. After using the camera at the beach or seaside, wipe off any
sand or salt using a cloth lightly dampened in pure water and then dry the camera thoroughly.
In rare instances, static electricity may cause LCDs to light up or go dark. This does not indicate
a malfunction, and the display will soon return to normal.
The lens and mirror are easily damaged. Dust and lint should be gently removed with a blower.
When using an aerosol blower, keep the can vertical to prevent discharge of liquid. To remove
fingerprints and other stains from the lens, apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft cloth
and wipe the lens carefully.
Lens contacts: Keep the lens contacts clean.
Do not touch the shutter curtain: The shutter curtain is extremely thin and easily damaged. Under
no circumstances should you exert pressure on the curtain, poke it with cleaning tools, or
subject it to powerful air currents from a blower. These actions could scratch, deform, or tear
the curtain.
n
318
Storage: To prevent mold or mildew, store the camera in a dry, well-ventilated area. If you are
using an AC adapter, unplug the adapter to prevent fire. If the product will not be used for an
extended period, remove the battery to prevent leakage and store the camera in a plastic bag
containing a desiccant. Do not, however, store the camera case in a plastic bag, as this may
cause the material to deteriorate. Note that desiccant gradually loses its capacity to absorb
moisture and should be replaced at regular intervals.
To prevent mold or mildew, take the camera out of storage at least once a month. Turn the
camera on and release the shutter a few times before putting it away.
Store the battery in a cool, dry place. Replace the terminal cover before putting the battery
away.
Notes on the monitor: The monitor is constructed with extremely high precision; at least 99.99% of
pixels are effective, with no more than 0.01% being missing or defective. Hence while these
displays may contain pixels that are always lit (white, red, blue, or green) or always off (black),
this is not a malfunction and has no effect on images recorded with the device.
Images in the monitor may be difficult to see in a bright light.
Do not apply pressure to the monitor, as this could cause damage or malfunction. Dust or lint
on the monitor can be removed with a blower. Stains can be removed by wiping lightly with a
soft cloth or chamois leather. Should the monitor break, care should be taken to avoid injury
from broken glass and to prevent liquid crystal from the monitor touching the skin or entering
the eyes and mouth.
Batteries: Batteries may leak or explode if improperly handled. Observe the following
precautions when handling batteries:
• Use only batteries approved for use in this equipment.
• Do not expose the battery to flame or excessive heat.
• Keep the battery terminals clean.
• Turn the product off before replacing the battery.
• Remove the battery from the camera or charger when not in use and replace the terminal
cover. These devices draw minute amounts of charge even when off and could draw the
battery down to the point that it will no longer function. If the battery will not be used for
some time, insert it in the camera and run it flat before removing it and storing it in a location
with an ambient temperature of 15 °C to 25 °C (59 °F to 77 °F; avoid hot or extremely cold
locations). Repeat this process at least once every six months.
• Turning the camera on or off repeatedly when the battery is fully discharged will shorten
battery life. Batteries that have been fully discharged must be charged before use.
• The internal temperature of the battery may rise while the battery is in use. Attempting to
charge the battery while the internal temperature is elevated will impair battery
performance, and the battery may not charge or charge only partially. Wait for the battery
to cool before charging.
n
319
• Continuing to charge the battery after it is fully charged can impair battery performance.
• A marked drop in the time a fully charged battery retains its charge when used at room
temperature indicates that it requires replacement. Purchase a new EN-EL15 battery.
• Charge the battery before use. When taking photographs on important occasions, ready a
spare EN-EL15 battery and keep it fully charged. Depending on your location, it may be
difficult to purchase replacement batteries on short notice. Note that on cold days, the
capacity of batteries tends to decrease. Be sure the battery is fully charged before taking
photographs outside in cold weather. Keep a spare battery in a warm place and exchange
the two as necessary. Once warmed, a cold battery may recover some of its charge.
• Used batteries are a valuable resource; recycle in accord with local regulations.
n
320
Available Settings
The following table lists the settings that can be adjusted in each mode.
k, p, l, m,
S, A, n, o, r, t,
x, y,
u, 1,
i
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
—
—
z
j
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
P
M
s
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
—
—
z
u, v w z, 0 % g i 2, 3
Storage folder
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
—
—
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
—
—
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
—
—
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
—
—
z
—
—
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
—
—
z
—
—
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
—
—
z
—
—
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
—
—
z
—
—
z
z
z
File naming 1
Role played by card in Slot 2 1
Image quality 1, 2
Image size 1, 2
Image area 1
JPEG compression 1
NEF (RAW) recording 1
White balance 1, 2
Set Picture Control 1, 2
Color space 1
Active D-Lighting 1
HDR (high dynamic range) 1, 2
Auto distortion control 1
Long exposure NR 1
High ISO NR 1
ISO sensitivity settings 1, 2
Remote control mode
(ML-L3) 1, 2
— z
— z
z
z
3
3
3
3
3
3
—
—
z
—
—
—
—
—
z
z
z
— z
—
z
z
z
—
z
z
z
—
z
z
z
—
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
— z
— z
—
z 4 z 4
z 4 z 4 z 4 z 4
z 4 z 4 z 4
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Multiple exposure 1, 2
Interval timer shooting 1
Movie settings 1
—
z
z
— z
z
z
z
z
z
—
z
z
—
z
z
—
z
z
—
z
z
—
z
z
—
z
z
—
z
z
—
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Autofocus mode (viewfinder) z 5 z 5
z 5 z5 z5 z 5 z 5 z 5 z 5 z5
z 5 z5 z5 z 5 — z 5
AF-area mode (viewfinder)
Autofocus mode (live view/
movie)
AF-area mode (live view/
movie)
A AE-L/AF-L button hold
Flexible program
Metering
Exposure compensation
Bracketing
z 5 z 5
—
z 5
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z 5 z 5
z 5 z 5
z
z
z 5 z5 z5 z 5 z5 z 5
—
z 5
z
—
z
z
z
z
z
z
z 5 z5 z5 z 5 z5 z 5 z 5 z5
—
—
—
—
— z
— z
— z
— z
—
—
—
—
z 5
—
z
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
z5
—
z
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
z5
—
Flash mode
Flash compensation
FV lock
z 5 — z
—
z
— z 5
— z
— z
—
— z
—
n
321
k, p, l, m,
S, A, n, o, r, t,
x, y,
u, 1,
i
z
z
j
z
z
P
z
M
z
s
z
z
u, v w z, 0 % g i 2, 3
a1: AF-C priority selection
a2: AF-S priority selection
a3: Focus tracking with
lock-on
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
a4: AF point illumination
a5: Focus point wrap-around
a6: Number of focus points
a7: Built-in AF-assist
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
—
—
z
— z
—
z
illuminator
b1: ISO sensitivity step value
b2: EV steps for exposure cntrl z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
b3: Easy exposure
—
— z
z
z
z
—
—
z
—
—
z
—
—
z
—
—
z
—
—
z
—
—
z
—
—
z
—
—
z
compensation
b4: Center-weighted area
b5: Fine-tune optimal
exposure
—
— z
z
z
z
c1: Shutter-release button
AE-L
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
c2: Standby timer
c3: Self-timer
c4: Monitor off delay
c5: Remote on duration
(ML-L3)
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
d1: Beep
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
d2: Viewfinder grid display
d3: ISO display and
adjustment
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
d4: Screen tips
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
—
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
—
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
—
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
—
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
—
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
—
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
—
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
—
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
—
z
z
d5: CL mode shooting speed
d6: Max. continuous release
d7: File number sequence
d8: Information display
d9: LCD illumination
d10: Exposure delay mode 2
d11: Flash warning
d12: MB-D15 battery type
d13: Battery order
— z
z
z
z
z
n
322
k, p, l, m,
S, A, n, o, r, t,
x, y,
u, 1,
i
z
—
j
P
z
M
z
s
z
—
u, v w z, 0 % g i 2, 3
e1: Flash sync speed
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
e2: Flash shutter speed
e3: Flash cntrl for built-in
flash/Optional flash
— z
z
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
— z
z
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
e4: Exposure comp. for flash
e5: Modeling flash
e6: Auto bracketing set
e7: Bracketing order
f1: OK button
f2: Assign Fn button
f3: Assign preview button
f4: Assign AE-L/AF-L button
f5: Customize command dials
f6: Release button to use dial
f7: Slot empty release lock
f8: Reverse indicators
f9: Assign MB-D15 4 button
g1: Assign Fn button
g2: Assign preview button
g3: Assign AE-L/AF-L button
g4: Assign shutter button
—
—
—
—
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
— z
— z
— z
— z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
—
—
—
—
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
—
—
—
—
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
—
—
—
—
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
—
—
—
—
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
—
—
—
—
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
—
—
—
—
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
—
—
—
—
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
—
—
—
—
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
unaffected.
3 Fixed at Auto.
4 Auto ISO sensitivity control is not available.
5 Reset when mode dial is rotated to new setting.
n
323
Defaults
The default settings for the options in the camera menus are listed below. For
information on two-button resets, see page 131.
❚❚Playback Menu Defaults
Option
Default
D7100
Off
Show next
On
0
Option
Default
0
Still images and
movies
Image type
Frame interval
2 s
❚❚Shooting Menu Defaults 1
Option
Default
DSC
Overflow
0
Option
Default
Off
Off
0
Normal
Large
DX (24×16)
Size priority
ISO sensitivity
P, S, A, M
Other modes
100
Auto
Off
Lossless
compressed
14-bit
5000 K
d-1
Standard
sRGB
Auto ISO sensitivity control
Multiple exposure mode
Number of shots
Auto gain
Frame size/frame rate
Movie quality
Type
Off
NEF (RAW) bit depth
Fine-tuning
Choose color temp.
Preset manual
P, S, A, M, %, g, i, u, 1, 2,
3
Off
2
On
Reset 3
1920×1080; 30p
High quality
Auto sensitivity
Slot 1
Microphone
Destination
Off
Other modes
Auto
HDR mode
HDR strength
Off
Auto
2 Reset shooting menu can not be selected while shooting is in progress.
3 Start time reset to Now, interval reset to 1 minute, number of intervals and number of shots reset to 1,
and Start set to Off. Shooting ends when reset is performed.
n
324
❚❚Custom Settings Menu Defaults *
Option
Matrix metering
Default
Release
Focus
3 (Normal)
Auto
No wrap
51 points
On
1/3 step
1/3 step
Off
0
Option
Default
Use MB-D15
batteries first
0
231 d13
Optional flash
f1 OK button
1/250 s
1/60 s
TTL
Entire frame
On
AE & flash
ø 8 mm
Select center focus
0
0
0
Off
6 s
Shooting mode
Playback mode
Live view
point
Center-weighted metering
Spot metering
Select center focus
point
Press
Press + command dials
Press
Press + command dials
Press
Press + command dials
c3 Self-timer
None
Self-timer delay
Number of shots
Interval between shots
Playback
10 s
1
0.5 s
Preview
None
10 s
1 min
10 s
4 s
10 min
1 min
Menus
Information display
Image review
AE/AF lock
None
Live view
Exposure
compensation: U
Shutter speed/
aperture: U
d1 Beep
Reverse rotation
Volume
Pitch
Off
Low
Off
Change main/sub
Aperture setting
Menus and playback
Off
Sub-command dial
d4 Screen tips
Off
No
f9 Assign MB-D15 4 button
On
3 fps
100
On
Auto
Off
AE/AF lock
None
None
AE/AF lock
Take photos
d11 Flash warning
Off
On
n
325
❚❚Setup Menu Defaults
Option
Save to U1
Save to U2
Default
0
Option
Default
On
0
Shooting mode
defaults to P
Output resolution
Auto
On
0
262 Device control
Clean at startup &
shutdown
Auto
Standby timer
Use GPS to set camera clock
Eye-Fi upload
Enable
Yes
Enable
Enable
Clean at startup/shutdown
Daylight saving time
Off
n
326
Exposure Program (Mode P)
The exposure program for mode P is shown in the following graph:
ISO 100; lens with maximum aperture of f/1.4 and minimum
aperture of f/16 (e.g., AF-S NIKKOR 50mm f/1.4G)
Shutter speed (seconds)
The maximum and minimum values for EV vary with ISO sensitivity; the above graph
assumes an ISO sensitivity of ISO 100 equivalent. When matrix metering is used,
values over 161/3 EV are reduced to 161/3 EV.
n
327
Troubleshooting
If the camera fails to function as expected, check the list of common problems below
before consulting your retailer or Nikon-authorized service representative.
Battery/Display
The camera is on but does not respond: Wait for recording to end. If the problem persists, turn the
camera off. If the camera does not turn off, remove and reinsert the battery or, if you are using
an AC adapter, disconnect and reconnect the AC adapter. Note that although any data
currently being recorded will be lost, data that have already been recorded will not be affected
by removing or disconnecting the power source.
Viewfinder is out of focus: Adjust viewfinder focus or use optional eyepiece correction lenses
Displays turn off without warning: Choose longer delays for Custom Setting c2 (Standby timer) or
Control panel and viewfinder displays are unresponsive and dim: The response times and brightness of
these displays vary with temperature.
Fine lines are visible around active focus point or display turns red when focus point is highlighted: These
phenomena are normal for this type of viewfinder and do not indicate a malfunction.
Shooting (All Modes)
Camera takes time to turn on: Delete files or folders.
Shutter-release disabled:
•
• CPU lens with aperture ring attached but aperture not locked at highest f-number. If B is
displayed in control panel, select Aperture ring for Custom Setting f5 (Customize
Camera is slow to respond to shutter-release button: Select Off for Custom Setting d10 (Exposure
No photo taken when remote control shutter-release button is pressed:
• Bright light is interfering with ML-L3 remote.
n
328
Photos are out of focus:
• The shutter-release button can not be used to focus when AF-ON is assigned as the Press
the button to which AF-ON is assigned.
Focus does not lock when shutter-release button is pressed halfway: Use A AE-L/AF-L button to lock focus
when AF-C is selected for autofocus mode or when photographing moving subjects in AF-A
mode.
Can not select focus point:
• Auto-area AF or face-priority AF selected for AF-area mode: choose another mode.
Only one shot taken each time shutter-release button is pressed in continuous release mode: Continuous
Noise (bright spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) appear in photos:
AF-assist illuminator does not light:
servo autofocus is selected when the camera is in AF-A mode. Choose AF-S. If single-point or
• The camera is currently in live view or a movie is being recorded.
•
• Illuminator has turned off automatically. Illuminator may become hot with continued use;
wait for lamp to cool down.
Smudges appear in photographs: Clean front and rear lens elements. If problem persists, perform
Sound is not recorded with movies: Microphone off is selected for Movie settings > Microphone.
The brightness of the image in the monitor differs from the exposure of photographs taken in live view:
• The camera is in mode M.
• The subject is too bright or too dark.
n
329
Flicker or banding appears during live view or movie recording: Choose an option for Flicker reduction
Bright bands appear during live view or movie recording: A flashing sign, flash, or other light source with
brief duration was used during live view or movie recording.
Menu item can not be selected: Some options are not available in all modes.
Shooting (P, S, A, M)
Shutter-release disabled:
• Mode dial rotated to S after shutter speed of Bulb (A) or Time (%) selected in mode M:
Full range of shutter speeds not available: Flash in use. Flash sync speed can be selected using
Custom Setting e1 (Flash sync speed); when using compatible flash units, choose 1/320 s
Colors are unnatural:
Image can not be selected as source for preset white balance: Image was not created with D7100
White balance bracketing unavailable:
Effects of Picture Control differ from image to image: A (auto) is selected for sharpening, contrast, or
Noise (reddish areas or other artifacts) appears in long time-exposures: Enable long exposure noise
Playback
Can not view pictures recorded with other cameras: Pictures recorded with other makes of camera may
not be displayed correctly.
Message is displayed stating that no images are available for playback: Select All for Playback folder
n
330
“Tall” (portrait) orientation photos are displayed in “wide” (landscape) orientation:
Can not delete picture:
Can not change print order:
Can not select photo for printing: Photo is in NEF (RAW) format. Create JPEG copy using NEF (RAW)
processing or transfer to computer and print using ViewNX 2 (supplied) or Capture NX 2
(available separately).
Picture is not displayed on TV:
Camera does not respond to remote control for HDMI-CEC television:
• Adjust HDMI-CEC settings for the television as described in documentation provided with
the device.
Can not transfer photos to computer: OS not compatible with camera or transfer software. Use card
Image Dust Off option in Capture NX 2 does not have desired effect: Image sensor cleaning changes the
position of dust on the image sensor. Dust off reference data recorded before image sensor
cleaning is performed can not be used with photographs taken after image sensor cleaning is
performed. Dust off reference data recorded after image sensor cleaning is performed can not
Computer displays NEF (RAW) images differently from camera: Third-party software does not display
effects of Picture Controls or Active D-Lighting. Use ViewNX 2 (supplied) or optional Nikon
software such as Capture NX 2 (available separately).
Miscellaneous
Menu item can not be selected: Some options are not available at certain combinations of settings
or when no memory card is inserted. Note that Battery info option is not available when
n
331
Error Messages
This section lists the indicators and error messages that appear in the viewfinder,
control panel, and monitor.
Indicator
Control
panel
View-
finder
Problem
Solution
0
B
Lens aperture ring is not set to Set ring to minimum aperture
(flashes)
minimum aperture.
Low battery.
(highest f-number).
Ready a fully-charged spare
battery.
H
d
• Battery exhausted.
• Battery can not be used.
• Recharge or replace battery.
• Contact Nikon-authorized
service representative.
• Replace the battery, or
recharge the battery if the
rechargeable Li-ion battery
• An extremely exhausted
rechargeable Li-ion battery
or a third-party battery is
H
d
(flashes) (flashes)
inserted either in the camera is exhausted.
or in the optional MB-D15
battery pack.
No lens attached, or non-CPU
lens attached without
Aperture value will be
F
specifying maximum aperture. displayed if maximum aperture
Aperture shown in stops from is specified.
maximum aperture.
• No lens attached.
• Attach a lens.
If a CPU lens is attached,
remove and reattach the
lens.
i
(flashes)
• Non-CPU lens attached.
2 4 Camera unable to focus using Change composition or focus
(flashes) autofocus. manually.
• Select mode A or M.
—
n
332
Indicator
Control
panel
View-
finder
Problem
Solution
0
• Use a lower ISO sensitivity
• In shooting mode:
P
S
A
Use optional ND filter
Increase shutter speed
Choose a smaller aperture
(higher f-number)
Subject too bright; photo will
be overexposed.
(Exposure
indicators and
shutter speed or
aperture display
flash)
% Choose another shooting
mode
• Use a higher ISO sensitivity
• In shooting mode:
Subject too dark; photo will be
underexposed.
P
S
A
Use flash
Lower shutter speed
Choose a larger aperture
(lower f-number)
A
(flashes)
%
Bulb (A) selected in mode Change shutter speed or select
—
S.
mode M.
Change shutter speed or select
mode M.
Time (%) selected in mode S.
(flashes)
P
k
Wait until processing is
complete.
Images are being processed.
(flashes) (flashes)
If indicator flashes for 3s after Check photo in monitor; if
c
—
flash fires, photo may be
underexposed.
underexposed, adjust settings
and try again.
(flashes)
Memory insufficient to record • Reduce quality or size.
n
j
further photos at current
• Delete photographs.
(flashes) (flashes) settings, or camera has run out
of file or folder numbers.
• Insert new memory card.
Release shutter. If error persists
or appears frequently, consult
Nikon-authorized service
representative.
O
Camera malfunction.
(flashes)
—
n
333
Indicator
Control
panel
Monitor
Problem
Solution
0
Camera cannot detect Turn camera off and confirm
No memory card.
S
memory card.
• Error accessing
memory card.
that card is correctly inserted.
• Use Nikon-approved card.
• Check that contacts are
clean. If card is damaged,
contact retailer or Nikon-
authorized service
—
This memory card
cannot be used.
Card may be
damaged.
Insert another card.
W,
O
representative.
• Unable to create new • Delete files or insert new
(flashes)
folder.
memory card after copying
important images to
computer or other device.
• Check that Eye-Fi card
firmware is up to date.
W,
O
Camera can not control
Eye-Fi card.
g
a computer or other device
and format card, or insert
new card.
(flashes)
Memory card is
locked. Slide lock to
“write” position.
W,
X
Memory card is locked
(write protected).
(flashes)
W,
O
Slide card write-protect
switch to “write” position.
Not available if
Eye-Fi card is locked.
Eye-Fi card is locked
(write protected).
(flashes)
This card is not
formatted.
Memory card has not
been formatted for use in
camera.
[C]
(flashes)
Format memory card or insert
new memory card.
Format the card.
Clock has been reset
Failed to update
flash unit firmware.
Flash cannot be
used.
Contact a Nikon-
authorized service
representative.
—
Camera clock is not set. Set camera clock.
Firmware for flash unit
mounted on camera was
not updated correctly.
Contact a Nikon-authorized
service representative.
—
—
Wait for the internal circuits
view or movie recording.
Unable to start live
view. Please wait.
The internal temperature
of the camera is high.
—
n
334
Indicator
Control
panel
Monitor
Problem
Solution
0
Select folder containing
images from Playback folder
menu or insert memory card
containing images.
No images on memory
card or in folder(s)
selected for playback.
Folder contains no
images.
—
No images can be played
back until another folder has
been selected or Hide image
used to allow at least one
image to be displayed.
All images are
hidden.
All photos in current
folder are hidden.
—
File has been created or
modified using a
computer or different
make of camera, or file is
corrupt.
Cannot display this
file.
File can not be played back
on camera.
—
—
Images created with other
devices can not be
retouched.
• Movies created with other
devices can not be edited.
• Movies must be at least
two seconds long.
Cannot select this
file.
Selected image can not
be retouched.
—
—
—
This movie cannot be
edited.
The selected movie can
not be edited.
Check printer. To resume,
select Continue (if available).
Paper in printer is not of Insert paper of correct size
Check printer.
Check paper.
Paper jam.
—
—
—
—
—
—
Printer error.
208 *
208 *
208 *
208 *
208 *
208 *
selected size.
Paper is jammed in
printer.
and select Continue.
Clear jam and select
Continue.
Insert paper of selected size
and select Continue.
Check ink. To resume, select
Continue.
Out of paper.
Check ink supply.
Out of ink.
Printer is out of paper.
Ink error.
Replace ink and select
Continue.
Printer is out of ink.
* See printer manual for more information.
n
335
Specifications
❚❚Nikon D7100 Digital Camera
Type
Type
Single-lens reflex digital camera
Lens mount
Nikon F mount (with AF coupling and AF contacts)
Nikon DX format; focal length in 35 mm [135] format equivalent to
approx. 1.5× that of lenses with FX format angle of view
Effective angle of view
Effective pixels
Effective pixels
24.1 million
Image sensor
Image sensor
Total pixels
23.5 × 15.6 mm CMOS sensor
24.71 million
Dust-reduction System Image sensor cleaning, Image Dust Off reference data (optional
Capture NX 2 software required)
Storage
Image size (pixels)
•
•
•
•
DX (24×16) image area
6000 × 4000 (#)
1.3× (18×12) image area
4496 × 3000 ($)
2992 × 2000 (%)
4800 × 3200 (#)
3600 × 2400 ($)
2400 × 1600 (%)
Photographs with image area of DX (24×16) taken in movie live view
6000 × 3368 (#) 4496 × 2528 ($) 2992 × 1680 (%)
Photographs with image area of 1.3× (18×12) taken in movie live view
4800 × 2696 (#) 3600 × 2024 ($) 2400 × 1344 (%)
File format
•
•
NEF (RAW): 12 or 14 bit, lossless compressed or compressed
JPEG: JPEG-Baseline compliant with fine (approx. 1 : 4), normal (approx.
1 : 8), or basic (approx. 1 : 16) compression (Size priority); Optimal
quality compression available
•
NEF (RAW) + JPEG: Single photograph recorded in both NEF (RAW) and
JPEG formats
Picture Control System Standard, Neutral, Vivid, Monochrome, Portrait, Landscape; selected
Picture Control can be modified; storage for custom Picture Controls
Media
Double slot
SD (Secure Digital) and UHS-I compliant SDHC and SDXC memory cards
Slot 2 can be used for overflow or backup storage or for separate storage
of copies created using NEF+JPEG; pictures can be copied between
cards.
File system
DCF (Design Rule for Camera File System) 2.0, DPOF (Digital Print Order
Format), Exif (Exchangeable Image File Format for Digital Still Cameras)
2.3, PictBridge
n
336
Viewfinder
Viewfinder
Eye-level pentaprism single-lens reflex viewfinder
Approx. 100% horizontal and 100% vertical
Frame coverage
Magnification
Eyepoint
Diopter adjustment
Focusing screen
Approx. 0.94× (50 mm f/1.4 lens at infinity, –1.0 m–1
)
19.5 mm (–1.0 m–1; from center surface of viewfinder eyepiece lens)
–2–+1 m–1
Type B BriteView Clear Matte Mark II screen with AF area brackets
(framing grid can be displayed)
Reflex mirror
Quick return
Depth-of-field preview Pressing depth-of-field preview button stops lens aperture down to
value selected by user (A and M modes) or by camera (other modes)
Lens aperture
Instant return, electronically controlled
Lens
Compatible lenses
Compatible with AF NIKKOR lenses, including type G and D lenses (some
restrictions apply to PC lenses) and DX lenses, AI-P NIKKOR lenses, and
non-CPU AI lenses (A and M modes only). IX NIKKOR lenses, lenses for the
F3AF, and non-AI lenses can not be used.
The electronic rangefinder can be used with lenses that have a
maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster (the electronic rangefinder supports
the center 1 focus point with lenses that have a maximum aperture of
f/8 or faster).
Shutter
Type
Speed
Flash sync speed
Electronically-controlled vertical-travel focal-plane shutter
1/8000 – 30 s in steps of 1/3 or 1/2 EV, bulb, time, X250
X=1/250 s; synchronizes with shutter at 1/320 s or slower (flash range drops
at speeds between 1/250 and 1/320 s)
Release
Release mode
S (single frame), CL (continuous low speed), CH (continuous high speed),
J (quiet shutter-release), E (self-timer), MUP (mirror up); interval timer
photography supported
Approximate frame
advance rate
•
JPEG and 12-bit NEF (RAW) images recorded with DX (24×16) selected for Image area
CL: 1–6 fps CH: 6 fps
•
JPEG and 12-bit NEF (RAW) images recorded with 1.3× (18×12) selected for Image
area
CL: 1–6 fps
14-bit NEF (RAW) images recorded with DX (24×16) selected for Image area
CL: 1–5 fps CH: 5 fps
14-bit NEF (RAW) images recorded with 1.3× (18×12) selected for Image area
CL: 1–6 fps CH: 6 fps
CH: 7 fps
•
•
Self-timer
2 s, 5 s, 10 s, 20 s; 1–9 exposures at intervals of 0.5, 1, 2, or 3 s
Remote control modes
(ML-L3)
Delayed remote, quick-response remote, remote mirror-up
Exposure
Metering mode
TTL exposure metering using 2016-pixel RGB sensor
n
337
Exposure
Metering method
•
•
•
Matrix: 3D color matrix metering II (type G and D lenses); color matrix
metering II (other CPU lenses); color matrix metering available with
non-CPU lenses if user provides lens data
Center-weighted: Weight of 75% given to 8 mm circle in center of frame.
Diameter of circle can be changed to 6, 10, or 13 mm, or weighting can
be based on average of entire frame (non-CPU lenses use 8-mm circle)
Spot: Meters 3.5 mm circle (about 2.5% of frame) centered on selected
focus point (on center focus point when non-CPU lens is used)
Matrix or center-weighted metering: 0–20 EV
Range (ISO 100, f/1.4
lens, 20 °C/68 °F)
Exposure meter
coupling
•
•
Spot metering: 2–20 EV
Combined CPU and AI
Mode
Auto modes (i auto; j auto, flash off ); programmed auto with flexible
program (P); shutter-priority auto (S); aperture-priority auto (A); manual
(M); scene modes (k portrait; l landscape; p child; m sports; n close up; o night
portrait; r night landscape; s party/indoor; t beach/snow; u sunset; vdusk/dawn; w pet
portrait; xcandlelight; y blossom; z autumn colors; 0 food); special effects modes
(% night vision; g color sketch; i miniature effect; u selective color; 1 silhouette; 2 high
key; 3 low key); U1 (user settings 1); U2 (user settings 2)
Exposure compensation Can be adjusted by –5 – +5 EV in increments of 1/3 or 1/2 EV in P, S, A, and
M modes
Exposure bracketing 2–5 frames in steps of 1/3, 1/2, 2/3, 1, 2, or 3 EV
Flash bracketing
White balance
bracketing
2–5 frames in steps of 1/3, 1/2, 2/3, 1, 2, or 3 EV
2–5 frames in steps of 1, 2, or 3
ADL bracketing
2 frames using selected value for one frame or 3 frames using preset
values for all frames
Exposure lock
Luminosity locked at detected value with A AE-L/AF-L button
ISO 100 – 6400 in steps of 1/3 or 1/2 EV. Can also be set to approx. 0.3, 0.5,
0.7, 1, or 2 EV (ISO 25600 equivalent) above ISO 6400; auto ISO sensitivity
control available
ISO sensitivity
(Recommended
Exposure Index)
Active D-Lighting
Auto, Extra high, High, Normal, Low, Off
Focus
Autofocus
Nikon Advanced Multi-CAM 3500DX autofocus sensor module with TTL
phase detection, fine-tuning, 51 focus points (including 15 cross-type
sensors; the center 1 focus point is available at apertures slower than
f/5.6 and faster than f/8 or at f/8), and AF-assist illuminator (range
approx. 0.5–3 m/1 ft 8 in.–9 ft 10 in.)
Detection range
Lens servo
–2 – +19 EV (ISO 100, 20 °C/68 °F)
•
Autofocus (AF): Single-servo AF (AF-S); continuous-servo AF (AF-C); auto
AF-S/AF-C selection (AF-A); predictive focus tracking activated
automatically according to subject status
•
Manual focus (M): Electronic rangefinder can be used
Focus point
AF-area mode
Can be selected from 51 or 11 focus points
Single-point AF; 9-, 21-, or 51-point dynamic-area AF, 3D-tracking,
auto-area AF
n
338
Focus
Focus lock
Focus can be locked by pressing shutter-release button halfway (single-
servo AF) or by pressing A AE-L/AF-L button
Flash
Built-in flash
i, k, p, n, o, s, w, g: Auto flash with auto pop-up
P, S, A, M, 0: Manual pop-up with button release
Guide Number
Flash control
Approx. 12/39, 12/39 with manual flash (m/ft, ISO 100, 20 °C/68 °F)
TTL: i-TTL flash control using 2016-pixel RGB sensor is available with built-
in flash and SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, or SB-400; i-TTL
balanced fill-flash for digital SLR is used with matrix and center-weighted
metering, standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR with spot metering
Auto, auto with red-eye reduction, auto slow sync, auto slow sync with
red-eye reduction, fill-flash, red-eye reduction, slow sync, slow sync with
red-eye reduction, rear-curtain with slow sync, rear-curtain sync, off;
Auto FP High-Speed Sync supported
Flash mode
Flash compensation
–3 – +1 EV in increments of 1/3 or 1/2 EV
Flash-ready indicator Lights when built-in flash or optional flash unit is fully charged; flashes
after flash is fired at full output
Accessory shoe
ISO 518 hot-shoe with sync and data contacts and safety lock
Nikon Creative Lighting • Advanced Wireless Lighting supported with:
System (CLS)
- SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, or SB-700 as a master flash and SB-600 or
SB-R200 as remotes, or SU-800 as commander
- Built-in flash can serve as master flash in commander mode
• Auto FP High-Speed Sync and modeling illumination supported with
all CLS-compatible flash units except SB-400; Flash Color Information
Communication and FV lock supported with all CLS-compatible flash
units
Sync terminal
AS-15 sync terminal adapter (available separately)
White balance
White balance
Auto (2 types), incandescent, fluorescent (7 types), direct sunlight, flash,
cloudy, shade, preset manual (up to 6 values can be stored, spot white
balance measurement available during live view), choose color
temperature (2500 K–10000 K), all with fine-tuning
Live view
Modes
Live view photography (still images), movie live view (movies)
Lens servo
•
•
Autofocus (AF): Single-servo AF (AF-S); full-time-servo AF (AF-F)
Manual focus (M)
AF-area mode
Autofocus
Face-priority AF, wide-area AF, normal-area AF, subject-tracking AF
Contrast-detect AF anywhere in frame (camera selects focus point
automatically when face-priority AF or subject-tracking AF is selected)
Movie
Metering
Metering method
TTL exposure metering using main image sensor
Matrix
n
339
Movie
Frame size (pixels) and • 1920 × 1080; 60i (59.94 fields/s)/ 50i (50 fields/s) *
frame rate
• 1920 × 1080; 30p (progressive), 25p, 24p
• 1280 × 720; 60p, 50p
Actual frame rates for 60p, 50p, 30p, 25p, and 24p are 59.94, 50, 29.97, 25,
and 23.976 fps respectively; options support both ★high and normal
image quality
File format
MOV
Video compression
H.264/MPEG-4 Advanced Video Coding
Audio recording format Linear PCM
Audio recording device Built-in or external stereo microphone; sensitivity adjustable
* Available only when 1.3× (18×12) is selected for Image area. Sensor output is about 60 or 50 fps.
Monitor
Monitor
8-cm/3.2-in., approx. 1229 k-dot (VGA; 640 × 480 × 4 = 1,228,800 dots),
TFT monitor with approx. 170° viewing angle, approx. 100% frame
coverage, and brightness adjustment
Playback
Playback
Full-frame and thumbnail (4, 9, or 72 images or calendar) playback with
playback zoom, movie playback, photo and/or movie slide shows,
histogram display, highlights, photo information, GPS data display, and
auto image rotation
Interface
USB
Hi-Speed USB
HDMI output
Accessory terminal
HDMI mini connector (Type C)
Wireless remote controller: WR-1 and WR-R10 (available separately)
Remote cord: MC-DC2 (available separately)
GPS unit: GP-1 (available separately)
Audio input
Audio output
Stereo mini-pin jack (3.5 mm diameter; plug-in power supported)
Stereo mini-pin jack (3.5 mm diameter)
Supported languages
Supported languages Arabic, Bengali, Chinese (Simplified and Traditional), Czech, Danish,
Dutch, English, Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hindi, Hungarian,
Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Norwegian, Persian, Polish,
Portuguese (European and Brazilian), Romanian, Russian, Spanish,
Swedish, Tamil, Thai, Turkish, Ukrainian, Vietnamese
Power source
Battery
One rechargeable Li-ion EN-EL15 battery
Battery pack
Optional MB-D15 multi-power battery pack with one rechargeable
Nikon EN-EL15 Li-ion battery or six AA alkaline, Ni-MH, or lithium
batteries
AC adapter
EH-5b AC adapter; requires EP-5B power connector (available separately)
Tripod socket
Tripod socket
1/4 in. (ISO 1222)
n
340
Dimensions/weight
Dimensions (W × H × D) Approx. 135.5 × 106.5 × 76 mm (5.3 × 4.2 × 3.0 in.)
Weight
Approx. 765 g (1 lb 11.0 oz) with battery and memory card but without
body cap; approx. 675 g (1 lb 7.8 oz; camera body only)
Operating environment
Temperature
0 °C–40 °C (+32 °F–104 °F)
Humidity
85% or less (no condensation)
• Unless otherwise stated, all figures are for a camera with a fully-charged battery operating at the
temperature specified by the Camera and Imaging Products Association (CIPA): 23 3 °C (73.4 5.4 °F).
• Nikon reserves the right to change the specifications of the hardware and software described in this
manual at any time and without prior notice. Nikon will not be held liable for damages that may result
from any mistakes that this manual may contain.
❚❚MH-25 battery charger
Rated input
(in North America)
AC 120 V, 60 Hz, 0.2 A
Rated input
(in other regions)
AC 100–240 V, 50/60 Hz, 0.23–0.12 A
Rated output
DC 8.4 V/1.2 A
Supported batteries
Charging time
Nikon Rechargeable Li-ion Battery EN-EL15
Approx. 2 hours and 35 minutes at an ambient temperature of
25 °C (77 °F) when no charge remains
Operating temperature 0 °C–40 °C (+32 °F–104 °F)
Dimensions (W × H × D) Approx. 91.5 × 33.5 × 71 mm (3.6 × 1.3 × 2.8 in.), excluding projections
Length of power cable Approx. 1.8 m/6 ft (U.S.A. and Canada) or 1.5 m/4.9 ft (other countries)
Weight
Approx. 110 g (3.9 oz), excluding power cable and AC wall adapter
❚❚EN-EL15 rechargeable Li-ion battery
Type
Rated capacity
Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
7.0 V/1900 mAh
Operating temperature 0 °C–40 °C (+32 °F–104 °F)
Dimensions (W × H × D) Approx. 40 × 56 × 20.5 mm (1.6 × 2.2 × 0.8 in.)
Weight
Approx. 88 g (3.1 oz), excluding terminal cover
n
341
❚❚AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR lens
Type
Type G AF-S DX NIKKOR zoom lens with built-in CPU and F mount for use
exclusively with Nikon DX-format digital SLR cameras
Focal length
18–105 mm
Maximum aperture
Lens construction
f/3.5–5.6
15 elements in 11 groups (including 1 aspherical element and 1 ED glass
element)
Angle of view
Focal length scale
76°–15° 20´
Graduated in millimeters (18, 24, 35, 50, 70, 105)
Distance information Output to camera
Zoom
Manual zoom using independent zoom ring
Focusing
Nikon Internal Focusing (IF) system with autofocus controlled by Silent
Wave Motor; manual focus supported when A-M switch is set to A or M.
Focus can be adjusted by rotating lens focus ring while focus is locked in
single-servo autofocus. Do not use focus ring while camera is focusing.
Lens-shift method using voice coil motors (VCMs)
Vibration reduction
Diaphragm blades
Diaphragm
7 (rounded diaphragm opening)
Fully automatic
Aperture range
Metering
•
18 mm focal length: f/3.5–22
•
105 mm focal length: f/5.6–38
Full aperture
Filter-attachment size 67 mm (P=0.75 mm)
Dimensions
Approx. 76 mm diameter × 89 mm/3.0 × 3.5 in. (distance from camera
lens-mount flange)
Weight
Approx. 420 g (14.8 oz)
Nikon reserves the right to change the specifications of the hardware and software described in this
manual at any time and without prior notice. Nikon will not be held liable for damages that may result
from any mistakes that this manual may contain.
n
342
The AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR
The AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR is for use exclusively with Nikon DX
format digital cameras. Superior optical performance and image rendering are
ensured by the use of aspherical lens elements and elements made using extra-low
dispersion (ED) glass to correct chromatic aberration. A rounded aperture produces
soft, esthetically-pleasing blurring of point light sources in out-of-focus areas of the
image (bokeh).
❚❚Vibration Reduction (VR)
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR lenses support vibration reduction
(VR), which reduces blur caused by camera shake even when the camera is panned,
allowing shutter speeds to be slowed by approximately 3 EV (Nikon measurements;
effects vary with the user and shooting conditions).
To use vibration reduction, slide the vibration reduction ON/OFF
switch to ON. Vibration reduction is activated when the shutter-
release button is pressed halfway, reducing the effects of
camera shake on the image in the viewfinder and simplifying
the process of framing the subject and focusing in both
autofocus and manual focus modes. When the camera is
panned, vibration reduction applies only to motion that is not
part of the pan (if the camera is panned horizontally, for
example, vibration reduction will be applied only to vertical
shake), making it much easier to pan the camera smoothly in a
wide arc.
Vibration reduction can be turned off by sliding the vibration reduction ON/OFF
switch to OFF. Turn vibration reduction off when the camera is securely mounted on
a tripod, but leave it on if the tripod head is not secured or when using a monopod.
D Vibration Reduction
Do not turn the camera off or remove the lens while vibration reduction is in effect. If power
to the lens is cut while vibration reduction is on, the lens may rattle when shaken. This is not
a malfunction, and can be corrected by reattaching the lens and turning the camera on.
Vibration reduction is disabled while the built-in flash is charging. When vibration reduction
is active, the image in the viewfinder may be blurred after the shutter is released. This does
not indicate a malfunction.
n
343
A Using the Built-in Flash
When using the built-in flash, be sure the subject is at a range of at least 0.6 m (2 ft) and
remove lens hoods to prevent vignetting (shadows created where the end of the lens
obscures the built-in flash).
Camera
Zoom position
18 mm
24 mm
Minimum distance without vignetting
2.5 m/8 ft 2 in.
D5000, D3100, D3000
1.0 m/3 ft 3 in.
18 mm
24 mm
3.0 m/9 ft 10 in.
1.0 m/3 ft 3 in.
D5200, D5100, D3200
D700, D7100, D7000, D300 series,
D200, D100, D80
All
No vignetting at any focus distance
18 mm
1.5 m/4 ft 11 in.
D90, D70 series
24–105 mm No vignetting at any focus distance
18 mm 1.0 m/3 ft 3 in.
24–105 mm No vignetting at any focus distance
D50
18 mm
24 mm
2.5 m/8 ft 2 in.
1.0 m/3 ft 3 in.
D60, D40 series
35–105 mm No vignetting at any focus distance
Because the built-in flash units for the D100 and D70 can only cover the angle of view of a
lens with a focal length of 20 mm or more; vignetting will occur at a focal length of 18 mm.
D Lens Care
• Keep the CPU contacts clean.
• Use a blower to remove dust and lint from the lens surfaces. To remove smudges and
fingerprints, apply a small amount of ethanol or lens cleaner to a soft, clean cotton cloth
or lens-cleaning tissue and clean from the center outwards using a circular motion, taking
care not to leave smears or touch the glass with your fingers.
• Never use organic solvents such as paint thinner or benzene to clean the lens.
• The lens hood or NC filters can be used to protect the front lens element.
• Attach the front and rear caps before placing the lens in its flexible pouch.
• When a lens hood is attached, do not pick up or hold the lens or camera using only the
hood.
• If the lens will not be used for an extended period, store it in a cool, dry location to prevent
mold and rust. Do not store in direct sunlight or with naphtha or camphor moth balls.
• Keep the lens dry. Rusting of the internal mechanism can cause irreparable damage.
• Leaving the lens in extremely hot locations could damage or warp parts made from
reinforced plastic.
n
344
A Supplied Accessories
• 67 mm Snap-on Front Lens Cap LC-67
• Rear Lens Cap
• Flexible Lens Pouch CL-1018
• Bayonet Hood HB-32 (attaches as shown at
right)
A Optional Accessories
• 67 mm screw-on filters
• Rear Lens Cap LF-1 or Rear Lens Cap LF-4
A A Note on Wide-Angle Lenses
Autofocus may not provide the desired results with wide– and super-wide–angle lenses in
the following situations:
1 The subject does not fill the focus point.
If the subject does not fill the focus point, the camera
may focus on the background and the subject may be
out of focus.
Example: A far-off portrait subject at
some distance from the
background
2 The subject contains many fine details.
The camera may have difficulty focusing on subjects
that contain many fine details or that are lacking in
contrast.
Example: A field of flowers
In these cases, use manual focus, or use focus lock to focus on another subject at
the same distance and then recompose the photograph. For more information, see
n
345
❚❚Supported Standards
•
DCF Version 2.0: The Design Rule for Camera File Systems (DCF) is a standard widely
used in the digital camera industry to ensure compatibility among different makes
of camera.
•
•
DPOF: Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) is an industry-wide standard that allows
pictures to be printed from print orders stored on the memory card.
Exif version 2.3: The camera supports Exif (Exchangeable Image File Format for
Digital Still Cameras) version 2.3, a standard in which information stored with
photographs is used for optimal color reproduction when the images are output
on Exif-compliant printers.
•
•
PictBridge: A standard developed through cooperation with the digital camera and
printer industries, allowing photographs to be output directly to a printer without
first transferring them to a computer.
HDMI: High-Definition Multimedia Interface is a standard for multimedia interfaces
used in consumer electronics and AV devices capable of transmitting audiovisual
data and control signals to HDMI-compliant devices via a single cable connection.
A Trademark Information
Macintosh, Mac OS, and QuickTime are registered trademarks of Apple Inc. in the United
States and/or other countries. Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Vista are either registered
trademarks, or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other
countries. PictBridge is a trademark. The SD, SDHC, and SDXC logos are trademarks of the
SD-3C, LLC. HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks
or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
All other trade names mentioned in this manual or the other documentation provided with
your Nikon product are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders.
A FreeType License (FreeType2)
Portions of this software are copyright © 2013 The FreeType Project (“www.freetype.org”). All
rights reserved.
A MIT License (HarfBuzz)
Portions of this software are copyright © 2013 The HarfBuzz Project (“http://
www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Software/HarfBuzz”). All rights reserved.
n
346
Approved Memory Cards
The following SD memory cards have been tested and approved for use in the
camera. Cards with class 6 or faster write speeds are recommended for movie
recording. Recording may end unexpectedly when cards with slower write speeds
are used.
SD cards
SDHC cards 2
SDXC cards 3
SanDisk
Toshiba
4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB
64 GB
Panasonic
Lexar Media
Platinum II
Professional
Full-HD Video
4 GB, 6 GB, 8 GB, 12 GB, 16 GB, 24 GB, 32 GB
4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB
48 GB, 64 GB
—
2 GB 1
4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB
—
4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB
1 Check that any card readers or other devices with which the card will be used support 2 GB cards.
2 Check that any card readers or other devices with which the card will be used are SDHC-compliant. The
camera supports UHS-I.
3 Check that any card readers or other devices with which the card will be used are
SDXC-compliant. The camera supports UHS-I.
Other cards have not been tested. For more details on the above cards, please
contact the manufacturer.
n
347
Memory Card Capacity
The following table shows the approximate number of pictures that can be stored on
❚❚DX (24×16) Image Area
File size 1
No. of images 1
Buffer capacity 2
Image quality
Image size
NEF (RAW), Lossless
compressed, 12-bit
—
22.7 MB
191
7
NEF (RAW), Lossless
compressed, 14-bit
—
28.5 MB
148
6
NEF (RAW), Compressed, 12-bit
NEF (RAW), Compressed, 14-bit
—
—
20.2 MB
24.9 MB
12.0 MB
7.4 MB
3.8 MB
6.2 MB
3.7 MB
1.9 MB
2.9 MB
1.9 MB
1.0 MB
260
217
507
9
8
33
Large
Medium
Small
Large
Medium
Small
Large
Medium
Small
JPEG fine 3
853
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
1600
1000
1600
3200
1900
3200
6000
JPEG normal 3
JPEG basic 3
❚❚1.3× (18×12) Image Area
File size 1
No. of images 1
Buffer capacity 2
Image quality
Image size
NEF (RAW), Lossless
compressed, 12-bit
—
15.1 MB
295
12
NEF (RAW), Lossless
compressed, 14-bit
—
18.8 MB
229
8
NEF (RAW), Compressed, 12-bit
NEF (RAW), Compressed, 14-bit
—
—
13.4 MB
16.3 MB
8.2 MB
5.0 MB
2.7 MB
4.1 MB
2.5 MB
1.4 MB
2.0 MB
1.3 MB
0.7 MB
399
334
764
14
11
73
Large
Medium
Small
Large
Medium
Small
Large
Medium
Small
JPEG fine 3
JPEG normal 3
JPEG basic 3
1200
2200
1500
2400
4400
2900
4600
8000
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
1 All figures are approximate. File size varies with scene recorded.
2 Maximum number of exposures that can be stored in memory buffer at ISO 100. Drops if Optimal
exposure noise reduction or auto distortion control is on.
3 Figures assume JPEG compression is set to Size priority. Selecting Optimal quality increases the file
size of JPEG images; number of images and buffer capacity drop accordingly.
n
348
Battery Life
The movie footage or number of shots that can be recorded with fully-charged
batteries varies with the condition of the battery, temperature, the interval between
shots, and the length of time menus are displayed. In the case of AA batteries,
capacity also varies with make and storage conditions; some batteries can not be
used. Sample figures for the camera and optional MB-D15 multi-power battery pack
are given below.
•
•
•
Photographs, single-frame release mode (CIPA standard 1)
One EN-EL15 battery (camera): Approximately 950 shots
One EN-EL15 battery (MB-D15): Approximately 950 shots
Six AA alkaline batteries (MB-D15): Approximately 450 shots
Photographs, continuous release mode (Nikon standard 2)
One EN-EL15 battery (camera): Approximately 3550 shots
One EN-EL15 battery (MB-D15): Approximately 3550 shots
Six AA alkaline batteries (MB-D15): Approximately 1200 shots
Movies 3
One EN-EL15 battery (camera): Approximately 100 minutes of HD footage
One EN-EL15 battery (MB-D15): Approximately 100 minutes of HD footage
Six AA alkaline batteries (MB-D15): Approximately 30 minutes of HD footage
1 Measured at 23 °C/73.4 °F ( 3 °C/5.4 °F) with an AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G
ED VR lens under the following test conditions: lens cycled from infinity to minimum
range and one photograph taken at default settings once every 30 s; flash fired once
every other shot. Live view not used.
2 Measured at 20 °C/68 °F with an AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR lens under
the following test conditions: image quality set to JPEG basic, image size set to M
(medium), shutter speed 1/250 s, shutter-release button pressed halfway for three seconds
and focus cycled from infinity to minimum range three times; six shots are then taken in
succession and monitor turned on for five seconds and then turned off; cycle repeated
once standby timer expires.
3 Measured at 23 °C/73.4 °F ( 3 °C/5.4 °F) with the camera at default settings and an AF-S
DX NIKKOR 18–105 mm f/3.5-5.6G ED VR lens under conditions specified by the Camera
and Imaging Products Association (CIPA). Individual movies can be up to 29 minutes and
59 seconds (1920 × 1080/30p) in length or 4 GB in size; recording may end before these
limits are reached if the camera temperature rises.
n
350
The following can reduce battery life:
• Using the monitor
• Keeping the shutter-release button pressed halfway
• Repeated autofocus operations
• Taking NEF (RAW) photographs
• Slow shutter speeds
• Using a GPS unit
• Using an Eye-Fi card
• Using a wireless remote controller, WU-1a wireless mobile adapter, or UT-1
communication unit
• Using VR (vibration reduction) mode with VR lenses
To ensure that you get the most from rechargeable Nikon EN-EL15 batteries:
• Keep the battery contacts clean. Soiled contacts can reduce battery performance.
• Use batteries immediately after charging. Batteries will lose their charge if left
unused.
n
351
Connector for external
E
G
Green intensifier (Filter effects)
F
H
D
Delayed remote (Remote control
I
n
353
J
L
Q
Landscape (Set Picture Control)
N
Quick-response remote (Remote
R
RAW Slot 1 - JPEG Slot 2 (Role
Remote control mode (ML-L3)
Remote mirror-up (Remote
Removing the lens from the
O
Optimal quality (JPEG
M
Overflow (Role played by card in
Manual (Flash cntrl for built-in
P
n
354
S
T
U
V
Size priority (JPEG compression)
Standard (Set Picture Control)
Vibration reduction ON/OFF
W
Standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR
n
a
355
|
